trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@390 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

3 files changed, 28445 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/fminitoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/fminitoc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..583779c426b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/fminitoc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `fminitoc.dtx',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% minitoc.dtx  (with options: `fminitoc')
+%% 
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 2005 by:
+%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
+%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
+%% 
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%% 
+%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
+%% 
+%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
+%% distributed with it.
+%% 
+\ProvidesFile{fminitoc.dtx}[2005/09/16 minitoc french documentation start file]
+\input minitoc.dtx
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `fminitoc.dtx'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1fb55892246
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,27158 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%
+% Copyright (C) 2005 by Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
+% -------------------------------------------------------
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in:
+%
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%
+% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
+%
+% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l
+% distributed with it.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}
+%</driver>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}
+%<*package>
+    [2005/09/16 v43 .dtx minitoc file]
+%</package>
+%
+%<*driver>
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book}
+%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book}
+% 
+\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales � gauche!
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}}
+\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\usepackage[english,tight,hints]{minitoc}
+\or\relax
+\usepackage[french,tight,hints]{minitoc}
+\fi
+\makeatletter
+\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}%
+{\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+          * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J%
+          *************************************}}
+{}
+\RequirePackage{doc}
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+\columnseprule \z@  \columnsep 35\p@
+% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]%
+\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD
+\raggedright
+\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48}  % '60
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\CodelineNumbered
+\DisableCrossrefs
+\setlength{\textwidth}{355pt}
+\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\providecommand\marg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
+\providecommand\oarg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
+\providecommand\parg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}}
+\def\oc@scan#1{%
+  \ifx\oc@bslash#1%
+                      \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else
+  \ifcat a\noexpand#1%
+                      #1\let\next\oc@scan\else
+  \ifx\oc@percent#1%
+                      \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}%
+  \else
+                      #1\let\next\egroup
+  \fi\fi\fi\next}
+\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}%
+\def\oc@verb#1{%
+  \catcode`#1\active
+  \uccode`\~`#1%
+  \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}}
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces%
+  \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+  /catcode`/\/active
+  /catcode`<=/catcode`{%
+  /catcode`>=/catcode`}%
+  /catcode`/{/active%
+  /catcode`/}/active%
+  /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>%
+  /gdef/begmac<    \begin{macrocode}>%
+  /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>%
+/endgroup%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+  \catcode`\\=13
+  /catcode`/|=/catcode`/%
+  /catcode`/%=13
+  /gdef/oldcomments{|
+    /makeatletter
+    /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials
+    /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs
+    /raggedright
+    /oc@verb/>|
+    /oc@verb/<|
+    /let\/oc@bslash
+    /let%/oc@percent
+    /obeylines
+    /parindent/z@
+    /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font
+    /rmfamily
+    /hfuzz/maxdimen
+    }
+/endgroup
+\begingroup
+  \sloppy%
+  \obeylines%
+  \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{%
+    \ifvmode%
+    \def\commentline{#1}%
+    \ifx\commentline\oldc%
+    \end{oldcomments}%
+    \else%
+    \ifx\commentline\begmac%
+    \begin{macrocode}%
+    \else%
+    \leavevmode%
+    #1^^M%
+    \fi\fi%
+    \else%
+    {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M%
+    \fi}%
+\endgroup%
+\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part}
+\def\partname{File}
+\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{%
+  \relax
+  \clearpage
+  \docincludeaux
+  \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}%
+  \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux
+    \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
+  \else \@docinclude#1 \fi}
+\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage
+\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
+\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for
+\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
+\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw
+\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex
+\let\PrintIndex\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges
+%\let\PrintChanges\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary
+\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary
+\part{\currentfile}%
+  {\let\ttfamily\relax
+  \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
+\DocInput{\currentfile}%
+\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex
+\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges
+\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary
+\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary
+\clearpage
+\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
+\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux}
+\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw
+        \immediate\write\@indexfile
+            {\string\indexentry{#1}%
+            {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}%
+\let\filesep\@empty
+\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+\def\@aalph#1{%
+  \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
+         j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or
+         t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or
+         D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
+         N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
+         X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+\def\docincludeaux{%
+  \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}%
+  \let\filekey\@gobble
+  \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{%
+    \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize
+       \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}%
+    \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+  \global\let\docincludeaux\relax
+ \gdef\@oddfoot{%
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax
+    File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} %
+   \else
+    \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}%
+    File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} %
+    Date: \filedate\ %
+    Version \fileversion
+    \fi
+    \hfill\thepage}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+\def\task#1#2{}
+% ``Change History'' in TOC
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change History}}%
+                 \markboth{{Change History}}{{Change History}}}
+%\def\generalname{General}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\or\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
+                 \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
+%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\fi
+\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI
+\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}}
+\or\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}}
+\fi
+%% redefine \glossaryentry
+\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}}
+%%%
+% morefloats.sty ...
+% \iffalse
+%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990
+%% Don Hosek, Quixote <dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu>
+% \fi
+%
+% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed
+% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that
+% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed
+% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact,
+% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be
+% exhausted long before that happened.
+%
+% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed:
+\newinsert\bx@S
+\newinsert\bx@T
+\newinsert\bx@U
+\newinsert\bx@V
+\newinsert\bx@W
+\newinsert\bx@X
+\newinsert\bx@Y
+\newinsert\bx@Z
+\newinsert\bx@AA
+\newinsert\bx@BB
+\newinsert\bx@CC
+\newinsert\bx@DD
+\newinsert\bx@EE
+\newinsert\bx@FF
+\newinsert\bx@GG
+\newinsert\bx@HH
+\newinsert\bx@II
+\newinsert\bx@JJ
+\newinsert\bx@KK
+\newinsert\bx@LL
+\newinsert\bx@MM
+\newinsert\bx@NN
+\newinsert\bx@OO
+\newinsert\bx@PP
+\newinsert\bx@QQ
+\newinsert\bx@RR
+\newinsert\bx@SS
+\newinsert\bx@TT
+\newinsert\bx@UU
+\newinsert\bx@VV
+\newinsert\bx@WW
+\newinsert\bx@XX
+\newinsert\bx@YY
+\newinsert\bx@ZZ
+\newinsert\bx@AAA
+\newinsert\bx@BBB
+%
+% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+
+% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+.
+% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently.
+% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's {\tt doc.sty} to
+% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed.
+\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E
+               \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J
+                \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N
+                \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R
+                \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V
+                \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z
+                \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD
+                \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH
+                \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL
+                \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP
+                \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT
+                \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX
+                \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB}
+\makeatother
+%%%
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+\RecordChanges
+\input{minitoc.pre}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
+%                                       \string#1\actualchar
+%       \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}%
+%     \@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}%
+%                         \@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{%
+%    \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil
+%    \def\@tempb{ }%
+%    \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa
+%       \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar
+%                      \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                      \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}%
+%    \else
+%      \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax
+%           \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar
+%                       \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                       \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}%
+%         \else
+%           \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar
+%                        \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                        \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}%
+%         \fi}%
+%      \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax
+%      \@tempc
+%    \fi}
+% \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{%
+%                                       #1\actualchar
+%                                       {\string\ttfamily\space#1}
+%                                          (environment)%
+%                                       \encapchar \string\main}%
+%     \special@index{environments:\levelchar{%
+%                    \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar
+%            \string\main}\@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
+%    {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}%
+%    \@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
+%     \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
+%            (environment)\encapchar \string\usage}%
+%     \index{environments:\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar
+%            \string\usage}\@esphack}
+% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
+% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
+\gdef\main{\textsf}
+\gdef\usage{\textit}
+\gdef\hyperpage{\textbf}
+% \makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+  \includecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \excludecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{ENGLISH DOC}
+\or\relax
+  \excludecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \includecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{FRENCH DOC}
+\else\relax
+  \includecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \excludecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
+\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
+\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~}
+\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+  \clearpage
+    {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+    }
+\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage
+\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999
+\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits
+\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen
+%%% fixed notes
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.}
+\or\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre z�ro.}
+\fi
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken is some parts of the south
+of the USA, like Louisiane.}
+\or\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parl�e dans certaines parties du
+sud des �tats-Unis, comme la Louisiane.}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\let\fron\relax
+\let\froff\relax
+\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing
+    \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}%
+    \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding}
+                           page}%
+    \def\reftextafter     {on the \reftextvario{following}{next} page}%
+    \def\reftextbefore    {on the \reftextvario{preceding page}{page
+                           before}}%
+    \def\reftextcurrent   {on \reftextvario{this}{the current} page}%
+    \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}%
+    \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
+    \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}%
+\or\relax
+\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing
+\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des Figures}
+\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des Tableaux}
+    \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
+    \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
+    \def\reftextafter     {page suivante}%
+    \def\reftextbefore    {page pr\'ec\'edente}%
+    \def\reftextcurrent   {de cette page}%
+    \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}%
+    \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
+    \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}%
+\fi
+%% small in index
+\let\svtheindex\theindex
+\def\theindex{\svtheindex\small}
+\nonfrenchspacing
+\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\raggedbottom
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11}
+  \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+  \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
+  \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}
+  \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}
+  \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}%
+            \markboth{Index}{Index}%
+            Numbers written in italic refer to the page
+            where the corresponding entry is described;
+            numbers underlined refer to the
+              code line of the
+            definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+              code lines
+            where the entry is used.}
+  \DocInput{minitoc.dtx}
+  \clearpage
+%%  \begin{SMOOTH}
+  \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible
+\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
+               \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}%
+  \PrintChanges
+%%  \end{SMOOTH}
+  \PrintIndex
+  \mtcfixindex[chapter]
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{0}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+%
+% \hyphenation{make-index}
+% \hyphenation{hyper-link}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin}
+% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces}
+% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\egroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcase}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item}
+% \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
+% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing}
+% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
+% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox}
+% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim}
+% \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\markboth,\mathcode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak}
+% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]}
+% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q}
+% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H}
+% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z}
+% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0}
+% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_}
+% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
+% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined}
+% \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\newtoks,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting}
+% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse}
+% \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\*}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ }
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \title{The \textsf{minitoc} package\thanks{This document
+%   corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+% \or\relax
+% \title{Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}\thanks{Ce document
+%   correspond �~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dat� \filedate.}}
+% \fi
+% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert \\ \texttt{jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}
+% \makeatletter
+% \let\SVtitle\@title
+% \let\SVdate\@date
+% \let\SVauthor\@author
+%
+% \def\@maketitle{%
+%   \newpage
+%   \null
+%   \vskip 2em%
+%   \begin{center}%
+%   \let \footnote \thanks
+%     {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}%
+%     \vskip 1.5em%
+%     {\large
+%       \lineskip .5em%
+%       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+%         \SVauthor
+%       \end{tabular}\par}%
+%     \vskip 1em%
+%     {\large \SVdate}%
+%   \end{center}%
+%   \par
+%   \vskip 1.5em}
+% \makeatother
+% \maketitle
+% \doparttoc
+% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot
+% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot
+% {\parskip=0pt
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\shorttoc{Summary}{0}}{}
+% \or\relax
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\shorttoc{Sommaire}{0}}{}
+% \fi
+% \tableofcontents
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% \listoffigures
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% \listoftables
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% }
+%
+% FIX INDEX?
+% \let\svmacro\macro
+% \let\svendmacro\endmacro
+% \let\svenvironment\environment
+% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment
+% \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup}
+% \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup}
+% FIX INDEX?
+%
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM}
+% \or\relax
+% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM}
+% \fi
+% \parttoc
+% ^^A \partlof
+% ^^A \partlot
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{The \texttt{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}
+% \fi
+% \pagestyle{headings}
+% \minitoc
+% \lsneed{5}
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilof
+% \lsneed{5}
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilot
+% \section{Introduction}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been
+% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
+% This package creates a mini-table of contents
+% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \texttt{minitoc} package introduces
+%                 its own jargon, explained in this document.
+%                 It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})%
+% at the beginning of each chapter of a document.
+% It is also possible to have a mini-list of
+% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot'').
+% The document class should of course define chapters
+% (classes like \texttt{book} or \texttt{report}) or sections
+% (classes like \texttt{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \texttt{proc} class loads the standard
+% \texttt{article} class, this class will be just considered as a variant of the \texttt{article} class.}).
+% Thus, this package should not be used with
+% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \texttt{letter}).
+% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level
+% (\emph{i.e.}~classes like \texttt{book}, \texttt{report} and \texttt{article}),
+% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents
+% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document.
+% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'')
+% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot'').
+% When the document class has no \texttt{\bs chapter} command
+% but has a \texttt{\bs section} command, you may use section
+% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level
+% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots'').
+%
+% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables''
+% (or sometimes ``mini-lists'').
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}, �crit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a �t� presque
+% compl�tement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
+% Ce paquetage cr�e une mini-table des mati�res (une �~minitoc~�\,\footnote{Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}
+% introduit son propre jargon, expliqu� dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas �tre trop difficile de
+% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera �videmment utilis� ici.}) au d�but de chaque chapitre d'un document.
+% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une
+% mini-liste des figures (une �~minilot~�) et une mini-liste des tableaux (une �~minilot~�). La classe de document
+% devrait, bien s�r, d�finir des chapitres (classes telles que \texttt{book} ou \texttt{report}) ou des sections
+% (classes telles que \texttt{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \texttt{proc} charge la classe
+% standard \texttt{article}, cette classe sera simplement consid�r�e comme une variante de la classe \texttt{article}.}).
+% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas �tre utilis� avec des classes de document ne poss�dant pas les commandes de
+% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \texttt{letter}).
+% Lorsque la classe de document d�finit un niveau de sectionnement �~partie~� (c'est-�-dire des classes telles
+% que \texttt{book}, \texttt{report} et \texttt{article}), vous pouvez cr�er une table des mati�res
+% �~partielle~� (une �~parttoc~�) au d�but de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste
+% des figures partielle (une �~partlof~�) et une liste des tableaux partielle (une �~partlot~�) au d�but de chaque
+% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne poss�de pas de commande \texttt{\bs chapter} mais a une
+% commande \texttt{\bs section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des mati�res au niveau section (�~secttocs~�) au
+% d�but de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures (�~sectlofs~�) ou des tableaux (�~sectlots~�)
+% au niveau section.
+%
+% Toutes ces tables (�~minitocs~�, �~partlofs~�, �~sectlots~�, etc.) sont collect�es r�f�renc�es sous le terme de
+% �~mini-tables~� (ou parfois �~mini-listes~�).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document.
+% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local
+% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans
+% le m�me document. Cette restriction est destin�e �~�viter des documents pleins de mini-tables des mati�res,
+% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales �~chaque niveau de sectionnement.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative
+% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \verb|\part|.
+% The commands relative
+% to the section level are defined only if the document class
+% defines \verb|\section| but does not define \verb|\chapter|.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont d�finies que si la classe de document
+% d�finit \verb|\part|.
+% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont d�finies que si la classe de document d�finit \verb|\section|
+% mais ne d�finit pas \verb|\chapter|.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The current version of this package is~\#43.
+% \or\relax
+% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#43.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{License}
+% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the
+% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (as convenient) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% \begin{quote}
+%    \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
+% \end{quote}
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{}
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Licence}
+% Ce paquetage doit �tre distribu� et/ou peut �tre modifi� sous les conditions de la
+% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version
+% ult�rieure. La plus r�cente version de cette licence est dans
+% \begin{quote}\froff
+%     \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
+% \end{quote}
+% et la version~1.3 ou ult�rieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou
+% ult�rieure.
+%
+% Mais, s'il vous pla�t, ne me parlez pas de versions bricol�es; elles ne seront pas maintenues.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to use the \texttt{minitoc} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment utiliser le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et cr�er les mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To use the \texttt{minitoc} package, you must introduce a command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour utiliser le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}, vous devez introduire une commande:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must
+% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning
+% commands; if you modify sectionning commands after loading the
+% \texttt{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}.
+% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter,
+% after the \verb|\chapter| command, at the point of the \verb|\minitoc|
+% command. The \texttt{\bs minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means
+% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a
+% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be
+% used, but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you ask details
+% with a high value for \texttt{minitocdepth}.} inside a chapter. Of course, it is better
+% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide
+% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the
+% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% dans le pr�ambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit �tre plac�e \emph{apr�s} toute modification faite sur
+% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement apr�s le chargement du paquetage
+% \texttt{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}.
+% La mini-table des mati�res sera dans le chapitre, apr�s la commande \verb|\chapter|, �~l'emplacement de la
+% commande \verb|\minitoc|. La commande \texttt{\bs minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque
+% n'importe~o�}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~o�~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alin�as
+% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une
+% note marginale ou infrapaginale). M�me un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant  peut �tre utilis�, mais avec
+% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut �tre assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des
+% d�tails avec une valeur �lev�e de  \texttt{minitocdepth}.} �~l'int�rieur d'un chapitre.
+% Bien s�r, il est pr�f�rable de la placer au d�but du chapitre, �ventuellement
+% apr�s un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi d�cider de la placer �~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez
+% utiliser les m�mes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des mati�res pour
+% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la s�quence donn�e dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
+% \centering
+% {\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{book\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs mtcindent\}\{24pt\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs mtcskipamount\}\{\bs bigskipamount\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{minitocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs mtcfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs mtcSfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{minitoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs dominitoc&\\
+% \bs dominilof&\\
+% \bs dominilot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{or} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs chapter\{...\}&\\
+% \bs minitoc & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs mtcskip\\
+% \bs minilof & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs mtcskip\\
+% \bs minilot & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
+% \centering
+% {\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{book\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs mtcindent\}\{24pt\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs mtcskipamount\}\{\bs bigskipamount\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{minitocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs mtcfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs mtcSfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{minitoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs dominitoc&\\
+% \bs dominilof&\\
+% \bs dominilot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{ou} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs chapter\{...\}&\\
+% \bs minitoc & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs mtcskip\\
+% \bs minilof & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs mtcskip\\
+% \bs minilot & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \meta{document}\verb|.mtc|\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number.
+% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique,
+% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the
+% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \texttt{\bs firstpartis},
+% \texttt{\bs firstchapteris}, and \texttt{\bs firstsectionis}.}.
+% The suffix is \verb|.mlf|\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and
+% is \verb|.mlt|\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
+% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending of the
+% document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque mini-table des mati�res, un fichier auxiliaire sera cr�� avec un nom de la forme
+% \meta{document}\verb|.mtc|\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu du chapitre. �~Absolu~� signifie que ce num�ro est
+% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les
+% mini-tables a r�solu certains probl�mes t�n�breux, et aussi frapp� d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que
+% \texttt{\bs firstpartis}, \texttt{\bs firstchapteris} et \texttt{\bs firstsectionis}.}.
+% Le suffixe est \verb|.mlf|\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \verb|.mlt|\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de tableaux.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre syst�me d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux
+% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Pr�paration des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of
+% the  \texttt{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David}{Carlisle}, with his permission.}
+% \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof|, and \verb|\dominilot| (for mini-tables at the chapter level),
+% take the \meta{document}\verb|.toc|, \meta{document}\verb|.lof|, and \meta{document}\verb|.lot| files, respectively,
+% and cut slices from them to create the
+% \meta{document}\verb|.mtc|\meta{N}, \meta{document}\verb|.mlf|\meta{N}, and \meta{document}\verb|.mlt|\meta{N} files.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.{}} est directement d�riv� de celui du
+% paquetage \texttt{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.}
+% \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof| et \verb|\dominilot| (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent
+% les fichiers \meta{document}\verb|.toc|, \meta{document}\verb|.lof| et \meta{document}\verb|.lot|, respectivement, et en
+% pr�l�vent des tranches pour cr�er les fichiers \meta{document}\verb|.mtc|\meta{N}, \meta{document}\verb|.mlf|\meta{N}
+% et \meta{document}\verb|.mlt|\meta{N}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands \verb|\dosecttoc|, \verb|\dosectlof|, and \verb|\dosectlot| (for mini-tables at the section level)
+% and \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\dopartlof|, and \verb|\dopartlot| (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% ^^A \null\virage\hfill\null\\*[-1.7\baselineskip]
+% To obtain a satisfactory result (\emph{i.e.}~non empty), please note that all these commands must
+% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \verb|\tableofcontents|, \verb|\listoffigures|,
+% and \verb|\listoftables| commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings.
+%
+% It is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an
+% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before}\virage{}
+% any \verb|\caption|-like command
+% producing an entry in the list of figure (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables
+% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables may result.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes \verb|\dosecttoc|, \verb|\dosectlof| et \verb|\dosectlot| (pour les mini-tables au niveau section),
+% et \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\dopartlof| et \verb|\dopartlot| (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont
+% analogues.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% ^^A \null\virage\hfill\null\\*[-1.7\baselineskip]
+% Pour obtenir un r�sultat satisfaisant (c'est-�-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent
+% \emph{imp�rativement �tre plac�es avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \verb|\tableofcontents|,
+% \verb|\listoffigures| et \verb|\listoftables|, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|!
+%
+% Il est aussi \emph{fortement} recommand� de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de
+% sectionnement produisant une entr�e dans la tables des mati�res (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et
+% \emph{avant}\virage{} toute commande analogue �~\verb|\caption| produisant une entr�e dans la liste des figures (pour les
+% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les
+% mini-tables pourraient �tre dans le d�sordre.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mtcskip| command may be used to add a vertical
+% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is
+% \verb|\mtcskipamount| (equal to \verb|\bigskipamount| by default).
+% \verb|\mtcskip| eliminates any immediate previous vertical
+% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is
+% empty and skipped by the \index{checkfiles}\texttt{checkfiles} option.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\mtcskip| peut �tre utilis�e pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur
+% est \verb|\mtcskipamount| (�gale �~\verb|\bigskipamount| par d�faut). \verb|\mtcskip| �limine tout saut vertical
+% qui pr�c�de imm�diatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc
+% ignor�e par l'option \index{checkfiles}\texttt{checkfiles}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level table of contents will be in the section,
+% after the \verb|\section| command, at the point of the \verb|\secttoc|
+% command. The \texttt{\bs secttoc} command may occur
+%          \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. Of course, it is better
+%          to put it at the beginning of the section, or
+%          after some short introductory material. You should use the
+%          same conventions in all sections.
+% If you want to add the section-level table of contents for a section,
+% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des mati�res au niveau section sera dans la section, apr�s la commande \verb|\section|, �~l'emplacement
+% de la commande \verb|\secttoc|. La commande \texttt{\bs secttoc} peut �tre plac�e \emph{presque n'importe~o�}
+% �~l'int�rieur d'une section. Bien s�r, il est pr�f�rable de la placer au d�but de la section, ou �ventuellement
+% apr�s un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les m�mes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous
+% souhaitez ajouter la table des mati�res au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la s�quence
+% donn�e dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{article\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs stcindent\}\{24pt\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{secttocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs stcfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs stcSSfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{secttoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs dosecttoc&\\
+% \bs dosectlof&\\
+% \bs dosectlot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{or} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs section\{...\}&\\
+% \bs secttoc & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs sectlof & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs sectlot & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{article\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs stcindent\}\{24pt\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{secttocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs stcfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs stcSSfont\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{secttoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs dosecttoc&\\
+% \bs dosectlof&\\
+% \bs dosectlot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{ou} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs section\{...\}&\\
+% \bs secttoc & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs sectlof & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs sectlot & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \meta{document}\verb|.stc|\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number.
+% The suffix is \verb|.slf|\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and
+% is \verb|.slt|\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
+% section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque table des mati�res au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera cr�� avec un nom de la forme
+% \meta{document}\verb|.stc|\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu de section. Le suffixe est \verb|.slf|\meta{N} pour les
+% listes de figures au niveau section et \verb|.slt|\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre syst�me d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lsneed{3}
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As floats (figures and tables) could drift somewhere outside the
+% printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and
+% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better
+% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the
+% \Virage\index{insection}\texttt{insection} option in the \verb|\usepackage| command:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\usepackage[insection]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if you want more coherent sectlofs and sectlots.
+% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \verb|\FloatBarrier| command of this package to correctly place the
+% figure or table and have a correct mini-table.
+% The \texttt{insection} option loads the \texttt{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}
+% with its \texttt{verbose}, \texttt{section} and \texttt{bottom} options. The
+% \texttt{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arsenau}, is available
+% on CTAN archives; \texttt{placeins.sty} contains its own
+% documentation, with a copy in \texttt{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18.
+% \or\relax
+% Comme les �l�ments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient d�river quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression
+% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent �tre assez �tranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur
+% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut �tre utile d'ajouter l'option
+% \Virage\index{insection}\texttt{insection} dans la commande \verb|\usepackage|:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\usepackage[insection]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si vous d�sirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus coh�rentes.
+% Il peut m�me �tre n�cessaire d'utiliser la commande \verb|\FloatBarrier| de ce paquetage pour placer
+% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte.
+% L'option \texttt{insection} charge le paquetage
+% \texttt{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \texttt{verbose}, \texttt{section} et \texttt{bottom}. Le paquetage
+% \texttt{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arsenau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN; \texttt{placeins.sty}
+% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \texttt{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus
+% r�cente que 2005/04/18.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part,
+% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des mati�res partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la s�quence donn�e
+% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{book\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs ptcindent\}\{0pt\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{parttocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcCfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcSfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{parttoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs doparttoc&\\
+% \bs dopartlof&\\
+% \bs dopartlot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{or} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{or} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs part\{...\}&\\
+% \bs parttoc & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs partlof & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \bs partlot & \emph{if you want one}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs documentclass[...]\{book\}}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs usepackage[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \bs setlength\{\bs ptcindent\}\{0pt\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \bs setcounter\{parttocdepth\}\{2\} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcCfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs renewcommand\{\bs ptcSfont\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetdepth\{parttoc\}\{2\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bs mtcsetfont\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}} & \emph{d�faut}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs doparttoc&\\
+% \bs dopartlof&\\
+% \bs dopartlot&\\
+% \bs tableofcontents & \emph{ou} \bs faketableofcontents\\
+% \bs listoffigures & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoffigures\\
+% \bs listoftables & \emph{ou} \bs fakelistoftables\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs part\{...\}&\\
+% \bs parttoc & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs partlof & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \bs partlot & \emph{si vous en voulez une}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \meta{document}\verb|.ptc|\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
+% The suffix is \verb|.plf|\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and
+% is \verb|.plt|\meta{N} for partial lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short
+% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
+%  section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque table des mati�res au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera cr�� avec un nom de la forme
+% \meta{document}\verb|.ptc|\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu de partie. Le suffixe est \verb|.plf|\meta{N} pour les
+% listes de figures au niveau partie et \verb|.plt|\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre syst�me d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking
+% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a
+% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list
+% of figures (\emph{i.e.}~the title and two horizontal rules).
+% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring
+% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a
+% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part
+% list of figures (\emph{i.e.}~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks
+% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and
+% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot).
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour
+% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour r�sultat une mini-liste
+% des figures vide et laide (c'est-�-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander
+% ou non une table des mati�res partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine
+% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour r�sultat une liste partielle des figures
+% vide et laide (c'est-�-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables
+% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and
+% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended
+% to put no \verb|\minitoc| command in
+% a chapter without sections and no \verb|\minilof| or
+% \verb|\minilot| command in a chapter without figures or tables.
+% The \index{checkfiles}\texttt{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option
+% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \texttt{.log} file);
+% the \index{nocheckfiles}\texttt{nocheckfiles} package option restores
+% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignor�es et ce probl�me devrait dispara�tre
+% dans des circonstances normales. N�anmoins, il est recommand� de ne pas mettre de commande \verb|\minitoc| dans un
+% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \verb|\minilof| ou \verb|\minilot| dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans
+% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \index{checkfiles}\texttt{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}), active par
+% d�faut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \texttt{.log}); l'option de paquetage
+% \index{nocheckfiles}\texttt{nocheckfiles} r�tablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprim�es).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents
+% contain only references higher and to sections and
+% subsections. The counters \index{parttocdepth}\texttt{parttocdepth},
+% \index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth} and \index{secttocdepth}\texttt{secttocdepth},
+% similar to \texttt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial
+% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of
+% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\index{lofdepth}\texttt{lofdepth} and
+% \index{lotdepth}\texttt{lotdepth}), as done by the \index{subfig}\texttt{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} from
+% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like
+% \texttt{partlofdepth}, \texttt{partlotdepth}, \texttt{minilofdepth}, \texttt{minilotdepth}, \texttt{sectlofdepth},
+% and \texttt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les mini-tables et tables des mati�res partielles contiennent seulement les r�f�rences jusqu'aux sections et
+% sous-sections. Les compteurs \index{parttocdepth}\texttt{parttocdepth}, \index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth}
+% et \index{secttocdepth}\texttt{secttocdepth}, similaires �~\texttt{tocdepth}, permettent �~l'utilisateur de
+% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affect�es par ces compteurs, mais
+% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeurs pour ces listes (\index{lofdepth}\texttt{lofdepth} et
+% \index{lotdepth}\texttt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par le paquetage
+% \index{subfig}\texttt{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont cr��s si
+% n�cessaires, portant des noms �vidents tels que \texttt{partlofdepth}, \texttt{partlotdepth},
+% \texttt{minilofdepth}, \texttt{minilotdepth}, \texttt{sectlofdepth} et \texttt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections �toil�s}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \verb|\chapter*| and a
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \verb|\chapter*| et une commande
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% command to add something in the
+% table of contents, the numbering of the \texttt{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered.
+% To avoid that problem, say:\Virage
+% \or\relax
+% pour ajouter quelque chose dans la table des mati�res, la num�rotation des fichiers auxiliaires de
+% \texttt{minitoc} serait alt�r�e. Pour �viter ce probl�me, dites:\Virage
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addstarredpart{...}|\\
+% \verb|\addstarredchapter{...}|\\
+% \verb|\addstarredsection{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or
+% sect-toc; for lower levels, use, as usual:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une  part-, mini- ou
+% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inf�rieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% for example, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the
+% minitoc of a starred chapter:
+% \or\relax
+% par exemple, pour ajouter une entr�e de niveau section dans la table des mati�res globale et dans la minitoc
+% d'un chapitre �toil�:
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{verse}
+%    \verb|\chapter*{Title of chapter}|\\
+%    \verb|\addstarredchapter{Title of chapter}|\\
+%    \verb|\minitoc|\\
+%    \verb|\section*{First section}|\\
+%    \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{First section}|\\
+%    \verb|\section*{Second section}|\\
+%    \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Second section}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{verse}
+%    \verb|\chapter*{Titre du chapitre}|\\
+%    \verb|\addstarredchapter{Titre du chapitre}|\\
+%    \verb|\minitoc|\\
+%    \verb|\section*{Premi�re section}|\\
+%    \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Premi�re section}|\\
+%    \verb|\section*{Seconde section}|\\
+%    \verb|\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Seconde section}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when
+% you use \verb|\chapter*| (or \verb|\section*|): the minitocs
+% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \verb|\adjustmtc|
+% (or \verb|\adjuststc| or \verb|\adjustptc|) command at the end
+% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the
+% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \verb|\stepcounter{mtc}| or \verb|\addtocounter{mtc}{...}|
+% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \texttt{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows
+% what to do about \verb|\adjustmtc| (and others), but can do
+% nothing about \verb|\stepcounter| or \verb|\addtocounter|, as they are a standard basic commands
+% of \LaTeX, not \texttt{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:
+% \or\relax
+% Il y a parfois un probl�me avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \verb|\chapter*| (ou \verb|\section*|):\ les
+% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \verb|\adjustmtc| (ou
+% \verb|\adjuststc|, ou \verb|\adjustptc|) �~la fin du chapitre �toil� (ou de la section ou partie �toil�e) pour
+% incr�menter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \verb|\stepcounter{mtc}|
+% ou \verb|\addtocounter{mtc}{...}| (ceci
+% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff} (voir section~\vref{o+mtcoff})
+% sait quoi faire avec \verb|\adjustmtc| (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \verb|\stepcounter| ou
+% \verb|\addtocounter|, car ce sont des
+% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes sp�cifiques de \texttt{minitoc}. Syntaxe:
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\adjustptc[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\\
+% \verb|\adjustmtc[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\\
+% \verb|\adjuststc[|\emph{n}\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1).
+% \or\relax
+% o� \emph{n} est l'incr�ment (d�faut:~1).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters:
+% \verb|\decrementptc|, \verb|\decrementmtc|, \verb|\decrementstc|,
+% \verb|\incrementptc|, \verb|\incrementmtc|, and \verb|\incrementstc|;
+% the same remarks as above apply.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{d�cr�menter} ou \emph{incr�menter} de~1 ces compteurs:
+% \verb|\decrementptc|, \verb|\decrementmtc|, \verb|\decrementstc|,
+% \verb|\incrementptc|, \verb|\incrementmtc| et \verb|\incrementstc|;
+% les m�mes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A more clever way to solve this problem is to use commands similar to:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<title>\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% This command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the
+% counter, because it calls \verb|\adjustmtc|). The
+% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put
+% \emph{after} \verb|\chapter*|, etc.\
+% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will
+% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs.
+% If the optional argument is something invisible
+% (like~\verb|~|, \verb|\space| or \verb|\quad|), the result will be strange
+% but still logically correct.
+% \or\relax
+% Une mani�re plus �l�gante de r�soudre ce probl�me est d'utiliser des commandes similaires~�:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<titre>\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% Cette commande ajoute une entr�e dans la table des mati�res (et ajuste le compteur, car elle appelle \verb|\adjustmtc|).
+% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{apr�s} \verb|\chapter*|, etc.\ Si
+% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entr�e ne sera visible dans la table des mati�res ni
+% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \verb|\space| ou \verb|\quad|),
+% le r�sultat sera �trange mais cependant logiquement correct.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands to add an entry in the table of contents for
+% a starred part, chapter, or section.}\label{t+mtcadd}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Level}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
+% \midrule
+% part&\verb|\mtcaddpart[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% chapter&\verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% section&\verb|\mtcaddsection[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \textbf{Level}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
+% \hline
+% part&\verb|\mtcaddpart[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% chapter&\verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% section&\verb|\mtcaddsection[|\<title>\verb|]|\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour ajouter une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour une partie, un chapitre ou une
+% section �toil�s.}\label{t+mtcadd}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Niveau}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
+% \midrule
+% partie&\verb|\mtcaddpart[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% chapitre&\verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% section&\verb|\mtcaddsection[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \textbf{Niveau}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
+% \hline
+% partie&\verb|\mtcaddpart[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% chapitre&\verb|\mtcaddchapter[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% section&\verb|\mtcaddsection[|\<titre>\verb|]|\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables}
+% The mini-tables are typeset in a \texttt{verse}-like environment, and can be split over pages.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Composition des mini-tables}
+% Les mini-tables sont compos�es dans un environnement analogue �~\texttt{verse}, et donc peuvent s'�tendre sur
+% plusieurs pages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \texttt{\bs mtcfont}
+% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default. Section entries are typeset
+% in the \texttt{\bs mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default.
+% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \verb|\mtcSSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSSfont|,
+% \verb|\mtcPfont| and \verb|\mtcSPfont| are available
+% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \verb|\mlffont| and \verb|\mltfont|, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default.
+% Tables~\vref{t+mtc+f1} and~\vref{t+mtc+f2} summarize these
+% many commands\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, who contributed these tables initially.}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% La mini-table des mati�res est compos�e dans la fonte \texttt{\bs mtcfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par d�faut. Les entr�es de type section sont compos�es dans la fonte
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par d�faut. Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections,
+% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \verb|\mtcSSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSSfont|,
+% \verb|\mtcPfont| et \verb|\mtcSPfont| sont disponibles (par d�faut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre
+% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont compos�es dans les fontes
+% \verb|\mlffont| et \verb|\mltfont|, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par d�faut. Les tableaux~\vref{t+mtc+f1}
+% et~\vref{t+mtc+f2} listent ces nombreuses
+% commandes\,\footnote{Merci �~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich}, qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence is not definitive. A symptom of this
+% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold font are mixed\,\footnote{This
+% appears e.g.\ if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts. The symptom disappears if you do not use bold
+% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\texttt{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}), by example\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{,
+% like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.}
+% (the true length of
+% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can eventualy be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par
+% \or\relax
+% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par d�faut n'est certainement pas parfait et donc n'est pas d�finitif.
+% Un sympt�me de
+% cette imperfection est la pr�sence d'alignements impr�cis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses
+% sont m�lang�es\,\footnote{Ceci appara�t notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR). Le
+% sympt�me dispara�t si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage
+% \texttt{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{,
+% comme dans ce document}{\relax}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.}
+% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la m�me pour ces fontes).
+% Ceci peut �ventuellement �tre corrig� en changeant quelques fontes.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \footnotesize
+% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands.}\label{t+mtc+f1}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Command
+%     & \FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
+%         & \FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
+%             & \FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
+% \V\parttoc
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\ptcfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\ptctitle}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlof
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\plffont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plftitle}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlot
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\pltfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minitoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mtcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mtctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mlffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \V\secttoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\stcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\stctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\slffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\sltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
+%      \V{\chapter} level (e.g. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{l}{\Sec for document classes with
+%      no \V{\chapter} level (e.g. \V{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
+%      changed by the language definition files or
+%      \V\renewcommand}.\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Command
+%     & \FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
+%         & \FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
+%             & \FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
+% \V\parttoc
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\ptcfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\ptctitle}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlof
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\plffont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plftitle}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlot
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\pltfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minitoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mtcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mtctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mlffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \V\secttoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\stcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\stctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\slffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\sltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
+%      \V{\chapter} level (e.g. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with
+%      no \V{\chapter} level (e.g. \V{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
+%      changed by the language definition files or
+%      \V\renewcommand}.\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \footnotesize
+% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables.}\label{t+mtc+f1}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Commande
+%     & \FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par d�faut}
+%         & \FontDefault{Cha�ne titre}{choix par d�faut}
+%             & \FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par d�faut}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
+% \V\parttoc
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\ptcfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\ptctitle}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlof
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\plffont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plftitle}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlot
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\pltfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minitoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mtcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mtctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mlffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \V\secttoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\stcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\stctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\slffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\sltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
+%      \V{\chapter} (par~ex. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
+%      \V{\chapter} (par~ex. \V{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par d�faut pour l'anglais;
+%      chang� par les fichiers de d�finition de langage ou
+%      \V\renewcommand}.\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape et \V\mdseries\ par d�faut.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Commande
+%     & \FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par d�faut}
+%         & \FontDefault{Cha�ne titre}{choix par d�faut}
+%             & \FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par d�faut}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
+% \V\parttoc
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\ptcfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\ptctitle}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlof
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\plffont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plftitle}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\partlot
+%     & \FontChapSec{\V\pltfont}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               & \FontChapSec{\V\ptifont}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minitoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mtcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mtctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mlffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\minilot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\mltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\mtifont}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \V\secttoc
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\stcfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\stctitle}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlof
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\slffont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\mlftitle}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \V\sectlot
+%     & \FontDefault{\V\sltfont}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             & \FontDefault{\V\plttitle}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     & \FontDefault{\V\stifont}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
+%      \V{\chapter} (par~ex. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
+%      \V{\chapter} (par~ex. \V{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par d�faut pour l'anglais;
+%      chang� par les fichiers de d�finition de langage ou
+%      \V\renewcommand}.\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape et \V\mdseries{} par d�faut.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \small
+% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries.}\label{t+mtc+f2}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Level & Font & default setting\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\parttoc} entries:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapter\Chap
+%      & \V\ptcCfont\Chap
+%          & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      & \V\ptcSfont
+%          & \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Subsection
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%         & \V\ptcPfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%         & \V\ptcSPfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     & \V\mtcSfont
+%         & \V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsection
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     & \V\mtcPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     & \V\mtcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Subsection
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     & \V\stcPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     & \V\stcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \V{\chapter}
+%      level (e.g. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \V{\chapter}
+%      level (e.g. \V{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Level & Font & default setting\\
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\parttoc} entries:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapter\Chap
+%      & \V\ptcCfont\Chap
+%          & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      & \V\ptcSfont
+%          & \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Subsection
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%         & \V\ptcPfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%         & \V\ptcSPfont
+%             & \emph{(like \V\ptcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     & \V\mtcSfont
+%         & \V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsection
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     & \V\mtcPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     & \V\mtcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\mtcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \V{\secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Subsection
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     & \V\stcPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     & \V\stcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(like \V\stcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \V{\chapter}
+%      level (e.g. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \V{\chapter}
+%      level (e.g. \V{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \small
+% \caption{Fontes pour les entr�es des mini-tables.}\label{t+mtc+f2}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Niveau & Fonte & Choix par d�faut\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\parttoc}:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapitre\Chap
+%      & \V\ptcCfont\Chap
+%          & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      & \V\ptcSfont
+%          & \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Sous-section
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%         & \V\ptcPfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%         & \V\ptcSPfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\minitoc}:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     & \V\mtcSfont
+%         & \V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-section
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     & \V\mtcPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     & \V\mtcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\secttoc}:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Sous-section
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     & \V\stcPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     & \V\stcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \V{\chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \V{\chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \V{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Niveau & Fonte & Choix par d�faut\\
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\parttoc}:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapitre\Chap
+%      & \V\ptcCfont\Chap
+%          & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      & \V\ptcSfont
+%          & \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Sous-section
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%         & \V\ptcSSfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%         & \V\ptcPfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraph
+%         & \V\ptcSPfont
+%             & \emph{(comme \V\ptcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\minitoc}:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     & \V\mtcSfont
+%         & \V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-section
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     & \V\mtcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     & \V\mtcPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     & \V\mtcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\mtcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entr�es d'une \V{\secttoc}:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Sous-section
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     & \V\stcSSfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     & \V\stcPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     & \V\stcSPfont
+%         & \emph{(comme \V\stcfont)}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \V{\chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \V{book}, \V{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \V{\chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \V{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \texttt{\bs mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \texttt{\bs mtctitle}, \texttt{\bs mlftitle}
+% and \texttt{\bs mlttitle}, which
+% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \texttt{\bs renewcommand} or \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english. The language option files like
+% \texttt{french.mld} and \texttt{english.mld} (the suffix
+% \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'')
+% (and others, see table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont compos�s dans la fonte \texttt{\bs mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par d�faut) et les textes des
+% titres sont d�finis par \texttt{\bs mtctitle}, \texttt{\bs mlftitle} et \texttt{\bs mlttitle}, qui sont les
+% cha�nes �~Contents~�, �~Figures~� et �~Tables~� par d�faut. Ces titres devraient �tre red�finis par \texttt{\bs
+% renewcommand} or \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
+% Les fichiers d'option de langue tels que \texttt{french.mld}
+% et \texttt{english.mld} (le suffixe \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} signifie �~\emph{minitoc language definition
+% (file)}~�) (et d'autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous
+% pouvez facilement pr�parer un fichier similaire pour votre langue pr�f�r�e (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces
+% titres en utilisant la macro \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[!tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages}
+% \centering
+% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\raggedright\small
+% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
+% \begin{multicols}{4}
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
+% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$
+% \item armenian\,$^c$
+% \item bahasa\,$^c$
+% \item bangla\,$^c$
+% \item basque
+% \item bicig\,$^c$
+% \item brazil (brazilian)
+% \item breton
+% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
+% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
+% \item buryat\,$^c$
+% \item catalan
+% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item croatian
+% \item czech
+% \item danish
+% \item dutch
+% \item english (american, british, canadian, UKenglish, USenglish)
+% \item esperant (esperanto)
+% \item estonian
+% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
+% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item finnish
+% \item finnish2
+% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
+% \item galician
+% \item german (austrian)
+% \item germanb
+% \item greek\,$^c$
+% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item guarani\,$^h$
+% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hebrew\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item icelandic\,$^f$
+% \item interlingua
+% \item irish
+% \item italian
+% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item latin
+% \item latin2
+% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
+% \item lithuanian
+% \item lsorbian
+% \item magyar (hungarian)
+% \item magyar2
+% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
+% \item mongol\,$^c$
+% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
+% \item norsk
+% \item nynorsk
+% \item polish
+% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item portuguese (portuges)
+% \item romanian
+% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item samin
+% \item scottish
+% \item serbian
+% \item serbianc\,$^c$
+% \item slovak
+% \item slovene
+% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
+% \item spanish2
+% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
+% \item swedish
+% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
+% \item turkish
+% \item ukraineb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item usorbian
+% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item welsh
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \footnotetext{$^a$~The \texttt{arab(ic)}
+% language requires the use of Arab\TeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}.}
+% \footnotetext{$^b$~%
+% The \texttt{russian} language is not yet supported by \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel},
+% but \texttt{russianb} is supported if you
+% use babel-3.6 or higher; \texttt{russianc} is an extra.}
+% \footnotetext{$^c$~Some languages may require specific fonts.}
+% \footnotetext{$^d$~Requires the CJK package~\cite{cjk2}.}
+% \footnotetext{$^e$~Requires Lambda, the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega.}
+% \footnotetext{$^f$~Requires a 8-bit input encoding.}
+% \footnotetext{$^g$~Uses also a \texttt{.mlo} file.}
+% \footnotetext{$^h$~Requires a specific input encoding.}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[!tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages}
+% \centering
+% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\raggedright\small
+% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
+% \begin{multicols}{4}
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
+% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$
+% \item armenian\,$^c$
+% \item bahasa\,$^c$
+% \item bangla\,$^c$
+% \item basque
+% \item bicig\,$^c$
+% \item brazil (brazilian)
+% \item breton
+% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
+% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
+% \item buryat\,$^c$
+% \item catalan
+% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item croatian
+% \item czech
+% \item danish
+% \item dutch
+% \item english (american, british, canadian, UKenglish, USenglish)
+% \item esperant (esperanto)
+% \item estonian
+% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
+% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item finnish
+% \item finnish2
+% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
+% \item galician
+% \item german (austrian)
+% \item germanb
+% \item greek\,$^c$
+% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item guarani\,$^h$
+% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hebrew\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item icelandic\,$^f$
+% \item interlingua
+% \item irish
+% \item italian
+% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item latin
+% \item latin2
+% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
+% \item lithuanian
+% \item lsorbian
+% \item magyar (hungarian)
+% \item magyar2
+% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
+% \item mongol\,$^c$
+% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
+% \item norsk
+% \item nynorsk
+% \item polish
+% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item portuguese (portuges)
+% \item romanian
+% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item samin
+% \item scottish
+% \item serbian
+% \item serbianc\,$^c$
+% \item slovak
+% \item slovene
+% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
+% \item spanish2
+% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
+% \item swedish
+% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
+% \item turkish
+% \item ukraineb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item usorbian
+% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item welsh
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \footnotetext{$^a$~La langue <<~\texttt{arab(ic)}~>> requiert l'utilisation du paquetage
+% Arab\TeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}.}
+% \footnotetext{$^b$~%
+% La langue <<~\texttt{russian}~� n'est pas encore support�e par \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel},
+% mais <<~\texttt{russianb}~>> est support�e si vous utilisez
+% babel-3.6 ou une version sup�rieure; <<~\texttt{russianc}~>> est un suppl�ment.}
+% \footnotetext{$^c$~Certaines langues peut requ�rir des fontes sp�cifiques.}
+% \footnotetext{$^d$~Requiert le paquetage CJK~\cite{cjk2}.}
+% \footnotetext{$^e$~Requiert Lambda, la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega.}
+% \footnotetext{$^f$~Requiert un codage en entr�e sur 8~bits.}
+% \footnotetext{$^g$~Utilise aussi un fichier \texttt{.mlo}.}
+% \footnotetext{$^h$~Requiert un codage en entr�e sp�cifique.}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \texttt{\bs ptcfont}
+% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% Chapter entries are typeset in the \texttt{\bs ptcCfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
+% Section entries are typeset in the \texttt{\bs ptcSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default. For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \verb|\ptcSSfont|, \verb|\ptcSSSfont|,
+% \verb|\ptcPfont|, and \verb|\ptcSPfont| are available
+% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
+% want to use various fonts. Partial lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \verb|\plffont| and \verb|\pltfont|, which are
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des mati�res au niveau partie est compos�e dans la fonte \texttt{\bs ptcfont}, qui est d�finie comme
+% �tant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut. Les entr�es de type chapitre sont compos�es dans la fonte
+% \texttt{\bs ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par d�faut.
+% Les entr�es de type section sont compos�es dans la fonte \texttt{\bs ptcSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut. Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et sous
+% paragraphes, les commandes \verb|\ptcSSfont|, \verb|\ptcSSSfont|, \verb|\ptcPfont| et \verb|\ptcSPfont| sont
+% disponibles (par d�faut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de
+% figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont compos�es dans les fontes \verb|\plffont| et \verb|\pltfont|, qui
+% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \texttt{\bs ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \texttt{\bs ptctitle}, \texttt{\bs plftitle}
+% and \texttt{\bs plttitle}, which
+% are the strings ``Table of Contents'',
+% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \texttt{\bs renewcommand} or \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english.
+% The language definition files like
+% \texttt{french.mld} and \texttt{english.mld} (and many others, see
+% table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont compos�s dans la fonte \texttt{\bs ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par d�faut) et les textes des
+% titres sont d�finis par \texttt{\bs ptctitle}, \texttt{\bs plftitle} et \texttt{\bs plttitle}, qui sont les
+% cha�nes �~Table of Contents~�, �~List of Figures~� et �~List of Tables~� par d�faut.
+% Ces commandes de titres devraient �tre red�finies par \texttt{\bs renewcommand} or \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}
+% pour les langues autres que
+% l'anglais. Des fichiers de d�finition de langue tels que \texttt{french.mld} et \texttt{english.mld} (et de
+% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez
+% facilement pr�parer un fichier similaire pour votre langue pr�f�r�e (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
+% en utilisant la macro \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level table of contents
+% is typeset in the \texttt{\bs stcfont}
+% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% Subsection entries are typeset in the \texttt{\bs stcSSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
+% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \texttt{\bs stcSSSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \verb|\stcPfont| and \verb|\stcSPfont|
+% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
+% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \verb|\slffont| and \verb|\sltfont|, which are
+% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des mati�res au niveau section est compos�e dans la fonte \texttt{\bs stcfont}, qui est d�finie comme
+% �tant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut.
+% Les entr�es de sous-section sont compos�es dans la fonte \texttt{\bs stcSSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par d�faut.
+% Les entr�es de sous-sous-section sont compos�es dans la fonte \texttt{\bs stcSSSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut.
+% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \verb|\stcPfont| et \verb|\stcSPfont| sont disponibles
+% (par d�faut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous d�sirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de
+% tableaux au niveau section sont compos�es dans les fontes \verb|\slffont| et \verb|\sltfont|, qui sont d�finies
+% comme �tant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par d�faut.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \texttt{\bs stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \texttt{\bs stctitle}, \texttt{\bs slftitle}
+% and \texttt{\bs slttitle}, which
+% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \texttt{\bs renewcommand} or \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english.
+% The language option files like
+% \texttt{french.mld} and \texttt{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in
+% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont compos�s dans la fonte \texttt{\bs stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par d�faut) et les textes des
+% titres sont d�finis par \texttt{\bs stctitle}, \texttt{\bs slftitle} et \texttt{\bs slttitle}, qui sont les
+% cha�nes �~Contents~�, �~Figures~� et �~Tables~� par d�faut.
+% Ces commandes de titres devraient �tre red�finies par \texttt{\bs renewcommand} ou \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}
+% pour les langues autres que
+% l'anglais. Des fichiers de d�finition de langue tels que \texttt{french.mld} et \texttt{english.mld} (et de
+% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez
+% facilement pr�parer un fichier similaire pour votre langue pr�f�r�e (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
+% en utilisant la macro \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Position of the titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Position des titres}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \verb|\doparttoc|,
+% \verb|\dopartlof| and \verb|\dopartlot| accept an optional argument
+% to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc
+% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \verb|\parttoc| (or \verb|\partlof| or \verb|\partlot|).
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sont cadr�s �~gauche. Les commandes de pr�paration \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\dopartlof| et
+% \verb|\dopartlot| acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par d�faut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{[c]} pour centr�, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \verb|\parttoc| (ou \verb|\partlof| ou \verb|\partlot|).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \verb|\dominitoc|,
+% \verb|\dominilof| and \verb|\dominilot| accept an optional argument
+% to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc
+% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \verb|\minitoc| (or \verb|\minilof| or
+% \verb|\minilot|).
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sont cadr�s sur la gauche. Les commandes de pr�paration \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof| et
+% \verb|\dominilot| acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par d�faut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{[c]} pour centr�, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \verb|\minitoc| (ou \verb|\minilof| ou \verb|\minilot|).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \verb|\dosecttoc|,
+% \verb|\dosectlof| and \verb|\dosectlot| accept
+% an optional argument to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc
+% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \verb|\secttoc| (or \verb|\sectlof| or
+% \verb|\sectlot|).
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sont cadr�s sur la gauche. Les commandes de pr�paration \verb|\dosecttoc|, \verb|\dosectlof| et
+% \verb|\dosectlot| acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par d�faut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{[c]} pour centr�, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \verb|\secttoc| (ou \verb|\sectlof| ou \verb|\sectlot|).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{R�sum� du positionnement des titres}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the
+%        following preparation commands:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\dopartlof|, \verb|\dopartlot|,\\
+%        \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof|, \verb|\dominilot|,\\
+%        \verb|\dosecttoc|, \verb|\dosectlof|, \verb|\dosectlot|\\
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the
+%        title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+%        \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no
+%        title), for all the corresponding mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour r�sumer, par d�faut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de pr�paration
+% suivantes:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\dopartlof|, \verb|\dopartlot|,\\
+%        \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof|, \verb|\dominilot|,\\
+%        \verb|\dosecttoc|, \verb|\dosectlof|, \verb|\dosectlot|\\
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (d�faut),
+%        \texttt{[c]} pour centr�, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de
+%        titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following insertions commands:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \verb|\parttoc|, \verb|\partlof|, \verb|\partlot|,\\
+%        \verb|\minitoc|, \verb|\minilof|, \verb|\minilot|,\\
+%        \verb|\secttoc|, \verb|\sectlof|, \verb|\sectlot|
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the
+%        positionning only for the title of the current mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \verb|\parttoc|, \verb|\partlof|, \verb|\partlot|,\\
+%        \verb|\minitoc|, \verb|\minilof|, \verb|\minilot|,\\
+%        \verb|\secttoc|, \verb|\sectlof|, \verb|\sectlot|
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        acceptent les m�mes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le
+%        titre de la mini-table courante.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% With the commands \verb|\tightmtctrue| (or the \index{tight}\texttt{tight}
+% package option) and \verb|\tightmtcfalse| (or the \index{loose}\texttt{loose}
+% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
+% between contents lines.
+% \or\relax
+% Avec les commandes \verb|\tightmtctrue| (ou l'option de paquetage \index{tight}\texttt{tight}) et
+% \verb|\tightmtcfalse| (ou l'option de paquetage \index{loose}\texttt{loose}, qui est le choix par d�faut), les
+% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entr�es.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But with the Koma-script classes (\texttt{scrartcls},
+% \texttt{scrbook} and \texttt{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary
+% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \verb|\parskip| to zero in place of
+% \verb|\parsep| to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends of the options given
+% to these Koma-script classes (\texttt{parindent} option, \texttt{parskip} option and variants).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais avec les classes Koma-script (\texttt{scrartcls},
+% \texttt{scrbook} et \texttt{scrreprt}), il peut �tre
+% n�cessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer �~z�ro \verb|\parskip| au lieu
+% de \verb|\parsep| pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacit� des options ci-dessous d�pend des options donn�es
+% �~ces classes Koma-script (options \texttt{parindent}, \texttt{parskip} et variantes).
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the Koma-script classes, with the commands \verb|\ktightmtctrue| (or the \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight}
+% package option) and \verb|\ktightmtcfalse| (or the \index{k-loose}\texttt{k-loose}
+% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
+% between contents lines.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les classes Koma-script, avec les commandes \verb|\ktightmtctrue| (ou l'option de
+% paquetage \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight}) et
+% \verb|\ktightmtcfalse| (ou l'option de paquetage \index{k-loose}\texttt{k-loose}, qui est le choix par d�faut), les
+% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entr�es.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commandes simplifi�es pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two
+% useful commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% By example,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \verb|\mtcSSfont| with the given font commands.
+%
+% Note that \verb|\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \verb|\ptcfont|, etc.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Moreover,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \verb|\ptifont| (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la red�finition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Par exemple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% red�finira \verb|\mtcSSfont| avec les commandes de fontes donn�es.
+%
+% Notez que \verb|\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de red�finir \verb|\ptcfont|, etc.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% De plus,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% red�finira \verb|\ptifont| (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes
+% donn�es.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commande simplifi�e pour les titres des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle| command is also available:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% By example,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Description of contents}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \verb|\mtctitle| with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a
+% mini-table type available in your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la red�finition des titres des mini-tables, la commande
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle| est aussi disponible:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{cha�ne titre}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Par exemple,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Description du contenu}|
+% \end{quote}
+% red�finira \verb|\mtctitle| avec la cha�ne donn�e. Cette commande v�rifie que vous red�finissez un titre pour un
+% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commande simplifi�e pour les profondeurs des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth| command is also available:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% By example,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{minitoc}{4}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will set the counter \verb|minitocdepth| with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a
+% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la red�finition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Par exemple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{minitoc}{4}|
+% \end{quote}
+% forcera le compteur \verb|minitocdepth|~la valeur donn�e. Cette commande v�rifie que vous forcez une profondeur
+% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa
+% profondeur).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang}
+% Most of the strings defined in the language option files \index{.mld}(\texttt{.mld}) were taken from the
+%              superb \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel} package by \name{Johannes}{Braams},
+%              some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users
+%              or taken from specific packages, like Arab\TeX{}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex},
+%            {Arm\TeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, {Bang\TeX} (bangla)~\cite{bangtex},
+%            \texttt{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
+%            \texttt{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
+%            Malayalam~\cite{malayalam},
+%            Montex (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, CJK (chinese,
+%            corean-hangul/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk2},
+%            Farsi\TeX\ (farsi or iranian), or \texttt{vietnam.sty}
+%            --- latvian (letton),
+%            greek-mono, greek-polydemo, greek-polykatha, polish2, russian2m, russian2o and spanish3
+%            need Lambda, \emph{i.e.}~the Omega version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}),
+%            or even found by searching on the Web (\texttt{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian,
+%            \texttt{japanese.mld} for japanese, \texttt{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian).
+%            Other languages are welcome. See table~\vref{t+languages}.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang}
+% La plupart des cha�nes d�finies dans les fichiers d'option de langue \index{.mld}(\texttt{.mld}) ont �t� prises
+% dans le superbe paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel} de \name{Johannes}{Braams}, certaines ont �t� adapt�es,
+% d'autres ont �t� mises �~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages sp�cifiques, tels
+% que Arab\TeX{}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, {Arm\TeX} (arm�nien)~\cite{armtex}, {Bang\TeX} (bangla)~\cite{bangtex},
+% \texttt{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \texttt{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, Malayalam~\cite{malayalam},
+% Montex (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, CJK (chinois,
+% cor�en-hangul/hanja, japonais, tha�)~\cite{cjk2}, Farsi\TeX\ (farsi ou iranien)
+% \texttt{vietnam.sty} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec
+% (greek-mono, greek-polydemo, greek-polykatha), de polonais (polish2), de russe (russian2m, russian2o) et
+% d'espagnol (spanish3) ont besoin
+% de Lambda, c'est-�-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega, (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont m�me �t� trouv�es en
+% cherchant sur le Web (\texttt{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrilique, \texttt{japanese.mld} pour le
+% japonais, \texttt{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues.
+% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangul (korean), hanja (korean), japanese and
+% thai variants.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which are difficult to manipulate in a
+% \texttt{.dtx} file, hence the \texttt{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file,
+% nicknamed a \index{.mlo}\texttt{.mlo}
+% file\,\footnote{The suffix \texttt{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
+% \texttt{.dtx} file in the current version of \texttt{minitoc} package, but via \texttt{filecontents}
+% environments in the \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of
+% the ``delete'' character.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le cor�en (hangul et
+% hanja), le japonais et le tha�, avec leurs variantes.}, les sources des titres utilisent quelques codages
+% exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \texttt{.dtx}, donc le fichier \texttt{.mld} est alors
+% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier sp�cial, surnomm� fichier \index{.mlo}\texttt{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le
+% suffixe \texttt{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas
+% engendr� par le fichier \texttt{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \texttt{minitoc}, mais via des
+% environnements \texttt{filecontents} dans le fichier \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins},
+% et en jouant sur le �~catcode~� du caract�re �~delete~�.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables \emph{(experimental feature)}}\label{s+alt+layout}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables \emph{(dispositif exp�rimental)}}\label{s+alt+layout}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}),
+% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by
+% \verb|\newcommand|, modifiable via \verb|\renewcommand|).
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \relax\verb|\@dotsep|, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number
+%       expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m''
+%       in the current font.
+% \item \relax\verb|\@pnumwidth|, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command
+%       containing the representation of a length (e.g.~\texttt{1.55em}).
+% \item \relax\verb|\@tocrmarg|, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the
+%       dotted line. It should be larger than \verb|\@pnumwidth|, and can be a rubber length (\emph{i.e.}~contains
+%       some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion,
+%       the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid
+%       most hyphenations.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% La mise en page est d�crite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a �t� adapt�e de~\cite{tocloft}), qui
+% d�finit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, cr�es par
+% \verb|\newcommand|, modifiables via \verb|\renewcommand|).
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \relax\verb|\@dotsep|, qui est la s�paration entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un
+%       nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unit�s math�matiques}; 18~unit�s math�matiques font \texttt{1em} (un
+%       cadratin), qui est
+%       �~peu pr�s la largeur d'un~�~m~� dans la fonte courante.
+% \item \relax\verb|\@pnumwidth|, qui est la largeur de l'espace r�serv� pour le num�ro de page. C'est une commande
+%       \LaTeX\ contenant la repr�sentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}).
+% \item \relax\verb|\@tocrmarg|, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de
+%       points de conduite. Elle devrait �tre plus grande que \verb|\@pnumwidth|, et peut �tre une longueur
+%       �lastique (c'est-�-dire contenir de la glu, comme like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous sp�cifiez la
+%       portion �~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~�, le texte de l'entr�e sera en d�chiquet� sur la droite; ceci est utile si
+%       vous avez des entr�es longues, et peut �viter la plupart des coupures de mots.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \newcommand{\maxx}{120}       ^^A picture width
+% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118}      ^^A \maxx - 2\
+% \newcommand{\maxy}{55}        ^^A picture height
+% \newcommand{\maxym}{53}       ^^A \maxy - 2
+% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57}       ^^A \maxy + 2
+% \newcommand{\findent}{20}     ^^A indent
+% \newcommand{\findentp}{22}    ^^A \findent + 2
+% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10}   ^^A numwidth
+% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30}   ^^A \@tocrmarg
+% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20}  ^^A \@pnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\fipn}{30}        ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90}      ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg
+% \newcommand{\frnum}{100}      ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\fyi}{10}         ^^A 1st y height
+% \newcommand{\fyim}{8}         ^^A \fyi - 2
+% \newcommand{\fyii}{20}        ^^A 2nd y height
+% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25}       ^^A 3rd y height
+% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30}        ^^A 4th y height
+% \newcommand{\fyv}{40}         ^^A 5th y height
+% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42}        ^^A \fyv + 2
+% \newcommand{\flin}{4}         ^^A length of leader lines
+% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89}     ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit
+% \begin{figure*}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth}
+% \divide \unitlength by \maxx
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
+%   \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
+%   \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
+%   \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
+%   \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
+%   \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
+%   \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
+% \end{picture}
+% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
+%   \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
+%   \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
+%   \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
+%   \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-t�te\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
+%   \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
+%   \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
+% \end{picture}
+% \caption{Mise en page d'une entr�e dans une table des mati�res (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc}
+% \fi
+% \end{figure*}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only
+% on specific mini-tables, you should alter then indirectly via the \verb|\mtcsetformat| command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is
+% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \verb|\@dotsep|), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \verb|\@pnumwidth|), or
+% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \verb|\@tocrmarg|) keywords; so:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity
+% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caract�re �~\texttt{@}~�) et doivent avoir un
+% effet local seulement sur des mini-tables sp�cifiques, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{param�tre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-cl�s \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{param�tre} est
+% l'un des mots-cl�s \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \verb|\@dotsep|), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \verb|\@pnumwidth|)
+% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \verb|\@tocrmarg|); ainsi:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
+% \end{quote}
+% �tablira la marge de droite �~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'�lasticit�
+% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \verb|\@tocrmarg|) parameter should obviously be greater than the
+% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
+%
+% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \verb|\@dotsep|) is very large (try 450, then increase or decrease), the dots of leaders will be
+% so much spread out that they will disappear.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que le param�tre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \verb|\@tocrmarg|) devrait manifestement �tre plus grand que
+% le param�tre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
+%
+% Si le param�tre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \verb|\@dotsep|) est tr�s grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou
+% diminuez), les points de conduite seront
+% tellement espac�s qu'ils dispara�tront.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz}
+% \ifBT
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
+% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \midrule
+% \verb|\ptcrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noptcrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\pltrule|&parttocs&\verb|\nopltrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\mtcrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomtcrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\mlfrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomlfrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\mltrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomltrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\stcrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nostcrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\slfrule|&secttocs&\verb|\noslfrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\sltrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nosltrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \else
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
+% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \hline
+% \verb|\ptcrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noptcrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\mtcrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomtcrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\mlfrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomlfrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\mltrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomltrule|&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{N-A}\\
+% \verb|\stcrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nostcrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\slfrule|&secttocs&\verb|\noslfrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \verb|\sltrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nosltrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{N-A}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \medfigrule
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs ptcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noptcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs mtcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomtcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs stcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nostcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs plfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noplfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs mlfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomlfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs slfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noslfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs pltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nopltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs mltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs sltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nosltpagenumbers\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs ptcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noptcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs mtcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomtcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs stcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nostcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs plfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noplfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs mlfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomlfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs slfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noslfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs pltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nopltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs mltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs sltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nosltpagenumbers\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz}
+% \ifBT
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{d�faut pour}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
+% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \midrule
+% \verb|\ptcrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noptcrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\pltrule|&parttocs&\verb|\nopltrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\mtcrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomtcrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\mlfrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomlfrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\mltrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomltrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\stcrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nostcrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\slfrule|&secttocs&\verb|\noslfrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\sltrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nosltrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \else
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{d�faut pour}\\
+% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \hline
+% \verb|\ptcrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noptcrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\plfrule|&parttocs&\verb|\noplfrule|&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\mtcrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomtcrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\mlfrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomlfrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\mltrule|&minitocs&\verb|\nomltrule|&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{N-D}\\
+% \verb|\stcrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nostcrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\slfrule|&secttocs&\verb|\noslfrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \verb|\sltrule|&secttocs&\verb|\nosltrule|&secttocs&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{N-D}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \medfigrule
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \caption{Num�ros de pages}\label{t+pn}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Num�ros de pages (d�faut)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de num�ros de pages\hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs ptcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noptcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs mtcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomtcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs stcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nostcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs plfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noplfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs mlfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomlfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs slfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noslfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs pltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nopltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs mltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs sltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nosltpagenumbers\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Num�ros de pages (d�faut)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de num�ros de pages\hfill}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs ptcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noptcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs mtcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomtcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs stcpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nostcpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs plfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noplfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs mlfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomlfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs slfpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs noslfpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs pltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nopltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs mltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nomltpagenumbers\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs sltpagenumbers&\qquad&\bs nosltpagenumbers\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Special Features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Dispositifs sp�ciaux}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Horizontal Rules}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Filets horizontaux}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their
+% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \texttt{book}- or
+% \texttt{report}-like document (\emph{i.e.}~when \verb|\chapter| is defined). To activate
+% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available.
+% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetrules{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
+% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, and~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux apr�s leurs titres et �~leurs fins, L'exception
+% est la �~parttoc~� dans un document de type analogue �~\texttt{book} ou \texttt{report} (c'est-�-dire lorsque
+% la commande \verb|\chapter| est d�finie). Pour activer ou d�sactiver ces filets, les commandes du
+% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetrules{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-cl�s \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
+% les mots-cl�s \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON} et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lsneed{4}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Num�ros de pages, points de conduites}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section
+% titles (with the section numbers),
+% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available.
+% But you can also use the following command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
+% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
+%       \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
+%       \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
+%       \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
+%       \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON} and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les num�ros de page sont cit�s dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs d�sirent avoir
+% seulement les titres des sections (avec les num�ros des sections), mais pas les num�ros des pages. Donc les
+% d�clarations �videntes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles.
+% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-cl�s \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
+% les mots-cl�s \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
+%       \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
+%       \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
+%       \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
+%       \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON} et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between
+% the section titles and the page numbers. The \texttt{undotted}
+% package option removes these dots. The \texttt{dotted} package option
+% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \or\relax
+% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les num�ros de pages.
+% L'option de paquetage \texttt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage
+% \texttt{dotted} est le choix par d�faut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a
+% partlot) is preceeded and followed by a
+% \verb|\cleardoublepage|, and has a page style of
+% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this
+% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning
+% is obvious.
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot) est pr�c�d�e et suivie par une \verb|\cleardoublepage|,
+% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en
+% red�finissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est �vidente.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table*}[p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \caption{Features for parttoc-s and other mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs beforeparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs afterparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs thispageparttocstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs beforepartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs afterpartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs thispagepartlofstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs beforepartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs afterpartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs thispagepartlotstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs beforeminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs afterminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs thispageminitocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs beforeminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs afterminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs thispageminilofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs beforeminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs afterminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs thispageminilotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs beforesecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs aftersecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs thispagesecttocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs beforesectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs aftersectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs thispagesectlofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs beforesectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs aftersectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs thispagesectlotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs beforeparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs afterparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs thispageparttocstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs beforepartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs afterpartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs thispagepartlofstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs beforepartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs afterpartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs thispagepartlotstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs beforeminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs afterminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs thispageminitocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs beforeminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs afterminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs thispageminilofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs beforeminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs afterminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs thispageminilotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs beforesecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs aftersecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs thispagesecttocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs beforesectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs aftersectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs thispagesectlofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs beforesectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs aftersectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs thispagesectlotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before|after|pagestyle\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table*}[p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \caption{Dispositifs pour parttocs et autres mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries D�faut \hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs beforeparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs afterparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs thispageparttocstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs beforepartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs afterpartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs thispagepartlofstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs beforepartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs afterpartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs thispagepartlotstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs beforeminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs afterminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs thispageminitocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs beforeminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs afterminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs thispageminilofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs beforeminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs afterminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs thispageminilotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs beforesecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs aftersecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs thispagesecttocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs beforesectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs aftersectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs thispagesectlofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs beforesectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs aftersectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs thispagesectlotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries D�faut \hfill}\\\hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs beforeparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs afterparttoc&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\bs thispageparttocstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs beforepartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs afterpartlof&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\bs thispagepartlofstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs beforepartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs afterpartlot&\qquad&\bs cleardoublepage\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\bs thispagepartlotstyle&\qquad&\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs beforeminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs afterminitoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\bs thispageminitocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs beforeminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs afterminilof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\bs thispageminilofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs beforeminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs afterminilot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\bs thispageminilotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs beforesecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs aftersecttoc&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\bs thispagesecttocstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs beforesectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs aftersectlof&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\bs thispagesectlofstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs beforesectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs aftersectlot&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\bs thispagesectlotstyle&\qquad&\bs empty\\
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before|after|pagestyle\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{table*}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The command:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names:
+% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \texttt{before},
+% \texttt{after} or \texttt{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \verb|\clearpage|,
+% \verb|\cleardoublepage|,
+% \verb|\thispagestyle{...}|, etc., either \verb|\empty| (does nothing).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-cl�}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% vous permet de red�finir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table:
+% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-cl�} est l'un des suivants: \texttt{before},
+% \texttt{after} ou \texttt{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une s�quence de commandes telles que \verb|\clearpage|,
+% \verb|\cleardoublepage|, \verb|\thispagestyle{...}|, etc., soit \verb|\empty| (ne fait rien).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted
+% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \texttt{minitoc} package.}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est
+% tir�e et adapt�e d'une version pr�liminaire de la seconde �dition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, o� il commente le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}.}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \Virage{}default commands for
+% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being \verb|\thispagestyle{empty}|,
+% because in document classes defining the \verb|\chapter| command, the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages.
+% If the document is printed
+% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This
+% behaviour comes from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an
+% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these
+% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using
+% \verb|\thispagestyle| and set the style of the following pages by using \verb|\pagestyle|, but you must not forget
+% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short example\,\footnote{This example shows that
+% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the
+% following pages.}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{before}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\cleardoublepage}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\thispagestyle{empty}\pagestyle{myheadings}}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{after}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\cleardoublepage\pagestyle{headings}}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where we add a \verb|\cleardoublepage| before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for
+% the first page of the parttocs,
+% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs,
+% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a
+% \verb|\cleardoublepage|.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\Virage{} commandes par d�faut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie
+% sont d�finies comme �tant \verb|\thispagestyle{empty}|, car
+% dans les classes de document d�finissant la commande \verb|\chapter|, les mini-tables au niveau parties sont sur
+% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprim� recto-verso, la premi�re page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages
+% ne sont pas num�rot�es et n'ont ni en-t�te ni bas de page.  Ce comportement provient des d�finitions par d�faut
+% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous d�sirez un comportement diff�rent, vous pouvez changer
+% ces d�finitions. Notez que, par d�faut, seule la \emph{premi�re} page de ces mini-tables est compos�e dans le
+% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez �tablir le style de cette premi�re page en utilisant
+% \verb|\thispagestyle| et �tablir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \verb|\pagestyle|, mais vous ne devez
+% pas oublier de r�tablir le style normal apr�s la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple\,\footnote{Cet exemple
+% montre que le troisi�me argument peut �tre une \emph{s�quence} de commandes: nous �tablissons le style de la page
+% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{before}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\cleardoublepage}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\thispagestyle{empty}\pagestyle{myheadings}}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{after}%|\\
+% \verb|  {\cleardoublepage\pagestyle{headings}}|
+% \end{verse}
+% o� nous ajoutons une commande \verb|\cleardoublepage| avant chaque parttoc, puis nous �tablissons le style de page
+% \texttt{empty} pour la premi�re page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages
+% suivantes des parttocs, et �tablissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages apr�s la mini-table,
+% apr�s une commande \verb|\cleardoublepage|.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}
+% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter
+% number zero (or even a weirder number).
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Le probl�me du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (r�solu)}
+% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre num�ro~un, mais par le chapitre num�ro~z�ro (ou m�me
+% portant un num�ro plus bizarre).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To make the \texttt{minitoc}
+% package work with such documents, you must insert the command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \texttt{\bs firstchapteris\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% before the \verb|\dominitoc| and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number
+% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not}
+% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a
+% \verb|\addtocounter{chapter}{-1}| command to get a first chapter
+% numbered~0. The \verb|\firstpartis| and
+% \verb|\firstsectionis| commands are similar for parts and sections with
+% a non standard numbering.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour que le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez ins�rer la commande:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \texttt{\bs firstchapteris\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% avant la commande \verb|\dominitoc| et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le num�ro du premier chapitre. Cette
+% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la num�rotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande
+% \verb|\addtocounter{chapter}{-1}| pour obtenir un premier chapitre num�rot�~0. Les commandes \verb|\firstpartis|
+% et \verb|\firstsectionis| sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une num�rotation non standard.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands\virage{} are now obsolete, as this
+% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files).
+% Thus they just produce harmless warnings.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes\virage{} sont d�sormais obsol�tes, car ce probl�me a �t� r�solu (via la num�rotation �~absolue~�
+% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent seulement des avertissements b�nins.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Entr�es sp�ciales pour la table des mati�res, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
+% bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If{\Virage} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for
+% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of
+% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index,
+% you should use the \index{tocbibind}\texttt{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} package by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}
+% (this package is available from the CTAN archives).
+% \or\relax
+% Si{\Virage} vous souhaitez ajouter des entr�es dans la table des mati�res pour des objets tels que la table de
+% mati�res elle-m�me, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez
+% utiliser le paquetage \index{tocbibind}\texttt{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (ce
+% paquetage est disponible sur les archives CTAN).
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in
+% an article class document) when the \texttt{.toc} file is
+% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \verb|\dominitoc| phase).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais ces entr�es sont consid�r�es comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article)
+% lorsque le fichier est analys� pour pr�parer les minitocs (la phase \verb|\dominitoc|).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So you must add an \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command, \emph{without
+% argument}, after each of the involved commands \verb|\tableofcontents|,
+% \verb|\listoffigures|, and \verb|\listoftables|.
+% \or\relax
+% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \verb|\mtcaddchapter|, \emph{sans argument}, apr�s chacune des commandes
+% \verb|\tableofcontents|, \verb|\listoffigures| et \verb|\listoftables| mises en jeu.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the bibliography, you should add a \verb|\adjustmtc| command after the \verb|\bibliography| command.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \verb|\adjustmtc| apr�s la commande \verb|\bibliography|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the index, it is a bit more complicated, you add the
+% following commands just after the \verb|\printindex| command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter|
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% But this can be done by:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb+\mtcfixindex[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@.
+% By default, if \verb|\chapter| is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
+% the \texttt{section} level.
+% If neither \verb|\chapter| or \verb|\section| are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \verb|\part| is
+% defined; else an error is reported. It is \virage\emph{recommended} that you check the result and,
+% if necessary, you adjust the optional argument.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'index, c'est un peu plus compliqu�;
+% vous ajoutez les commandes suivantes juste apr�s la commande \verb|\printindex|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter|
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% Mais ceci peut �tre remplac� par:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb+\mtcfixindex[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% o� l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entr�e de l'index dans la table des mati�res. Par d�faut, si
+% \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilis�, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
+% Si ni \verb|\chapter| ni \verb|\section| ne sont d�finies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilis� si \verb|\part| est
+% d�finie; sinon une erreur est signal�e. Il est \virage\emph{recommand�} que vous v�rifiez le r�sultat et, si
+% n�cessaire, que vous ajustiez l'argument optionnel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the glossary, it is like for the index, you add the
+% following commands just after the \verb|\printglossary| command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter|
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% But this can be done by:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb+\mtcfixglossary[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@.
+% By default, if \verb|\chapter| is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
+% the \texttt{section} level.
+% If neither \verb|\chapter| or \verb|\section| are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \verb|\part| is
+% defined; else an error is reported. It is \virage\emph{recommended} that you check the result and,
+% if necessary, you adjust the optional argument.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le glossaire, c'est comme pour l'index:
+% vous ajoutez les commandes suivantes juste apr�s la commande \verb|\printglossary|:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter|
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% Mais ceci peut �tre remplac� par:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb+\mtcfixglossary[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% o� l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entr�e du glossaire dans la table des mati�res. Par d�faut, si
+% \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilis�, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
+% Si ni \verb|\chapter| ni \verb|\section| ne sont d�finies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilis� si \verb|\part| est
+% d�finie; sinon une erreur est signal�e. Il est \virage\emph{recommand�} que vous v�rifiez le r�sultat et, si
+% n�cessaire, que vous ajustiez l'argument optionnel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography
+% and/or index (or glossary) are processed as starred sections, you must
+% modify these additions to use section level commands.
+%
+% And proceed with care, tracking in the \texttt{.log} file the
+% insertion of \texttt{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are
+% some examples in the \index{add.tex}\texttt{add.tex} file distributed with
+% \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Bien s�r, les documents dans lesquels la table des mati�res, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
+% bibliographie et/ou l'index (ou le glossaire) sont trait�s comme des sections �toil�es, vous devez modifier ces
+% additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section.
+%
+% Et proc�dez avec soin, en suivant dans le fichier \texttt{.log} l'insertion des fichiers \texttt{.mtc}\meta{N} (et
+% analogues). Il y~a quelques exemples dans le fichier
+% \index{add.tex}\texttt{add.tex} distribu� avec \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{L'option \texttt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option loads the \index{notoccite}\texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} package (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% It avoids problems with \verb|\cite| commands in
+% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \index{unsrt}\texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a
+% similar style, these citations get numbered starting
+% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text.
+% The \texttt{notoccite} package prevents this. As \texttt{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option charge le paquetage \index{notoccite}\texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% Elle �vite des probl�mes avec des commandes \verb|\cite| situ�es dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des
+% captions: si vous ex�cutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \index{unsrt}\texttt{unsrt} (non tri�), ou un
+% style similaire, ces citations seront num�rot�es en commen�ant �~la page de la table des mati�res o� se trouve la
+% citation parasite, et non avec le num�ro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage
+% \texttt{notoccite} �vite ceci. Comme \texttt{minitoc} imprime des tables des mati�res, il est sujet au m�me
+% probl�me.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \clearpage
+% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\index{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \texttt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\index{hints}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes
+% known as interacting with \texttt{minitoc},
+% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed.
+% If a known package is loaded,
+% this option writes some hints in the \texttt{.log} file and
+% emits a warning. The hints written in the \texttt{.log} file may suggest you to consult the present document or
+% the \index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.}
+% This option is activated by default. You can inhibit it via the \index{nohints}\texttt{nohints} option.
+% The following problems and potential problems are currently detected:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option du paquetage d�tecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour
+% interagir avec \texttt{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fr�quentes. La liste des
+% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est �videmment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est charg�,
+% cette option �crit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \texttt{.log} et �met un avertissement. Les
+% indications �crites dans le fichier \texttt{.log} peuvent vous sugg�rer de consulter le pr�sent document ou le
+% fichier \index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette
+% option est activ�e par d�faut. Vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \index{nohints}\texttt{nohints}. Les probl�mes
+% et probl�mes potentiels suivants sont actuellement d�tect�s:
+% \fi
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \lneed{16}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character
+%       in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by
+%       another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}:
+%       \verb|\part|, \verb|\@part|, \verb|\@spart|, \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\@chapter|,
+%       \verb|\@schapter|, \verb|\section|, \verb|\@sect|, and \verb|\@ssect|.
+%       Note that the \index{hyperref}\texttt{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at
+%       \texttt{\bs begin\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package, but these
+%       alterations seem harmless.
+% \or\relax
+%       L'alt�ration de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caract�re <<~\texttt{@}~>>
+%       dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois
+%       alt�r�es par d'autres paquetages; reconsid�rez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}:
+%       \verb|\part|, \verb|\@part|, \verb|\@spart|, \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\@chapter|,
+%       \verb|\@schapter|, \verb|\section|, \verb|\@sect| et \verb|\@ssect|.
+%       Notez que le paquetage \index{hyperref}\texttt{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) alt�re ces commandes lors de
+%       \texttt{\bs begin\{document\}}, donc de probl�me pourrait �tre signal� si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais
+%       ces alt�rations semblent b�nignes.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Presence of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions:
+%       \index{amsbook}\texttt{amsbook} (class),
+%       \index{memoir}\texttt{memoir} (class),
+%       \index{appendix}\texttt{appendix},
+%       \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)),
+%       \index{tocbibind}\texttt{tocbibind}, and
+%       \index{tocloft}\texttt{tocloft}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Pr�sence des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines pr�cautions:
+%       \index{amsbook}\texttt{amsbook} (classe),
+%       \index{appendix}\texttt{appendix},
+%       \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins} (attention �~ses options et �~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)),
+%       \index{tocbibind}\texttt{tocbibind} et
+%       \index{tocloft}\texttt{tocloft}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Presence of the following packages or classes, which are incompatible with the \texttt{minitoc} package:
+%       \index{amsart}\texttt{amsart} (class),
+%       \index{amsproc}\texttt{amsproc} (class),
+%       \index{titlesec}\texttt{titlesec}, and
+%       \index{titletoc}\texttt{titletoc}\,\footnote{The \texttt{titlesec} package redefines
+%       the sectionning commands in a way
+%       completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \texttt{minitoc} and \texttt{titlesec}-\texttt{titletoc} are
+%       fundamentaly incompatible, and it is very sad.}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Pr�sence des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui sont malheureusement incompatibles avec le paquetage
+%       \texttt{minitoc}:
+%       \index{amsart}\texttt{amsart} (classe),
+%       \index{amsproc}\texttt{amsproc} (classe),
+%       \index{titlesec}\texttt{titlesec} et
+%       \index{titletoc}\texttt{titletoc}\,\footnote{Le paquetage \texttt{titlesec} red�finit les commandes de
+%       sectionnement d'une mani�re compl�tement �trang�re �~la mani�re standard de \LaTeX; donc \texttt{minitoc}
+%       et \texttt{titlesec}-\texttt{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles, et ceci est fort regrettable.}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \verb|\parttoc| without calling \verb|\doparttoc|, \ldots~,
+%       usage of \verb|\sectlot| without calling \verb|\dosectlot|.
+%       Or the reverse.
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \verb|\parttoc| sans appeler \verb|\doparttoc|, \ldots~,
+%       utilisation de \verb|\sectlot| sans appeler \verb|\dosectlot|.
+%       Ou l'inverse.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \verb|\parttoc| without calling \verb|\[fake]tableofcontents|, \ldots~, usage of \verb|\sectlot|
+%       without calling \verb|\[fake]listoftables|.
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \verb|\parttoc| sans appeler \verb|\[fake]tableofcontents|, \ldots~, utilisation de
+%       \verb|\sectlot| sans appeler \verb|\[fake]listoftables|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \verb|\sectlof| and/or \verb|\sectlot| without
+%       using the \index{insection}\texttt{insection} package option of \texttt{minitoc}
+%       (or the \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins} package without
+%       its \index{section}\texttt{section} and \index{below}\texttt{below} options).
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \verb|\sectlof| et/ou \verb|\sectlot| sans utiliser l'option de paquetage
+%       \index{insection}\texttt{insection} de \texttt{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins}
+%       sans ses options \index{section}\texttt{section} et \index{below}\texttt{below}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \index{shorttext}\texttt{shortext}
+%       package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections,
+%       the \texttt{hints} package option displays a warning.
+% \or\relax
+%       Si vous utilisez des suffixes courts (�~cause de votre syst�me d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage
+%       \index{shorttext}\texttt{shortext}, voyez �~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-del� de la
+%       limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections, l'option de paquetage signale un avertissement.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If the \index{abstract}\texttt{abstract} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
+%       \index{addtotoc}\texttt{addtotoc} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
+%       as a starred chapter if the document class defines \verb|\chapter|, else as a starred section.
+%       This is detected and you should add a \verb|\mtcaddchapter[]| or a \verb|\mtcaddsection[]|
+%       command after your \texttt{abstract} environment.
+% \or\relax
+%       Si le paquetage \index{abstract}\texttt{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}), est utilis�
+%       avec son option \index{addtotoc}\texttt{addtotoc}, une entr�e �~{Abstract}~� (ou �quivalente) est ajout�e
+%       �~la table des mati�res, comme un chapitre �toil� si la classe de document d�finit \verb|\chapter|, sinon
+%       comme une section �toil�e. Ceci est d�tect� et vous devriez ajouter une commande \verb|\mtcaddchapter[]| ou
+%       \verb|\mtcaddsection[]| apr�s votre environnement \texttt{abstract}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If the \index{sectsty}\texttt{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \texttt{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax
+%       Si le paquetage \index{sectsty}\texttt{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilis�,
+%       il doit �tre charg� \emph{avant} le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \texttt{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you
+%       used also the \texttt{nocheckfiles}\index{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}).
+% \or\relax
+%       Si vous essayez d'ins�rer des mini-tables vides, l'option \texttt{hints} vous donne un avertissement
+%       global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilis� l'option  \texttt{nocheckfiles}\index{nocheckfiles}, voyez la
+%       section~\vref{s+placing}).
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If you use one of the obsolete commands (\verb|\firstpartis|, \verb|\firstchapteris|, or \verb|\firstsectionis|),
+%       a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder.
+% \or\relax
+%       Si vous utilisez l'une des commandes obsol�tes (\verb|\firstpartis|, \verb|\firstchapteris| ou
+%       \verb|\firstsectionis|), un avertissement est �mis pour chaque utilisation, bien s�r, mais aussi une
+%       indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% ^^A \clearpage
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Under\Virage{} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems),
+% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters.
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of
+% extensions available and will use it.
+% All other modifications will be done automatically.
+% The \texttt{.mtc}\meta{N}
+% extensions will become \texttt{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter
+% number.
+% The extensions \verb|.mlf|\meta{N} and \verb|.mlt|\meta{N} become
+% \verb|.F|\meta{N} and \verb|.T|\meta{N}.
+% The \texttt{.ptc}\meta{N}
+% extensions become \texttt{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
+% The extensions \verb|.plf|\meta{N} and \verb|.plt|\meta{N} become
+% \verb|.G|\meta{N} and \verb|.U|\meta{N}.
+% The \texttt{.stc}\meta{N}
+% extensions become \texttt{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section
+% number.
+% The extensions \verb|.slf|\meta{N} and \verb|.slt|\meta{N} become
+% \verb|.H|\meta{N} and \verb|.V|\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}.
+% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a
+% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an
+% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for
+% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical.
+% The \texttt{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations.
+% See also section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\
+% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
+% \midrule
+% parttoc&\texttt{.ptc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.P}\meta{N}\\
+% partlof&\texttt{.plf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.G}\meta{N}\\
+% partlot&\texttt{.plf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.U}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% minitoc&\texttt{.mtc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.M}\meta{N}\\
+% minilof&\texttt{.mlf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.F}\meta{N}\\
+% minilot&\texttt{.mlf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.T}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% secttoc&\texttt{.stc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.S}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlof&\texttt{.slf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.H}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlot&\texttt{.slf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.V}\meta{N}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% Sous\Virage{} MS-DOS (et autres vieux syst�mes d'exploitations pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont
+% limit�s �~3~caract�res. Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} d�termine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et
+% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \texttt{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront
+% \texttt{.M}\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu de chapitre.
+% Les suffixes \verb|.mlf|\meta{N} et \verb|.mlt|\meta{N} deviennent \verb|.F|\meta{N} et \verb|.T|\meta{N}.
+% Les suffixes \texttt{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \texttt{.P}\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu de partie.
+% Les suffixes \verb|.plf|\meta{N} et \verb|.plt|\meta{N} deviennent \verb|.G|\meta{N} et \verb|.U|\meta{N}.
+% Les suffixes \texttt{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \texttt{.S}\meta{N}, o� \meta{N} est le num�ro absolu de section.
+% Les suffixes \verb|.slf|\meta{N} et \verb|.slt|\meta{N} deviennent \verb|.H|\meta{N} et \verb|.V|\meta{N}.
+% Tous ces suffixes sont list�s dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}.
+% Bien s�r, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de
+% chapitre (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des
+% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait �tre tragique. L'option \texttt{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints})
+% signalera de telles situations.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\
+% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
+% \midrule
+% parttoc&\texttt{.ptc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.P}\meta{N}\\
+% partlof&\texttt{.plf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.G}\meta{N}\\
+% partlot&\texttt{.plf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.U}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% minitoc&\texttt{.mtc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.M}\meta{N}\\
+% minilof&\texttt{.mlf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.F}\meta{N}\\
+% minilot&\texttt{.mlf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.T}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% secttoc&\texttt{.stc}\meta{N}&\texttt{.S}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlof&\texttt{.slf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.H}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlot&\texttt{.slf}\meta{N}&\texttt{.V}\meta{N}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?}
+% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels,
+% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section,
+% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the
+% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists
+% and section-level tables and lists
+% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35);
+% after the second run, they appear (if not empty),
+% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers
+% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level
+% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs ex�cutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles n�cessaires?}
+% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premi�res pages de
+% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la num�rotation des pages est alt�r�e. Apr�s la premi�re ex�cution de
+% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait saut�es depuis la
+% version~\#35); apr�s la deuxi�me ex�cution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles
+% modifient la num�rotation des pages, les num�ros des pages y~sont faux; apr�s la troisi�me ex�cution, les
+% mini-tables devraient �tre correctes (voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\index{mtcoff}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\index{mtcoff}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If a document has been prepared with the \texttt{minitoc} package,
+% it contains many \texttt{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being
+% \verb|\dominitoc|,
+% \verb|\faketableofcontents|, and \verb|\minitoc| commands (and their
+% equivalents for lists of figures and tables).
+% If you want to typeset
+% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the
+% \texttt{minitoc} package by the \texttt{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these
+% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \texttt{.log} file.
+% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references.
+% It also sanitizes the \texttt{.aux}, \texttt{.toc},
+% \texttt{.lof}, and \texttt{.lot} files from \texttt{minitoc} specific
+% spurious commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Si un document a �t� pr�par� avec le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} package, il contient de nombreuses commandes
+% sp�cifiques de \texttt{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\faketableofcontents| et
+% \verb|\minitoc| (et leurs �quivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux).
+% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage
+% \texttt{minitoc} par le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignor�es, en
+% �crivant �ventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \texttt{.log} file. Au moins deux ex�cutions
+% de \LaTeX\ seront n�cessaires pour avoir une num�rotation des pages et des r�f�rences crois�es correctes.
+% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \texttt{.aux}, \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lot} en y~�liminant les
+% commandes sp�cifiques de \texttt{minitoc} superflues.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Questions fr�quemment pos�es}\label{FAQ}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% ^^A\lsneed{5}
+% \lneed{6}
+% ^^A \mtcskip
+% \minilof
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about
+% \texttt{minitoc.sty}. If the version has a number less than~43, please
+% upgrade to version~\#43. This list is also given in the \index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug} file,
+% in pure text form.
+%
+% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \index{hints}\texttt{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}),
+% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \meta{document}\texttt{.log} file, which may contain pertinent
+% messages.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici une liste de probl�mes et de questions fr�quemment pos�es �~propos du paquetage
+% \texttt{minitoc}. Si votre version a un num�ro plus petit que~43, vous �tes pri�s de faire une mise �~jour
+% �~la version~\#43. Cette liste est aussi donn�e dans le fichier \index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug}, sous
+% forme de texte pur.
+%
+% Si un probl�me survient, il est souvent avis�: a) d'utiliser l'option \index{hints}\texttt{hints} (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activ�e par d�faut, et b)~de lire le fichier \meta{document}\texttt{.log}, qui
+% peut contenir des messages pertinents.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (1)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to avoid a page break near the rules before and after the mini-table?}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment �viter une coupure de page pr�s des filets avant et apr�s la mini-table?}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 adds better fixes.
+% You may have to make some final tuning with \verb|\enlargethispage|.
+% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}.
+% The \index{needspace}\texttt{needspace}~\cite{needspace} package may also be useful.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce probl�me semblait r�solu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 ajoute de meilleures corrections. Vous
+% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \texttt{\bs enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel
+% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. L'emploi du paquetage \index{needspace}\texttt{needspace}~\cite{needspace} peut
+% aussi �tre utile.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (2)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How about implementing others layouts for a mini-table?}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table?}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (3)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Two consecutive backslashes in a contents line make an error}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Deux contre-obliques consecutives dans une entr�e de contenu provoquent une \mbox{erreur}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Use \verb|\protect\linebreak|.
+% \or\relax
+% Utilisez \verb|\protect\linebreak|.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (4)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres cr�e le chaos}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables
+% going in wrong chapters.}
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en d�coule,\ldots\
+% avec les mini-tables allant dans les  mauvais chapitres.}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The best way seems to make one run with the \index{mtcoff}\texttt{mtcoff}
+% package replacing the \texttt{minitoc} package, then restore
+% the \texttt{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ three times
+% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See
+% figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}.
+% Running with the \texttt{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files
+% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \texttt{minitoc}.
+% A more radical solution is to delete the \texttt{.aux}, \texttt{.toc},
+% \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lot} files relative to the document, then
+% re-execute \LaTeX\ three times.
+% \or\relax
+% La meilleure m�thode semble d'effectuer une ex�cution avec le paquetage \index{mtcoff}\texttt{mtcoff} rempla�ant
+% le paquetage  \texttt{minitoc}, puis de r�tablir le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} et de r�-ex�cuter \LaTeX\ trois
+% fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{f+mtc+3comp}. Ex�cuter avec le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff}
+% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purg�s des commandes �~superflues~� introduites par
+% \texttt{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de d�truire les fichiers \texttt{.aux}, \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof}
+% et \texttt{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de r�-ex�cuter \LaTeX\ trois fois.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{figure*}[tp]
+% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
+% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
+% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
+% \thicklines
+% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
+% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
+% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
+% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
+% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\texttt{.toc}}}
+% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\texttt{.toc}}}
+% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\texttt{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\texttt{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
+% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
+% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
+% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
+% \end{picture}}
+% \egroup
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
+% \item[(A)] \verb|\tableofcontents| produces a table of
+% contents, which is likely inaccurate.
+% \item[(B)] \verb|\minitoc| produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate.
+% \item[(C)] \verb|\tableofcontents| produces a table of contents, which is accurate.
+% \item[(D)] \verb|\minitoc| produces minitocs, which are accurate.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{flushleft}
+% \caption{Three compilations for \texttt{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp}
+% \end{figure*}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{figure*}[tp]
+% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
+% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
+% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
+% \thicklines
+% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
+% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
+% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
+% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
+% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\texttt{.toc}}}
+% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\texttt{.toc}}}
+% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\texttt{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\texttt{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
+% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
+% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
+% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
+% \end{picture}}
+% \egroup
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
+% \item[(A)] \verb|\tableofcontents| produit une table mati�res, qui est probablement inexacte.
+% \item[(B)] \verb|\minitoc| produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes.
+% \item[(C)] \verb|\tableofcontents| produit une table mati�res, qui est probablement exacte.
+% \item[(D)] \verb|\minitoc| produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{flushleft}
+% \caption{Trois compilations pour \texttt{minitoc}}\label{f+mtc+3comp}
+% \end{figure*}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (5)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \texttt{.mtc\meta{N}}.
+% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par
+% No modification is needed: all became automatic since
+% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions,
+% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package
+% option \index{shortext}\texttt{shortext}. Then you will get first the
+% auto-configuration messages, then a message saying that you
+% will use short extensions. But be careful to not have more than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)!
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Ce paquetage cr�e des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \texttt{.mtc\meta{N}}. Certains
+% syst�mes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limit�s �~3~caract�res. Que faire?}\par
+% Aucune modification n'est n�cessaire: tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment
+% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caract�res, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \index{shortext}\texttt{shortext}.
+% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'auto-configuration, puis un message disant que vous allez
+% utiliser des suffixes courts. Mais faites attention �~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du m�me type (m�me vides)!
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (6)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Playing with the chapter number}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Jouer avec le num�ro de chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, \emph{i.e.}~do not
+% write ugly things like
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\setcounter{chapter}{6}|
+% \end{verse}
+% The mechanism
+% would break. It is better to add \texttt{\bs chapter} commands,
+% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters.
+% Since version~\#10, the \texttt{minitoc} package works with appendices.
+% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1.
+% And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}.
+%
+% The same remark applies to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters.
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur �~\texttt{chapter}~�, c'est-�-dire, n'�crivez pas des horreurs
+% telles que
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\setcounter{chapter}{6}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Ceci casserait la m�canique du paquetage. Il est pr�f�rable d'ajouter des commandes \texttt{\bs chapter}, afin de
+% cr�er des chapitres vides (mais num�rot�s d'une mani�re l�gale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}
+% fonctionne avec les appendices.
+% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre num�rot� autrement que un. Et regardez �~Entr�es
+% sp�ciales pour la table des mati�res, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la bibliographie et l'index~�,
+% section~\vref{special.entries}.
+%
+% La m�me remarque s'applique aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (7)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Supported document classes}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Classes de document support�es}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define
+% chapters in the standard way, like `\texttt{book}' and `\texttt{report}',
+% or sections in the standard way, like `\texttt{article}'.
+% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \verb|\part| command.
+% Note that classes like ``\texttt{letter}'', which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be
+% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be
+% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with
+% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \texttt{minitoc} package relies on the
+% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui d�finissent les chapitres de la mani�re
+% standard, comme �~\texttt{book}~� et �~\texttt{report}~�, ou les sections de la mani�re standard,
+% comme �~\texttt{article}~�. Il y~a des �~parttocs~� si la classe de document d�finit la commande \verb|\part|.
+% Notez que des classes telles que �~\texttt{letter}~�, qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne
+% peuvent pas �tre support�es. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont
+% pas support�es\,\footnote{Ce serait tr�s difficile: tout utilisateur peut cr�er de nouvelles commandes de
+% sectionnement (souvent �~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limit�
+% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard
+% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (8)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compatibilit� avec les versions de \LaTeX{}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some users have failed to make \texttt{minitoc} to work. They got a message like:
+%       \begin{verse}
+%       \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
+%       \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
+%       \verb|Trying to continue...|
+%       \end{verse}
+%       or:
+%       \begin{verse}
+%       \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
+%       \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
+%       \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
+%       \end{verse}
+%       The \verb|\reset@font| command has been added to \texttt{latex.tex}
+%       on September~29th, 1991 and the \verb|\@inputcheck| command
+%       on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \texttt{latex.tex} has been
+%       released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you
+%       have an old version of \texttt{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from
+%       the archives and regenerate a \texttt{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool).
+% \or\relax
+% Certains utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus �~faire fonctionner \texttt{minitoc}. Ils ont re�u un message tel que:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
+% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
+% \verb|Trying to continue...|
+% \end{verse}
+% ou:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
+% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
+% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
+% \end{verse}
+% La commande \verb|\reset@font| a �t� ajout�e �~\texttt{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande
+% \verb|\@inputcheck| le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \texttt{latex.tex} a �t� distribu�e le 25~mars 1992. Si
+% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \texttt{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version r�cente
+% depuis les archives et r�g�n�rez un format \texttt{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (9)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Other mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Autres mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and
+% minibbl. First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly
+% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \texttt{.aux} files. Look
+% at the \texttt{chapterbib}, \texttt{bibunits},
+% \texttt{multibib}, and \texttt{bibtopic} packages.
+% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots.
+% Minibbls are not the aim of this package (see {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}).
+% \or\relax
+% Certains utilisateurs exigeants d�sirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les �~minibbls~�
+% (mini-bibliographies) sont un autre probl�me, fortement li� au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \texttt{.aux}.
+% Regardez les paquetages \texttt{chapterbib}, \texttt{bibunits}, \texttt{multibib} et \texttt{bibtopic}.
+% La version~\#13 a implant� les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce paquetage
+% (voir {\froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}).
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (10)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users
+% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be
+% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file
+% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots)
+% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would
+% be read for each \texttt{\bs miniXXX} macro!
+% Moreover, this would make the \index{checkfiles}\texttt{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package
+% option impractical to implement.
+% Note that the many files \texttt{*.mtc*}, etc., may be
+% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the
+% \verb|\dominitoc| command (and siblings).
+% But, since version \#35,
+% \texttt{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \texttt{*.mtc*} files
+% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules.
+% It would not be easy to do with one big auxiliary file. 
+% \or\relax
+% Ce paquetage cr�e des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argu� qu'il y en avait trop.
+% Une r�organisation profonde serait n�cessaire pour �viter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier
+% auxiliaire  (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs , etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce
+% fichier tr�s lente, car il devrait �tre lu pour chaque commande \texttt{\bs miniXXX}! De plus, ceci
+% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \texttt{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible.
+% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \texttt{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent �tre d�truits apr�s l'ex�cution de \LaTeX.
+% Ils sont reconstruits par la commande \verb|\dominitoc| (et ses analogues).
+% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \texttt{minitoc} est capable de d�tecter et sauter les fichiers \texttt{*.mtc*} (et
+% analogues) vides pour �viter des titres isol�s avec seulement deux filets fins.
+% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile �~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof}, and \texttt{.lot} files.
+% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be
+% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The
+% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \<document>\texttt{.mtc}
+% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file).
+%
+% As an example, you can look at the \index{rubber@\texttt{rubber}}\texttt{rubber} script~\cite{rubber}
+% (written in Python) by \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \url{http://rubber.sourceforge.net/}\\
+% \url{http://www.pps.jussieu.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} 
+% \end{quote}
+% \or\relax
+% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lot}.
+% Ils ne sont plus utiles apr�s l'ex�cution de \LaTeX. Si vous ex�cutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou
+% d'un �~makefile~�, il peut �tre utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait �tre optionnel,
+% pour permettre la mise au point). La table~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers
+% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \<document>\texttt{.mtc} est aussi cr�� comme fichier de travail).
+%
+% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder le script \index{rubber@\texttt{rubber}}\texttt{rubber}~\cite{rubber}
+% (�crit en Python) par \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
+% {\froff\begin{quote}
+% \url{http://rubber.sourceforge.net/}\\
+% \url{http://www.pps.jussieu.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/} 
+% \end{quote}}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (11)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to do mini-tables at levels other than chapter?}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment faire des mini-tables �~des niveaux autres que le chapitre?}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and
+% partlots for the part level in \texttt{book{\BAR}report}-like and \texttt{article}-like documents,
+% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \texttt{article}-like
+% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter
+% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make
+% an unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of
+% the document according to the size of it (e.g.~do not write an article
+% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!).
+%
+% \begin{center}\ttfamily
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{center}
+% \or\relax
+% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a �t� n�cessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots
+% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire �~\texttt{book}, \texttt{report} ou \texttt{article},
+% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire
+% �~\texttt{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \texttt{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et
+% section dans le m�me document, car cela produirait un monstre illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de
+% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas �crire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est
+% un rapport, ou m�me un livre!).
+% \begin{center}\ttfamily
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{center}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (12)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Incompatibilit� avec \LaTeX2.09}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \verb|\protect| before
+% \verb|\contentsline| in the \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lof}
+% files. The version~\#17 of \texttt{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09.
+% This will be the \emph{last}
+% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible
+% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete.
+% \or\relax
+% La version la plus r�cente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \verb|\protect| avant \verb|\contentsline| dans les fichiers
+% \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \texttt{minitoc} tente d'�tre compatible
+% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{derni�re} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et
+% ult�rieures sont sp�cifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsol�te.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (13)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Documents r�-initialisant le num�ro de chapitre pour chaque partie}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version~\#23, \texttt{minitoc} works with document classes resetting
+% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the
+% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version~\#23, \texttt{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui r�-initialisent le num�ro de
+% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les
+% mini-tables ont d�sormais un num�ro \emph{absolu}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (14)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines}
+% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \index{tight}\texttt{tight} option, and
+% with the \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight} option for the Koma-script classes (since version~\#43).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espac�es}
+% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserr�es avec l'option \index{tight}\texttt{tight},
+% avec l'option \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight} pour les classes Koma-script (depuis la version~\#43).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (15)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The secttocs are wrong}
+% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses}
+% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrig� (version~\#38).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (16)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to remove the lines of dots?}
+% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \index{undotted}\texttt{undotted}
+% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment retirer les points de conduite?}
+% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les num�ros de pages sont retir�s par
+% l'option \index{undotted}\texttt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (17)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to use the \index{hyperref}\texttt{hyperref} package with \texttt{minitoc}?}\label{faq.17}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment utiliser le paquetage \index{hyperref}\texttt{hyperref} avec \texttt{minitoc}?}\label{faq.17}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version~\#31, \texttt{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \texttt{hyperref}
+% package~\cite{hyperref}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% who used the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{Didier}{Verna}.
+% If you add the loading of the \texttt{hyperref} package to a document yet using \texttt{minitoc},
+% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run,
+% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of
+% \texttt{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from
+% \texttt{minitoc}~\#30 to \texttt{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding
+% \texttt{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \texttt{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher)
+% without \texttt{hyperref}, then with \texttt{hyperref}, because some internal commands written
+% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \texttt{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before}
+% \texttt{minitoc}. Note that \texttt{(f)minitoc.dtx} show a (not so) basic example of the use of the
+% \texttt{hyperref} package with \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#31, \texttt{minitoc} fonctionne correctement avec le puissant paquetage
+% \index{hyperref}\texttt{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref}, gr�ce �~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilis� les travaux de
+% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \xname{Didier}{Verna}. Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \texttt{hyperref} �~un
+% document utilisant d�j� \texttt{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en
+% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'ex�cution de \LaTeX, puis de r�-ex�cuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y
+% aura aucun probl�me si vous enlevez le chargement de \texttt{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce probl�me ne
+% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \texttt{minitoc} version~\#30 �~\texttt{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou sup�rieure)
+% avec un document d�j� trait� et en ajoutant \texttt{hyperref} en m�me temps! Il semble pr�f�rable de traiter le
+% document avec \texttt{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou sup�rieure) sans \texttt{hyperref}, puis avec \texttt{hyperref},
+% parce que certaines commandes internes �crites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont �t� modifi�es. S'il est utilis�,
+% le paquetage \texttt{hyperref} doit �tre charg� \emph{avant} \texttt{minitoc}. Notez que \texttt{(f)minitoc.dtx}
+% montrent un exemple (qui n'est pas vraiment) basique de l'utilisation du paquetage \texttt{hyperref} avec
+% \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (18)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Problem while upgrading \texttt{minitoc}}
+% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to
+% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \texttt{.aux},
+% \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof}, \texttt{.lot} files of the document,
+% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will
+% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Probl�me lors de la mise �~jour de \texttt{minitoc}}
+% Lors de la mise �~jour de la version~\#30 ou inf�rieure vers la version~\#31 ou sup�rieure, vous devriez d�truire
+% les fichiers \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof}, \texttt{.lot} du document, sinon la premi�re ex�cution de \LaTeX{} avec
+% la version~\#31 ou sup�rieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'ex�cution suivante devrait �tre correcte). Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (19)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A local table of contents for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Une table des mati�res locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}%
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices,
+% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of
+% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \verb|\part|
+% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at
+% the \verb|\part| level:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\doparttoc           % after \begin{document}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|\tableofcontents|
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|\appendix|\\
+% \verb|\part{Appendices}    % create a part level subdivision|\\
+% \verb|\parttoc             % create a local table of contents|\\
+% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\
+% \verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
+% \verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\
+% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\
+% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\
+% \verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
+% \end{verse}
+% See also section~\vref{faq.25}.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des mati�res pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entr�es de
+% cette table dans la table des mati�res principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision
+% \verb|\part| du document et de demander une table des mati�res au niveau de cette partie:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\doparttoc           % apr�s \begin{document}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|\tableofcontents|
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|\appendix|\\
+% \verb|\part{Appendices}    % cr�e une subdivision de niveau partie|\\
+% \verb|\parttoc             % cr�e une table des mati�res locale|\\
+% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\
+% \verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
+% \verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci � la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\
+% \verb|% apr�s les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\
+% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\
+% \verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (20)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \texttt{appendix} package}\index{appendix}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \texttt{appendix}}\index{appendix}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{appendices}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you use the \texttt{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}),
+% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \texttt{appendices} environment
+% (and after it): they do not
+% match with their appendix. In fact, the environnement opening \verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a
+% \verb|\addcontentsline| command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble
+% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Two solutions are available. The first one is to add a
+% \verb|\adjustmtc| or \verb|\adjuststc| command
+% (depending if the appendices are at the chapter or section level) after \emph{each}
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{appendices\}} command. The other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble
+% \emph{after} the loading of the \texttt{appendix} package:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if appendices are at the section level.
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \texttt{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}), vous observerez un
+% s�rieux probl�me avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \texttt{appendices} (et apr�s lui): elles ne correspondent
+% pas avec leur appendice. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une
+% commande \verb|\addcontentsline| pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la num�rotation des
+% minitocs ou secttocs. Deux solutions sont disponibles. La premi�re consiste �~ajouter une commande \verb|\adjustmtc| ou
+% \verb|\adjuststc| (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) apr�s \emph{chaque} commande
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{appendices\}}. L'autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le pr�ambule
+% \emph{apr�s} le chargement du paquetage \texttt{appendix}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si les appendices sont au niveau section.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (21)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \texttt{tocloft} package}\index{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \texttt{tocloft}}\index{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% (This answer is given in the documentation of the \texttt{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.)
+% The \texttt{tocloft} (by \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}) and \texttt{minitoc} packages
+% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed.
+% In the normal course of events, when \texttt{minitoc} is used in a chaptered
+% document it will typeset section
+% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \texttt{tocloft} is used in
+% conjunction with \texttt{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are
+% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in
+% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font.
+%
+% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small
+% font, is to put:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% or:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% in the preamble.
+%
+% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
+% \end{verse}
+% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then
+% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section
+% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font,
+% put the incantation between the \verb|\tableofcontents|
+% command and the first \verb|\chapter| command.
+%
+% As \texttt{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the
+% benefits of this package.
+% \or\relax
+% (Cette r�ponse est donn�e dans la documentation du paquetage \texttt{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.)
+% Les paquetages \texttt{tocloft} (de \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}) et \texttt{minitoc} ont une f�cheuse
+% interaction\,\footnote{D�couverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut �tre corrig�e.
+% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \texttt{minitoc} est utilis� dans un document avec chapitres, il
+% composera les entr�es de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \texttt{tocloft} est utilis� en conjonction avec
+% \texttt{minitoc}, alors les entr�es de sections dans les minitocs sont compos�es dans la fonte normale, sauf pour
+% les num�ros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entr�es de sections dans la table des mati�res
+% principale sont enti�rement en fonte normale.
+%
+% Un rem�de, si vous voulez que toutes des entr�es de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de
+% placer:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% ou:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% dans le pr�ambule
+%
+% Sinon, le rem�de est l'incantation suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Pour que les entr�es de sections dans la table des mati�res principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras,
+% placez l'incantation dans le pr�ambule. Pour que ces entr�es soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte
+% normale dans la table des mati�res principale, placer l'incantation entre la commande \verb|\tableofcontents| et
+% la premi�re commandes \verb|\chapter|.
+%
+% Puisque \texttt{tocloft} est un paquetage tr�s puissant et tr�s utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces rem�des si
+% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (22)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \texttt{memoir} class}\index{memoir}
+% The \texttt{memoir} class~\cite{memoir} offers basically the functionnalities of the \texttt{appendix}, \texttt{tocbibind}
+% and \texttt{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
+% hence it has the same problems; see above the available solutions.
+% If your version of the \texttt{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \verb|\chapter| command is
+% different and the \texttt{memoir} class is \emph{no more compatible} with the \texttt{minitoc} package, but a
+% patch is inserted to fix the problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \texttt{memoir}}\index{memoir}
+% La classe \texttt{memoir}~\cite{memoir} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalit�s des paquetages \texttt{appendix},
+% \texttt{tocbibind} et \texttt{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont le m�me auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
+% et donc elle a les m�mes probl�mes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles.
+% Si votre version\Virage{} de la classe \texttt{memoir} est r�cente, la syntaxe de la commande \verb|\chapter|
+% est diff�rente et la classe \texttt{memoir} \emph{n'est plus compatible} avec le paquetage \texttt{minitoc},
+% mais une modification est ins�r�e pour corriger le probl�me.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (23)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#41, the \verb|\mtcsetfont| and \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| commands are available. You do not need anymore
+% to know \verb|\mtcSSSfont|, \verb|\ptifont|, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \verb|\mtcsetfont| et \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| sont disponibles. Vous
+% n'avez plus besoin de conna�tre \verb|\mtcSSSfont|, \verb|\ptifont|, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#42, the \verb|\mtcsettitle| command is available.
+% You do not need anymore to know \verb|\mtctitle|, \verb|\slttitle|, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \verb|\mtcsettitle| est disponible.
+% Vous n'avez plus besoin de conna�tre \verb|\mtctitle|, \verb|\slttitle|, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#43, the \verb|\mtcsetdepth| command is available.
+% You do not need anymore to know the counters \verb|minitocdepth|, \verb|seclotdepth|, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \verb|\mtcsetdepth| est disponible.
+% n'avez plus besoin de conna�tre les compteurs \verb|minitocdepth|, \verb|seclotdepth|, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (24)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]%
+% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS}
+% \or\relax
+% \section[Compatibilit� avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]%
+% {Compatibilit� avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{amsart.cls}\texttt{amsart.cls} and \index{amsproc.cls}\texttt{amsproc.cls} document classes are
+% incompatible with \texttt{minitoc}.
+% The \index{amsbook.cls}\texttt{amsbook.cls} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want
+% a list of figures and/or a list of tables:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\listoffigures|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter % added|\\
+% \verb|\listoftables|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter % added|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Les classes de document \index{amsart.cls}\texttt{amsart.cls} et \index{amsproc.cls}\texttt{amsproc.cls} sont
+% incompatibles avec \texttt{minitoc}.
+% La classe de document \index{amsbook.cls}\texttt{amsbook.cls} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous d�sirez
+% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\listoffigures|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter % ajout|\\
+% \verb|\listoftables|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter % ajout|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (25)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to hide some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment dissimuler certaines entr�es dans la table des mati�res principale}\label{faq.25}%
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}.
+% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\verb|\minitoc|) whose entries should not appear in
+% the main table of contents. Just use the \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \texttt{\bs chapter\{Title\}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\
+% \texttt{\bs minitoc}\\
+% \texttt{\bs section\{sub-title\}}\\
+% .{}.{}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default:
+% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding).
+%
+% Of course, the environments \texttt{mtchideinmainlof}
+% and \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main
+% list of figures or of tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est un probl�me similaire �~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}.
+% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des mati�res locale pour un chapitre (\verb|\minitoc|) dont les entr�es ne
+% devraient pas appara�tre dans la table des mati�res principale. Il suffit d'utiliser l'environnement
+% \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \texttt{\bs chapter\{Titre\}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\
+% \texttt{\bs minitoc}\\
+% \texttt{\bs section\{sous-titre\}}\\
+% .{}.{}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel, qui est la profondeur de dissimulation dans la table des mati�res
+% principale (par d�faut, \texttt{-1}, dissimulation compl�te).
+%
+% Bien s�r, les environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} sont �galement disponibles,
+% pour dissimuler certaines entr�es dans les listes des figures ou des tableaux principales.
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A (26)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{How to define your own \texttt{.mld} file?}\label{faq.26}\index{.mld}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Comment d�finir votre propre fichier \texttt{.mld}?}\label{faq.26}\index{.mld}%
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \texttt{.mld} files.
+% The simplest way to alter some
+% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \verb|\renewcommand| or better via
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle|.
+% If you really want to have your own \texttt{.mld} file, you copy an existing \texttt{.mld} file into one with a new name (not
+% the name of a distributed \texttt{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \texttt{.mld} file and you can use it via
+% \verb|\mtcselectlanguage|. You can always contact me to add this new \texttt{.mld} file to the
+% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \meta{language}\texttt{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files.
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \texttt{.mld} de la distribution. La
+% mani�re la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de red�finir la commande correspondante via
+% \verb|\renewcommand| ou mieux, via \verb|\mtcsettitle|. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier
+% \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \texttt{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom
+% (pas le nom d'un fichier \texttt{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \texttt{.mld} et
+% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \verb|\mtcselectlanguage|. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau
+% fichier \texttt{.mld} �~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires
+% \meta{langage}\texttt{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de d�finition de langues.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (27)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \texttt{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\index{abstract}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \texttt{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\index{abstract}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \texttt{abstract} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
+% \index{addtotoc}\texttt{addtotoc} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
+% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \verb|\chapter|, else as a starred section.
+% This problem is detected by the \texttt{hints} option and you should add
+% a \verb|\mtcaddchapter[]| or a \verb|\mtcaddsection[]|
+% command after your \texttt{abstract} environment.
+% \or\relax
+% Lorsque le paquetage \texttt{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter R.}{Wilson}), est utilis� avec son option
+% \index{addtotoc}\texttt{addtotoc}, une entr�e �~{Abstract}~� (ou similaire) est ajout�e dans la table des
+% mati�res, comme un chapitre �toil� si la classe du document d�finit \verb|\chapter|, sinon comme une section
+% �toil�e. Ce probl�me est d�tect� par l'option \texttt{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[]| ou  \verb|\mtcaddsection[]| apr�s votre environnement \texttt{abstract}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A (28)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \texttt{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\index{sectsty}
+% If the \texttt{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \texttt{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course, \texttt{hints} option
+% detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \texttt{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\index{sectsty}
+% Si le paquetage \texttt{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilis�, il doit �tre charg�
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}, car il alt�re (red�finit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien s�r,
+% l'option \texttt{hints} d�tecte ce probl�me.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (29)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29}
+% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.}
+%
+% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like
+% \verb|\l@part|, \verb|\l@chapter|, \verb|\l@section|, etc. 
+%
+% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use
+% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting.
+% For the ``section'' (in the \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} classes) and lower levels,
+% these commands are (book class, \texttt{book.cls}) by default:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The
+% arguments of \verb|\@dottedtocline| are
+% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
+% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \texttt{tocdepth} or \texttt{minitocdepth}).
+% \item the indentation.
+% \item the width reserved for the page number.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% In the standard \texttt{book}, \texttt{report} and \texttt{article} classes, the dimensions
+% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit
+% depends of the current font. In the main table of contents,
+% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence
+% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries
+% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in
+% a non bold font (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has
+% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed.
+%
+% There are several solutions:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Redefine the \verb|\l@section| \ldots{} \verb|\l@subparagraph| commands
+%       to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This
+%       redefinition must be performed between \verb|\makeatletter| 
+%       and \verb|\makeatother|, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in
+%       their names; you must use \verb|\renewcommand*| to redefine
+%       these commands.
+% \item Use the \texttt{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} package to change the indentation, with
+%       font independent units. But then see section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries
+%       in the minitocs, using the \verb|\mtcsetfont| command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or
+%       redefining the \verb|\mtcSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSSfont|,
+%       \verb|\mtcPfont| and \verb|\mtcSPfont| commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29}
+% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas align�s avec les sections, alors qu'ils le
+% sont dans la table des mati�res principale.}
+%
+% Les entr�es d'une table des mati�res sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que
+% \verb|\l@part|, \verb|\l@chapter|, \verb|\l@section|, etc. 
+%
+% Les niveaux �~partie~� et �~chapitre~� (et �~section~� pour un article) utilisent des
+% commandes sp�cifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus �labor�e.
+% Pour les niveaux �~section~� (dans les classes \texttt{report} et \texttt{book}) et inf�rieurs,
+% ces commandes sont (class \texttt{book}, \texttt{book.cls}) par d�faut:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
+% \verb|\newcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% qui seront appliqu�es dans la table des mati�res principale et dans les minitocs. Les
+% arguments de \verb|\@dottedtocline| sont
+% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
+% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera compar�e �~\texttt{tocdepth} ou \texttt{minitocdepth});
+% \item l'indentation;
+% \item la largeur r�serv�e pour le num�ro de page.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% Dans les classes standard \texttt{book}, \texttt{report} et \texttt{article}, les dimensions
+% (deuxi�me et troisi�me arguments) sont donn�es en unit�s �~em~�, et cette unit�
+% d�pend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des mati�res principale, les entr�es de sections et de sous-sections
+% sont �crites dans la \emph{m�me} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les
+% minitocs, les entr�es pour les sections sont �crites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections
+% sont �crites dans une fonte non grasse (voir la table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un �~em~� a des tailles diff�rentes
+% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est alt�r�.
+%
+% Il y a plusieurs solutions:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Red�finir les commandes \verb|\l@section| \ldots{} \verb|\l@subparagraph| pour utiliser
+%       des unit�s ind�pendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette
+%       red�finition doit �tre effectu�e entre \verb|\makeatletter| 
+%       et \verb|\makeatother|, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms;
+%       vous devez utiliser \verb|\renewcommand*| pour red�finir ces commandes.
+% \item Utiliser le paquetage \texttt{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unit�s
+%       ind�pendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \item Utiliser la m�me fonte pour les entr�es de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs,
+%       en utilisant la commande \verb|\mtcsetfont| (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou
+%       en red�finissant les commandes \verb|\mtcSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSfont|, \verb|\mtcSSSfont|,
+%       \verb|\mtcPfont| et \verb|\mtcSPfont| (voir la table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \chapter{Installation}
+% \minilot
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Installation of the \texttt{minitoc} package (version~\#43).
+%
+% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \index{minitoc.l}\texttt{minitoc.l}. See
+% table~\vref{t+files}.
+%
+% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies
+% the function and the placement of its files.
+% \or\relax
+% Installation du paquetage \texttt{minitoc} (version~\#43).
+%
+% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donn�e dans
+% \index{minitoc.l}\texttt{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+files}.
+%
+% Les fichiers sont r�partis en �~classes~� ci-dessous (un m�me fichier peut appara�tre dans plusieurs classes).
+% Chaque classe sp�cifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
+% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN0}The files \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins} and \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx}
+%        are the basic source files of this package. The file \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx} loads
+%        \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation.
+%        The language selection is done by using
+%        \texttt{\bs ifcase} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs or} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs fi} constructs.
+% \or\relax
+%   \label{IN0}Les fichiers \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins} et \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx}
+%        sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx} charge
+%        \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx} mais s�lectionne la documentation en fran�ais. La s�lection de la
+%        langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \texttt{\bs ifcase} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs or}
+%        \ldots\ \texttt{\bs fi}.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN1}The files \index{minitoc.sty}\texttt{minitoc.sty}, \index{mtcoff.sty}\texttt{mtcoff.sty},
+%     and \emph{all}\Virage{} \index{.mld}\texttt{*.mld} and \index{.mlo}\texttt{*.mlo} files are the package
+%     itself\,\footnote{The large number \index{.mld}\texttt{*.mld} files is (partialy) a consequence of the fact
+%     that some languages have
+%     aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*.mld} file can load
+%     another one); the english and french languages are evident examples.
+%     For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts
+%     and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even
+%     for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk).}.
+%     \texttt{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \texttt{memoir} class.
+%     They must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \texttt{.sty} files.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \index{minitoc.sty}\texttt{minitoc.sty}, \index{mtcoff.sty}\texttt{mtcoff.sty},
+%     et \emph{tous}\Virage{} les fichiers \index{.mld}\texttt{*.mld} et \index{.mlo}\texttt{*.mlo} constituent le
+%     paquetage lui-m�me\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \index{.mld}\texttt{*.mld} est (en partie)
+%     une cons�quence du fait que certaines
+%     langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier \texttt{*.mld}
+%     peut en charger un autre); les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples �vidents.
+%     Pour certaines langues, la multiplicit� des fichiers \texttt{*.mld} correspond  �~une multiplicit� de fontes
+%     et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, cor�en, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou m�me �~des
+%     r�formes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norv�gien).}
+%     \texttt{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilit� avec la classe \texttt{memoir}.
+%     Ils doivent �tre \emph{tous} install�s dans un r�pertoire o� \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \texttt{.sty}.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN2}Informative text files:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \index{INSTALL}\texttt{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package.
+%          You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter).
+%    \item \index{minitoc.l}\texttt{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \texttt{minitoc} distribution. See
+%          table~\vref{t+files}.
+%    \item \index{README}\texttt{README} is a file describing briefly the \texttt{minitoc} package,
+%          plus some useful infos.
+%    \item \index{catalog}\texttt{catalog} contains basic infos about the \texttt{minitoc} package (abstract, date,
+%          author, version, licence).
+%    \item \index{TODO}\texttt{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented.
+%          Comments and suggestions are welcome.
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \index{INSTALL}\texttt{INSTALL} est un fichier d�crivant l'installation du paquetage. �~part la langue,
+%          vous �tes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court).
+%    \item \index{minitoc.l}\texttt{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de
+%          \texttt{minitoc}. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+files}.
+%    \item \index{README}\texttt{README} est un fichier d�crivant sommairement le paquetage \texttt{minitoc},
+%          plus quelques informations utiles.
+%    \item \index{catalog}\texttt{catalog} contient des informations basiques sur le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}
+%          (r�sum�, date, auteur, version, licence).
+%    \item \index{TODO}\texttt{TODO} liste quelques propositions de d�veloppement du paquetage, pas encore r�alis�es.
+%          Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus.
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN3}\index{minitoc-ex.tex}\texttt{minitoc-ex.tex}, \index{mini-art.tex}\texttt{mini-art.tex},
+%          \index{add.tex}\texttt{add.tex}, \index{add.bib}\texttt{add.bib} are example files, to play with.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN3}\index{minitoc-ex.tex}\texttt{minitoc-ex.tex}, \index{mini-art.tex}\texttt{mini-art.tex},
+%          \index{add.tex}\texttt{add.tex}, \index{add.bib}\texttt{add.bib} sont des exemples de fichiers, avec
+%          lesquels vous pouvez jouer.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN4}\index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug}, \index{minitoc.sum}\texttt{minitoc.sum}
+%              are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands
+%              (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}).
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN4}\index{minitoc.bug}\texttt{minitoc.bug}, \index{minitoc.sum}\texttt{minitoc.sum}
+%              sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des probl�mes (questions fr�quemment pos�es, voir le
+%              chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}).
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN5} \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins}, \index{minitoc.ist}\texttt{minitoc.ist},
+%              \index{mtcglo.ist}\texttt{mtcglo.ist},
+%              \index{minitoc.lan}\texttt{minitoc.lan},
+%              \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx}, and
+%              \index{minitoc.bib}\texttt{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN5} \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins}, \index{minitoc.ist}\texttt{minitoc.ist},
+%              \index{mtcglo.ist}\texttt{mtcglo.ist},
+%              \index{minitoc.lan}\texttt{minitoc.lan},
+%              \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx} et
+%              \index{minitoc.bib}\texttt{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque).
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN6}\index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx}, \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx},
+%              \index{fminitoc.bib}\texttt{fminitoc.bib},
+%              \index{fminitoc.ist}\texttt{fminitoc.ist},
+%              \index{fminitoc.lan}\texttt{fminitoc.lan},
+%              \index{franc.sty}\texttt{franc.sty}, \index{frbib.sty}\texttt{frbib.sty},
+%              \index{frnew.sty}\texttt{frnew.sty}, \index{frplain1.bst}\texttt{frplain1.bst} are the source
+%              (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and
+%              french documentations are both in the \texttt{minitoc.dtx} file. \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} sets a flag then
+%              loads \texttt{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} is much smaller than \texttt{minitoc.dtx}.
+%              Thus, \texttt{minitoc.ins} contains also some utility files which are automatically created (some
+%              \texttt{.sty} files, \texttt{minitoc.ist}, \texttt{mtcglo.ist}, \texttt{fminitoc.ist}, \texttt{minitoc.lan},
+%              \texttt{fminitoc.lan}).
+%              The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the
+%              file \texttt{minitoc.dtx}, and this helps the maintenance.
+%              Note that the \texttt{fminitoc.ins} file does not exist.}.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN6}\index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx}, \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx},
+%              \index{fminitoc.bib}\texttt{fminitoc.bib},
+%              \index{fminitoc.ist}\texttt{fminitoc.ist},
+%              \index{fminitoc.lan}\texttt{fminitoc.lan},
+%              \index{franc.sty}\texttt{franc.sty}, \index{frbib.sty}\texttt{frbib.sty},
+%              \index{frnew.sty}\texttt{frnew.sty}, \index{frplain1.bst}\texttt{frplain1.bst} sont les codes sources
+%              (et les outils) pour la documentation en fran�ais\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez �trange. En fait, les
+%              documentations en anglais et en fran�ais sont toutes deux dans le fichier \texttt{minitoc.dtx}.
+%              \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} �tablit un indicateur puis charge \texttt{minitoc.dtx}; en cons�quence, le fichier
+%              \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} est bien plus petit que \texttt{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \texttt{minitoc.ins}
+%              contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont cr��s automatiquement (quelques fichiers
+%              \texttt{.sty}, \texttt{minitoc.ist}, \texttt{mtcglo.ist}, \texttt{fminitoc.ist},
+%              \texttt{minitoc.lan}, \texttt{fminitoc.lan}).
+%              Les versions anglaise et fran�aise ne sont pas des traductions mot-�-mot, mais elles sont en
+%              parall�le dans le fichier \texttt{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.
+%              Notez que le fichier \texttt{fminitoc.ins} n'existe pas.}.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN7}\index{minitoc.pdf}\texttt{minitoc.pdf}, \index{minitoc.ps}\texttt{minitoc.ps}
+%              are the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF and PostScript formats.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN7}\index{minitoc.pdf}\texttt{minitoc.pdf}, \index{minitoc.ps}\texttt{minitoc.ps}
+%              forment la documentation en anglais (ou presque), dans les formats PDF et PostScript.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN8}\index{fminitoc.pdf}\texttt{fminitoc.pdf}, \index{fminitoc.ps}\texttt{fminitoc.ps}
+%              are the documentation in french, in PDF and PostScript formats. The french documentation and source
+%              files must not be omitted.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN8}\index{fminitoc.pdf}\texttt{fminitoc.pdf}, \index{fminitoc.ps}\texttt{fminitoc.ps}
+%              forment la documentation en fran�ais, dans les formats PDF et PostScript. La documentation en fran�ais
+%              et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas �tre omis.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN9} \index{pmk}\texttt{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a cappuccino while this
+%              script is running!}
+%              to prepare the package and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs.
+%              There are also four partial scripts (to be adapted):
+%              \begin{itemize}
+%              \item \texttt{imk}\index{imk}, which prepares the package from \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins} and
+%                    \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{emk}\index{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from
+%                    \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{fmk}\index{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from
+%                    \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx} and \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{rmk}\index{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class).
+%              \end{itemize}
+%              These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but there are very simple, and should be easy to
+%              convert in another classic shell.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN9} \index{pmk}\texttt{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de d�guster un
+%              cappuccino pendant que ce script s'ex�cute!} pour pr�parer le paquetage et sa documentation;
+%              vous devriez l'adapter �~vos besoins.
+%              Il y~a aussi quatre scripts partiels (�~adapter):
+%              \begin{itemize}
+%              \item \texttt{imk}\index{imk}, qui pr�pare le paquetage en partant de
+%                    \index{minitoc.ins}\texttt{minitoc.ins} et \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{emk}\index{emk}, qui pr�pare la documentation anglaise en partant de
+%                    \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{fmk}\index{fmk},  qui pr�pare la documentation fran�aise en partant de
+%                    \index{fminitoc.dtx}\texttt{fminitoc.dtx} et \index{minitoc.dtx}\texttt{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \texttt{rmk}\index{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un r�pertoire pour chaque classe).
+%              \end{itemize}
+%              Ces scripts sont actuellement �crits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont tr�s simples et devraient �tre
+%              faciles �~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique.
+% \fi
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \texttt{.dtx} and \texttt{.ins} files.
+% \item The files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \texttt{.sty} files.
+% \item The files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed in
+% a separate directory, but must not be omitted.
+% \item The files of~(\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN8}) must be installed as on-line documentation. Note that the PostScript files
+% of the distribution can be printed recto-verso on some printers.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Note that \texttt{minitoc.dtx} and \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \texttt{minitoc}
+% (with \texttt{hyperref}).
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent �tre install�s dans un r�pertoire o� \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \texttt{.dtx}
+% et \texttt{.ins}.
+% \item Les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent �tre install�s dans un r�pertoire o� \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \texttt{.sty}.
+% \item Les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent �tre install�s
+% dans un r�pertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas �tre omis.
+% \item Les fichiers de~(\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN8}) doivent �tre install�s comme documentation en ligne. Notez que les
+% fichiers PostScript de la distribution peuvent �tre imprim�s recto-verso sur certaines imprimantes.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% Notez que \texttt{minitoc.dtx} et \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de
+% \texttt{minitoc} (avec \texttt{hyperref}).
+% \fi
+% \begin{table*}[p]
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \def\CLA{class}
+% \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace}
+% \caption{List of files (\texttt{minitoc.l})}\label{t+files}
+% \or\relax
+% \def\CLA{classe}
+% \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace}
+% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\texttt{minitoc.l})}\label{t+files}
+% \fi
+% \medskip
+% \fboxsep=1em
+% \null\hspace*{-.15\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.3\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries
+% \noextrasfrancais
+% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
+% \begin{multicols}{3}\selectlanguage{french}
+% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
+% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.ins
+%    \item minitoc.dtx
+%    \item fminitoc.dtx
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.sty
+%    \item mtcoff.sty
+%    \item mtcpatchmem.sty
+%    \item acadian.mld
+%    \item acadien.mld
+%    \item afrikaan.mld
+%    \item afrikaans.mld
+%    \item american.mld
+%    \item arab.mld
+%    \item arabic.mld
+%    \item armenian.mld
+%    \item austrian.mld
+%    \item bahasa.mld
+%    \item bangla.mld
+%    \item basque.mld
+%    \item bicig.mld
+%    \item brazil.mld
+%    \item brazilian.mld
+%    \item breton.mld
+%    \item british.mld
+%    \item bulgarian.mld
+%    \item bulgarianb.mld
+%    \item buryat.mld
+%    \item canadian.mld
+%    \item canadien.mld
+%    \item castillan.mld
+%    \item castillian.mld
+%    \item catalan.mld
+%    \item chinese1.mld\ET chinese1.mlo
+%    \item chinese2.mld\ET chinese2.mlo
+%    \item croatian.mld
+%    \item czech.mld
+%    \item danish.mld
+%    \item dutch.mld
+%    \item english.mld
+%    \item esperant.mld
+%    \item esperanto.mld
+%    \item estonian.mld
+%    \item ethiopia.mld
+%    \item ethiopian.mld
+%    \item farsi1.mld\ET farsi1.mlo
+%    \item farsi2.mld\ET farsi2.mlo
+%    \item finnish.mld
+%    \item finnish2.mld
+%    \item francais.mld
+%    \item french.mld
+%    \item frenchb.mld
+%    \item frenchle.mld
+%    \item frenchpro.mld
+%    \item galician.mld
+%    \item german.mld
+%    \item germanb.mld
+%    \item greek.mld
+%    \item greek-mono.mld
+%    \item greek-polydemo.mld
+%    \item greek-polykatha.mld
+%    \item guarani.mld
+%    \item hangul1.mld\ET hangul1.mlo
+%    \item hangul2.mld\ET hangul2.mlo
+%    \item hangul3.mld\ET hangul3.mlo
+%    \item hangul4.mld\ET hangul4.mlo
+%    \item hanja1.mld\ET hanja1.mlo
+%    \item hanja2.mld\ET hanja2.mlo
+%    \item hebrew.mld
+%    \item hungarian.mld
+%    \item icelandic.mld
+%    \item interlingua.mld
+%    \item irish.mld
+%    \item italian.mld
+%    \item japanese.mld\ET japanese.mlo
+%    \item japanese2.mld\ET japanese2.mlo
+%    \item japanese3.mld\ET japanese3.mlo
+%    \item japanese4.mld\ET japanese4.mlo
+%    \item japanese5.mld\ET japanese5.mlo
+%    \item latin.mld
+%    \item latin2.mld
+%    \item latvian.mld
+%    \item letton.mld
+%    \item lithuanian.mld
+%    \item lsorbian.mld
+%    \item magyar.mld
+%    \item magyar2.mld
+%    \item malayalam-keli.mld
+%    \item malayalam-rachana.mld
+%    \item malayalam-rachana2.mld
+%    \item mongol.mld
+%    \item naustrian.mld
+%    \item ngerman.mld
+%    \item ngermanb.mld
+%    \item norsk.mld
+%    \item nynorsk.mld
+%    \item polish.mld
+%    \item polish2.mld
+%    \item portuges.mld
+%    \item portuguese.mld
+%    \item romanian.mld
+%    \item russian.mld
+%    \item russianb.mld
+%    \item russianc.mld
+%    \item russian2m.mld
+%    \item russian2o.mld
+%    \item samin.mld
+%    \item scottish.mld
+%    \item serbian.mld
+%    \item serbianc.mld
+%    \item slovak.mld
+%    \item slovene.mld
+%    \item spanish.mld
+%    \item spanish2.mld
+%    \item spanish3.mld
+%    \item swedish.mld
+%    \item thai.mld\ET thai.mlo
+%    \item turkish.mld
+%    \item UKenglish.mld
+%    \item ukraineb.mld
+%    \item USenglish.mld
+%    \item usorbian.mld
+%    \item vietnam.mld
+%    \item vietnamese.mld
+%    \item welsh.mld
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item INSTALL
+%    \item minitoc.l
+%    \item README
+%    \item catalog
+%    \item TODO
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc-ex.tex
+%    \item mini-art.tex
+%    \item add.tex
+%    \item add.bib
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.bug
+%    \item minitoc.sum
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.ins
+%    \item minitoc.dtx
+%    \item minitoc.bib
+%    \item minitoc.ist
+%    \item mtcglo.ist
+%    \item minitoc.lan
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.dtx
+%    \item fminitoc.dtx
+%    \item fminitoc.bib
+%    \item fminitoc.ist
+%    \item fminitoc.lan
+%    \item franc.sty
+%    \item frbib.sty
+%    \item frnew.sty
+%    \item frplain1.bst
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item minitoc.pdf
+%    \item minitoc.ps
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item fminitoc.pdf
+%    \item fminitoc.ps
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item pmk
+%    \item imk
+%    \item emk
+%    \item fmk
+%    \item rmk
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}
+% \end{table*}
+%
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{M�mento}\label{c+memento}
+% \fi
+% \minilot
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&To use short extensions for auxiliary files.\\
+% \texttt{loose}, \texttt{tight}&\texttt{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{k-loose}, \texttt{k-tight}&\texttt{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (Koma-script classes).\\
+% \texttt{dotted}, \texttt{undotted}&\texttt{dotted}&Dotted lines from entries
+% to page numbers.\\
+% \texttt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting
+% outside of their section. Useful if
+% you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\
+% \texttt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \texttt{\bs cite} commands
+% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\
+% \texttt{hints}, \texttt{nohints}&\texttt{hints}&Adds hints in the \texttt{.log}
+% file. Useful to detect some problems.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in
+% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \texttt{english}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{D�faut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Pour utiliser des suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\
+% \texttt{loose}, \texttt{tight}&\texttt{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{k-loose}, \texttt{k-tight}&\texttt{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes Koma-script).\\
+% \texttt{dotted}, \texttt{undotted}&\texttt{dotted}&Ponts de conduites entre les entr�es et les num�ros de pages.\\
+% \texttt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Emp�che les �l�ments flottants (figures et tableaux) de d�river en dehors de
+% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\
+% \texttt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \texttt{\bs cite} dans les titres de
+% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\
+% \texttt{hints}, \texttt{nohints}&\texttt{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \texttt{.log}.
+% Utile pour d�tecter certains probl�mes.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont list�es dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
+% D�faut: \texttt{english}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[General commands]{General commands}\label{t+SUC}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs faketableofcontents}&Replaces \texttt{\bs tableofcontents}
+% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\
+% \texttt{\bs fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \texttt{\bs listoffigures}
+% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\
+% \texttt{\bs fakelistoftables}&Replaces \texttt{\bs listoftables}
+% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Loads \emph{language}\texttt{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{parameter}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcskipamount}&Length of \texttt{\bs mtcskip}. Default: \texttt{\bs bigskipamount}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\
+% \texttt{\bs tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (Koma-script classes).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (Koma-script classes).\\
+% \texttt{\bs undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\
+% \texttt{\bs undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes g�n�rales}\label{t+SUC}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs faketableofcontents}&Remplace \texttt{\bs tableofcontents}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des mati�res mais pas de table des mati�res principale.\\
+% \texttt{\bs fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \texttt{\bs listoffigures}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\
+% \texttt{\bs fakelistoftables}&Remplace \texttt{\bs listoftables}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Charge \emph{langue}\texttt{.mld} pour s�lectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de
+% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Red�finit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{param�tre}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les num�ros de pages dans certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{cha�ne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \texttt{\bs mtcskip}. D�faut: \texttt{\bs bigskipamount}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serr�es. D�faut.\\
+% \texttt{\bs tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serr�es.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serr�es. D�faut. (Classes Koma-script).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serr�es. (Classes Koma-script).\\
+% \texttt{\bs undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entr�e jusqu'au num�ro de page). D�faut.\\
+% \texttt{\bs undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entr�e jusqu'au num�ro de page).\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands, part level}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs doparttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dopartlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% partlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dopartlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% partlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs parttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs partlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs partlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \texttt{\bs part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{parttocdepth\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \texttt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \texttt{\bs partXXX} commands, global for the \texttt{\bs
+% dopartXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l} for left (default), \texttt{c} for centered,
+% \texttt{r} for right, \texttt{n} or \texttt{e} for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \texttt{\bs ptcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes, niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs doparttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dopartlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% partlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dopartlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% partlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs parttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs part} pour laquelle une parttoc est
+% n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs partlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs part} pour laquelle une partlof est
+% n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs partlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs part} pour laquelle une partlot est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{parttocdepth\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des parttocs ult�rieures. Analogue �~\texttt{tocdepth}. D�faut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. D�faut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es chapitres.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es sections.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es, entr�es sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entr�es sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. D�faut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. D�faut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs plttitle}&Titre des partlots. D�faut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour �tablir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \texttt{\bs partXXX}, global pour les commandes \texttt{\bs
+% dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{c} pour centr�,
+% \texttt{r} pour droite, \texttt{n} ou \texttt{e} pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par d�faut est comme \texttt{\bs ptcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands, chapter level}\label{t+SUC-C}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs dominitoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dominilof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% minilof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dominilot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% minilot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minitoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minilof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minilot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \texttt{\bs chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{minitocdepth\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \texttt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \texttt{\bs miniXXX} commands, global for the \texttt{\bs
+% dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l} for left (default), \texttt{c} for centered,
+% \texttt{r} for right, \texttt{n} or \texttt{e} for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \texttt{\bs mtcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes, niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs dominitoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dominilof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% minilof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dominilot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs
+% minilot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minitoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minilof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs minilot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{minitocdepth\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des minitocs ult�rieures. Analogue �~\texttt{tocdepth}. D�faut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. D�faut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entr�es sections.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entr�es sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entr�es sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entr�es paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entr�es sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. D�faut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. D�faut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. D�faut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour �tablir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \texttt{\bs miniXXX}, global pour les commandes \texttt{\bs
+% dominiXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{c} pour centr�,
+% \texttt{r} pour droite, \texttt{n} ou \texttt{e} pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par d�faut est comme \texttt{\bs mtcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Commands, section level]{Commands, section level}\label{t+SUC-S}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs dosecttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dosectlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dosectlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} if you use \texttt{\bs
+% sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs secttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sectlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \texttt{\bs section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sectlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \texttt{\bs section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{secttocdepth\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \texttt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \texttt{\bs sectXXX} commands, global for the \texttt{\bs
+% dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l} for left (default), \texttt{c} for centered,
+% \texttt{r} for right, \texttt{n} or \texttt{e} for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \texttt{\bs stcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Commandes, niveau section]{Commandes, niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs dosecttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dosectlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoffigures} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs dosectlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \texttt{\bs [fake]listoftables} si vous utilisez \texttt{\bs sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs secttoc[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs section} pour laquelle une secttoc est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sectlof[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs section} pour laquelle une sectlof est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sectlot[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Apr�s chaque commande \texttt{\bs section} pour laquelle une sectlot est n�cessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs setcounter\{secttocdepth\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des secttocs ult�rieures. Analogue �~\texttt{tocdepth}. D�faut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. D�faut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entr�es sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entr�es sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entr�es paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entr�es sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&D�faut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. D�faut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slftitle}&Title des sectlofs. D�faut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. D�faut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\
+%       &D�faut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour �tablir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \texttt{\bs sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \texttt{\bs
+% dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l} pour gauche (d�faut), \texttt{c} pour centr�,
+% \texttt{r} pour droite, \texttt{n} ou \texttt{e} pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par d�faut est comme \texttt{\bs stcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Commands for horizontal rules]{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs [no]ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some mini-tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In
+% articles, parttocs have rules.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Commandes pour les filets horizontaux]{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs [no]ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par d�faut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont
+% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs [no]ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some mini-tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour les num�ros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs [no]ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les parttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les partlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les partlots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les minitocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les minilofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les minilots.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les secttocs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\
+% \texttt{\bs [no]sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les num�ros de pages dans certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par d�faut, les num�ros de pages sont pr�sents.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Specific commands for parttocs and other mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs beforeparttoc}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforepartlof}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforepartlot}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageparttocstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagepartlofstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagepartlotstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminitoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminilof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminilot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminilof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminilot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminitocstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminilofstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminilotstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesecttoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesectlof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesectlot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesecttocstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesectlofstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesectlotstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
+% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes sp�cifiques pour les dispositifs des parttocs et autres mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{D�faut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs beforeparttoc}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforepartlof}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforepartlot}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action apr�s une parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action apr�s une partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs cleardoublepage}&Action apr�s une partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageparttocstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagepartlofstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagepartlotstyle}&\texttt{\bs thispagestyle\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminitoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminilof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforeminilot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminilof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs afterminilot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminitocstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminilofstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispageminilotstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesecttoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesectlof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs beforesectlot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs aftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Action apr�s une sectlot.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesecttocstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesectlofstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\
+% \texttt{\bs thispagesectlotstyle}&\texttt{\bs empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{before{\BAR}after{\BAR}pagestyle\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
+% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{\textbf{Level}}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
+%              &              &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\
+% \midrule
+% table of contents&preparation&\texttt{\bs doparttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominitoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosecttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs parttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minitoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs secttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% list of figures &preparation&\texttt{\bs dopartlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominilof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosectlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs partlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minilof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs sectlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% list of tables  &preparation&\texttt{\bs dopartlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominilot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosectlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs partlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minilot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs sectlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p},
+% which specifies the position of the
+% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the
+% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered,
+% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes de pr�paration et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
+%              &              &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\
+% \midrule
+% table des mati�res&pr�paration&\texttt{\bs doparttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominitoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosecttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs parttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minitoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs secttoc[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% liste des figures &pr�paration&\texttt{\bs dopartlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominilof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosectlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs partlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minilof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs sectlof[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% liste des tableaux  &pr�paration&\texttt{\bs dopartlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dominilot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs dosectlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\texttt{\bs partlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs minilot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\texttt{\bs sectlot[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p},
+% qui sp�cifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de
+% pr�paration, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour align� �~gauche
+% (d�faut),
+% \texttt{[c]}~pour centr�, \texttt{[r]}~pour align� �~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs adjustptc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \texttt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs adjustmtc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \texttt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs adjuststc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \texttt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \texttt{ptc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \texttt{mtc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \texttt{stc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \texttt{ptc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \texttt{mtc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \texttt{stc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddpart[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \texttt{\bs part*} in the ToC.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \texttt{\bs chapter*} in the ToC.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddsection[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \texttt{\bs section*} in the ToC.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Adjusts the entry for index in the ToC.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Adjusts the entry for glossary in the ToC.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environment to hide entries in the main table of contents.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs adjustptc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incr�mente) le compteur de parttocs \texttt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs adjustmtc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incr�mente) le compteur de minitocs \texttt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs adjuststc[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incr�mente) le compteur de secttocs \texttt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementptc}&Ajuste (d�cr�mente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \texttt{ptc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementmtc}&Ajuste (d�cr�mente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \texttt{mtc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs decrementstc}&Ajuste (d�cr�mente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \texttt{stc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementptc}&Ajuste (incr�mente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \texttt{ptc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incr�mente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \texttt{mtc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs incrementstc}&Ajuste (incr�mente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \texttt{stc}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddpart[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \texttt{\bs part*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \texttt{\bs chapter*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcaddsection[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \texttt{\bs section*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Ajoute l'entr�e pour l'index dans la TdM.\\
+% \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Ajuste l'entr�e pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environnement pour dissimuler des entr�es dans la table des mati�res principale.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environnement pour dissimuler des entr�es dans la liste des figures principale.\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Environnement pour dissimuler des entr�es dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Obsolete commands]{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs firstpartis\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\
+% \texttt{\bs firstchapteris\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\
+% \texttt{\bs firstsectionis\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Commandes obsol�tes]{Commandes obsol�tes}\label{t+SUC-O}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{\bs firstpartis\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le num�ro de la premi�re partie.\\
+% \texttt{\bs firstchapteris\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le num�ro du premier chapter.\\
+% \texttt{\bs firstsectionis\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le num�ro de la premi�re section.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter*{Acknowledgments}
+% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]
+% I need to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to whose I forgot.}, for their help, their
+% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} and
+% \texttt{comp.text.tex}.}, and/or the packages and classes they wrote:\hfill\mbox{}\\
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter*{Remerciements}
+% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]
+% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que celles que j'ai oubli�es me pardonnent.}, pour
+% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement,
+% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} et \texttt{comp.text.tex}.}
+% et/ou les paquetages et classes qu'elles ont �crits:\hfill\mbox{}\\
+% \fi
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% \rightmargin\leftmargin
+% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani},
+% \name{Alex}{AJ},
+% \name{Achod~Andr�}{Aradian},
+% \name{Donald}{Arseneau},
+% \name{David}{Aspinall},
+% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann},
+% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky},
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart},
+% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim},
+% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara},
+% \name{Javier}{Bezos},
+% \name{Laurent}{Bloch},
+% \name{Johannes}{Braams},
+% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais},
+% \name{David}{Carlisle},
+% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran},
+% \name{David~B.}{Cook},
+% \name{Oliver}{Corff},
+% \name{Prakash}{Countcham},
+% \name{Serguei}{Dachian},
+% \name{Adrian}{Daerr},
+% \name{Ben}{De~Rydt},
+% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding},
+% \name{Marko}{�ehaja},
+% \name{Victor}{E{\ij}khout},
+% \name{Thomas}{Esser},
+% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt},
+% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns},
+% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer},
+% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
+% \name{Michel}{Goossens},
+% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi},
+% \name{Danny}{Heap},
+% \name{Thorsten}{Hein},
+% \name{Florence}{Henry},
+% \name{Morten}{H�gholm},
+% \name{Don}{Hosek},
+% \name{Yufan}{Hu},
+% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov},
+% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne},
+% \name{Radwan}{Jalam},
+% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky},
+% \name{Bil}{Kleb},
+% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker},
+% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov},
+% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa},
+% \name{Frank}{K�ster},
+% \name{Fabio}{Lanari},
+% \name{Robert}{Lange},
+% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr},
+% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes},
+% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet},
+% \name{Werner}{Lemberg},
+% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt},
+% \name{St�phane}{Lepolozec},
+% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg},
+% \name{Knut}{Lickert},
+% \name{Dan}{Luecking},
+% \name{Anders}{Lyhne},
+% \name{Marcus}{Marr},
+% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell},
+% \name{Yanick}{Michou},
+% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach},
+% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori},
+% \name{Michael}{Morrison},
+% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen},
+% \name{Julien}{Nicolas},
+% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum},
+% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal},
+% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz},
+% \name{Tony}{Roberts},
+% \name{Denis}{Roegel},
+% \name{Jan~Michel}{Rynning},
+% \name{David}{Samsoen},
+% \name{Uwe}{Schneider},
+% \name{Dung}{Ta~Quang},
+% \name{Laurent}{Tordella},
+% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
+% \name{Jari}{Vaario},
+% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin},
+% \name{Didier}{Verna},
+% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco},
+% \name{Nigel}{Ward},
+% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz},
+% \name{Stephan}{Webanck},
+% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\or\relax\ et\ \fi
+% \name{Tim}{Wright}.
+% \end{raggedright}
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID}
+% \or\relax
+% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID}
+% \fi
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+% \let\macro\svmacro
+% \let\endmacro\svendmacro
+% \let\environment\svenvironment
+% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\macro{\begingroup
+%     \catcode`\\12
+%     \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue}
+% \def\environment{\begingroup
+%     \catcode`\\12
+%     \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse}
+% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist
+% \let\endenvironment\endmacro
+% \makeatother
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+% \parttoc
+% ^^A \partlof
+% ^^A \partlot
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Commented code of \texttt{minitoc.sty}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Code comment� de \texttt{minitoc.sty}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% \lneed{4}
+% \minilof
+% \mtcskip
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This long chapter presents the code of the \texttt{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it.
+% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the
+% conversion of the package to \texttt{.dtx-.ins} format. Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.}
+% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history).
+%
+% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading
+% easier.
+%
+% Most of the \texttt{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the
+% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names.
+% Most of the \texttt{minitoc} internal commands
+% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or
+% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce long chapitre pr�sente le code du paquetage \texttt{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer.
+% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-�-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La
+% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \texttt{.dtx/.ins}. La version~\#42 n'a pas �t�
+% distribu�e pour cette raison.} sont saut�s,
+% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'�tre examin�s davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des
+% modifications).
+%
+% Le code est �clat� en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois r�ordonn�es, dans ce m�me
+% but.
+%
+% La plupart des commandes externes de \texttt{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}
+% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart
+% des commandes internes de \texttt{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots,
+% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient �tre
+% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code of \texttt{minitoc.sty} starts here:
+% \or\relax
+% Le code de \texttt{minitoc.sty} commence ici:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*minitoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date. A trace is written in the
+% \index{.log}\texttt{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son num�ro de version et sa date. Une trace est �crite
+% dans le fichier \index{.log}\texttt{.log}. Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
+\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}%
+   [2005/09/16 v43 Package minitoc]
+\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+   {*** minitoc package, version 43 ***\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour �crire}\label{s+code+fd-write}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \verb|\tf@mtc|.
+% \or\relax
+% Un descripteur de fichier est n�cessaire pour �crire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \verb|\tf@mtc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newwrite\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the indentation \verb|\mtcindent| (both sides) of the mini-tables and the
+% command \verb|\mtcskip| to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \verb|\mtcskipamount|
+% (default: \verb|\bigskipamount|).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons l'indentation \verb|\mtcindent| (des deux c�t�s) des mini-tables et la commande
+% \verb|\mtcskip| pour faire un saut vertical avant une a mini-table, sa valeur est \verb|\mtcskipamount|
+% (d�faut: \verb|\bigskipamount|).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\mtcindent
+\newskip\mtcskipamount
+\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount}
+\def\mtcskip{\unskip\removelastskip{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that \verb|\mtcskip| uses a local group to avoid the influence of \verb|\parskip|.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que \verb|\mtcskip| utilise un groupe local pour �viter l'influence de \verb|\parskip|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters
+% rather than flags,
+% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\texttt{\bs iffoo}, \texttt{\bs foofalse} and \texttt{\bs footrue}),
+% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with
+% $\varepsilon$-\TeX, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today. And a code programmed
+% with flags (\texttt{\bs iffoo .{}.{}. \bs else .{}.{}. \bs fi}) is easier to structure than a code programmed with
+% counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \verb|\newif|) to detect
+% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the
+% \texttt{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \texttt{minitoc} commands).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous avons besoin de d�clarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'ann�es, certains auteurs
+% pr�f�raient utiliser des compteurs plut�t que des indicateurs, car un indicateur co�te 3~s�quences de contr�le
+% (\texttt{\bs iftoto}, \texttt{\bs totofalse} et \texttt{\bs tototrue}), qui consomment de la m�moire. Mais le
+% nombre de registres compteurs est limit� �~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec
+% $\varepsilon$-\TeX, mais encore en nombre limit�), tandis que le co�t de la m�moire a beaucoup baiss� aujourd'hui. Et un
+% code programm� avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\bs iftoto .{}.{}. \bs else .{}.{}. \bs fi}) est plus facile
+% �~structurer qu'un code programm� �~l'aide de compteurs, �~mon humble avis.} (via \verb|\newif|) pour d�tecter le
+% chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilit� de certaines commandes (ceci sera utilis� par
+% l'option \texttt{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou pour autoriser la d�finition de certaines
+% commandes de \texttt{minitoc}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats.}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'�l�ments flottants, au niveau \mbox{section}.}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if the commands \verb|\dosectlof| and \verb|\dosectlot| are used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si les commandes \verb|\dosectlof| et \verb|\dosectlot| ont �t� utilis�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes.}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Pr�sence de certains paquetages et classes.}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if the \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \index{memoir}\texttt{memoir}
+% is loaded (and if it is a recent version), then if the \index{sectsty}\texttt{sectsty} package is loaded
+% (before or after \texttt{minitoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si le paquetage \index{placeins}\texttt{placeins} est charg�, puis si la classe
+% \index{memoir}\texttt{memoir} est charg�e (et si c'est une version r�cente), puis si le
+% paquetage \index{sectsty}\texttt{sectsty} est charg� (avant ou apr�s \texttt{minitoc}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si vous avez tent� d'ins�rer des mini-tables vides:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Pr�sence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with
+% these commands).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la pr�sence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait,
+% celle des compteurs associ�s �~ces commandes).
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{part}\verb|part| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{part}\verb|part|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{chapter}\verb|chapter| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{chapter}\verb|chapter|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{section}\verb|section| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{section}\verb|section|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{part}\verb|part| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{part}\verb|part|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{chapter}\verb|chapter| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{chapter}\verb|chapter|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \index{section}\verb|section| counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \index{section}\verb|section|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Flags to check to see if some commands are used}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Indicateurs �~tester pour savoir si certaines commandes ont �t� utilis�es}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation
+% command (\texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \index{hints}\texttt{hints} package option
+% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-m�me et un
+% pour la commande de pr�paration  (\texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilis�s par l'option de
+% paquetage \texttt{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the part level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false
+\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false
+\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false
+\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the chapter level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false
+\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false
+\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false
+\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false
+\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false
+\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false
+\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false
+\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�tectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsol�tes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false
+\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false
+\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation for the \texttt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\index{notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pr�paration pour l'option \texttt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\index{notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal command \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile|,
+% which is a ``hook'' command
+% (redefinable command) used by this option (requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \texttt{notoccite}
+% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�clarons un indicateur pour la pr�sence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile|, qui est une commande �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable)
+% utilis�e par cette option (ceci a �t� demand� par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage
+% \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false
+\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}%
+   {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation for the \texttt{tight} and \texttt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\index{tight}\index{k-tight}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pr�paration pour les options \texttt{tight} and \texttt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\index{tight}\index{k-tight}\
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\texttt{loose} and
+% \texttt{k-loose} options):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�clarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par d�faut (options \texttt{loose}
+% et \texttt{k-loose}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation to work with \texttt{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\index{hyperref}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pr�paration pour travailler avec \texttt{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\index{hyperref}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code prepares the interface with the \texttt{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref}.
+% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in \verb|\AtBeginDocument| if this package is loaded.
+% This action defines some commands for the \texttt{hyperref} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code pr�pare l'interface avec le paquetage \texttt{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref}.
+% Un indicateur est d�fini, puis cette pr�paration est effectu�e dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument| si ce
+% paquetage est charg�. Cette action d�finit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \texttt{hyperref}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\PackageInfo{minitoc}{*** compatible with hyperref ***\@gobble}
+\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+    \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true
+    \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}%
+    \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}%
+    \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}%
+    \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part
+    \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter
+    \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section
+    \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection
+    \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection
+    \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph
+    \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph
+  }{}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Check if the \texttt{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\index{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tester si le paquetage \texttt{sectsty} est charg�, et quand}\index{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \texttt{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \texttt{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \texttt{minitoc} is loaded and also in a \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \texttt{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est charg� avant ou apr�s \texttt{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \texttt{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont �t� charg�s. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Is the \texttt{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\index{memoir}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La classe \texttt{memoir} est-elle charg�e?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\index{memoir}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if the \texttt{memoir}\index{memoir}~\cite{memoir} class is loaded.
+% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be incompatible if too recent. In the later case, a patch
+% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la classe \texttt{memoir}\index{memoir}~\cite{memoir} est charg�e.
+% Cette classe n�cessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilit� ou �tre incompatible si elle est trop r�cente.
+% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est ins�r�e (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}%
+   {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax%
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {*** the memoir class is loaded: compatibility attempted ***\@gobble}}%
+   {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false}
+\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
+ \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}%
+   {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {*** old version of the memoir class ***\@gobble}}
+   {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {*** recent version of the memoir class ***\@gobble}
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}{*** This version of the memoir class uses \MessageBreak
+                                a version of \string\chapter\space which is \MessageBreak
+                                incompatible with the minitoc package. \MessageBreak
+				 We try to patch ***\@gobble}%
+   \@mtcpatchmemoir@true}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And now the patch:
+% \or\relax
+% Et voici cette correction:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtcpatchmemoir@
+\InputIfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{}{%
+   \Package{Error}{minitoc}
+     {*** Unable to patch the memoir class ***}%
+     {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tester la vacuit� d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package
+% \index{ifmtarg}\texttt{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter R.}{Wilson} and
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \index{while.tip}\texttt{while.tip},
+% by \xname{Stephan~P.~von}{Bechtolsheim}~\cite{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode
+% change of ``Q'', hence a \verb|\gdef| is needed for \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|.
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tir�es du paquetage
+% \index{ifmtarg}\texttt{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter R.}{Wilson} et
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \index{while.tip}\texttt{while.tip},
+% de \xname{Stephan~P.~von}{Bechtolsheim}~\cite{tex-bech}). Le groupe est n�cessaire pour garder local le
+% changement de �~\emph{catcode}~� de �~Q~�, donc il est n�cessaire d'utiliser un \verb|\gdef| pour \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{%
+\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\endgroup
+\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi
+\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{%
+   \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}%
+   \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}%
+   \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}%
+   \mtc@@While
+}
+\def\mtc@@While{%
+   \mtc@WhilePreCondition
+   \mtc@WhileCondition
+      \def\mtc@WhileNext{%
+          \mtc@WhileBody
+          \mtc@@While
+      }%
+   \else
+      \def\mtc@WhileNext{}%
+   \fi
+   \mtc@WhileNext
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \verb|\mtc@CkFile{file}| returns \verb|\@mtc@FEtrue| if the file
+% is empty, \verb|\@mtc@FEfalse| if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white
+% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \verb|\mtc@CkFile{file}| rend \verb|\@mtc@FEtrue|
+% si le fichier est vide, \verb|\@mtc@FEfalse| si le fichier n'est pas vide. Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un
+% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \verb|\mtc@While| loop may be
+% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for
+% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop.
+% \verb|\jobname.mtc| is used as scratch file. It is erased after use.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \verb|\mtc@While| peut prendre du temps, mais pas une
+% �ternit� (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la premi�re ligne non vide arr�te la boucle.
+% \verb|\jobname.mtc| est utilis� comme fichier de travail. Il est effac� apr�s usage.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue
+\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue
+\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue
+\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to
+                                   \mtc@Rline\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax
+     \def\mtc@Rline{}
+  \else
+     \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
+     \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}%
+              {\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse}
+  \fi
+}
+\def\mtc@CkFile#1{%
+\@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue
+\if@mtc@checkfiles
+\IfFileExists{#1}{%
+\immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax
+\mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}%
+   {\mtc@Body}%
+\mtc@EndWhile}%
+{\@mtc@FEtrue}%
+\else
+\@mtc@FEfalse%
+\fi}
+\closein\@inputcheck\relax
+\def\mtc@CkStr#1{%
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}%
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+\mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}%
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal macros to decrement \texttt{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros internes pour d�cr�menter les compteurs de \texttt{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \texttt{minitoc} counter (\texttt{ptc}, \texttt{mtc} or \texttt{stc}) by one.
+% These macros are:
+% \or\relax
+% Il est parfois n�cessaire de d�cr�menter un compteur de \texttt{minitoc} (\texttt{ptc}, \texttt{mtc} ou \texttt{stc})
+% de un. Ces macros sont:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
+\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
+\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \texttt{\bs part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \verb|\part| command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
+% we cannot patch it and a warning is
+% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \texttt{\bs part} command are likely non
+% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches,
+% \verb|\@part| (for the unstarred version) or
+% \verb|\@spart| (for the starred version, \verb|\part*|): we add \verb|\stepcounter{ptc}| to increment the parttoc
+% counter \index{ptc}\texttt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% The code of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \verb|\part| is not defined.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \verb|\part| n'est pas d�finie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvouns pas la
+% modifier et un avertissement est �mis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais
+% pas de commande \texttt{\bs part} est probablement non standard, d'o� l'avertissement affich� sur le terminal.}.
+% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \verb|\@part| (pour la version non �toil�e) ou \verb|\@spart| (pour la
+% version �toil�e, \verb|\part*|): nous ajoutons \verb|\stepcounter{ptc}| pour incr�menter le compteur de parttocs
+% \index{ptc}\texttt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Le code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi saut� si \verb|\part| n'est pas
+% d�finie.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+     {*** part level macros NOT available ***}
+}{%% else undefined part (\part defined)
+  \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+     {*** part level macros available ***\@gobble}
+  \let\mtc@svspart\@spart
+  \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart}
+  \let\mtc@svpart\@part
+  \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour une partie �toil�e}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \verb|\mtcaddpart| macro,
+% which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC.
+%
+% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|)
+% or omitted, we add a \verb|\contentsline{xpart}{}...| line in the
+% \texttt{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \verb|\contentsline{part}{title...}...| line in the \texttt{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \index{xpart}\verb|\contentsline{xpart}{}...| line in the \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lot} files. Then we increment the
+% \texttt{ptc} counter, via \verb|\adjustptc|
+% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
+% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of
+% \verb|\contentsline| means that \verb|\l@xpart| will be invoked in place of
+% \verb|\l@part| to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \verb|\l@xpart| uses a huge depth (10000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour une partie �toil�e, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \verb|\mtcaddpart|, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait appara�tre dans la table
+% des mati�res.
+%
+% Par d�faut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|) ou omis, nous ajoutons
+% une ligne \verb|\contentsline{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une
+% ligne \verb|\contentsline{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne
+% \index{xpart}\verb|\contentsline{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lot}. Puis nous
+% incr�mentons le compteur \texttt{ptc}, via \verb|\adjustptc| (d�finie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
+% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \verb|\contentsline| signifie que \verb|\l@xpart| sera invoqu�e
+% au lieu de \verb|\l@part| pour imprimer l'entr�e dans la table des mati�res, mais \verb|\l@xpart| utilise une tr�s
+% grande profondeur (10000) pour cette entr�e, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprim�e (sauf si vous trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}%
+    \adjustptc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section level macros are defined if \verb|\chapter| is not defined and \verb|\section| defined, i.e. in
+% document classes like \index{article}\texttt{article}, but not in document classes
+% like \index{book}\texttt{book} or \index{report}\texttt{report}. So we
+% test if \verb|\chapter| is defined and if \verb|\section| is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are
+% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \texttt{minitoc} package with the class of your document.
+% \or\relax
+% Les macros au niveau section sont d�finies si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie mais \verb|\section| est d�finie,
+% c'est-�-dire dans les classes de document telles que \index{article}\texttt{article}, mais pas dans les classes de
+% document telles que \index{book}\texttt{book} ou \index{report}\texttt{report}. Donc nous testons si \verb|\chapter|
+% est d�finie et si \verb|\section| est d�finie, avec les avertissements ad�quats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes
+% n'est d�finie, vous avez un s�rieux probl�me pour utiliser le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} avec la classe de votre
+% document.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {*** chapter level macros NOT available ***\@gobble}%
+  \@ifundefined{section}{\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {*** section level macros NOT available ***\@gobble}%
+    \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+       {*** no section or chapter level macros available ***
+        \MessageBreak
+        *** PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS ***}}%
+  {\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {*** section level macros available ***\@gobble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Corrections pour la num�rotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter
+% \index{stc}(\texttt{stc}) via \verb|\mtc@onebacksect| when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these
+% commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Comme la table des mati�res, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont consid�r�es comme des sections
+% (�toil�es), il nous faut d�cr�menter le compteur de secttocs \index{stc}(\texttt{stc}) via \verb|\mtc@onebacksect|
+% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont ex�cut�es. Donc nous modifions ces commandes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
+    \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures
+    \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables
+    \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect}
+    \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect}
+    \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modification de la commande \texttt{\bs section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \verb|\section| command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
+% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed.
+% Else, we patch its two branches, \verb|\@sect| (for the unstarred version)
+% or \verb|\@ssect| (for the starred version, \verb|\section*|): we add \index{stc}\verb|\stepcounter{stc}| to increment
+% the secttoc counter \verb|stc|, only in the unstarred case
+% (the version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter).
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \verb|\section| n'est pas d�finie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas
+% la modifier et un avertissement est affich�. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \verb|\@sect| (pour la version
+% non �toil�e) ou \verb|\@ssect| (pour la version �toil�e, \verb|\section*|): nous ajoutons
+% \index{stc}\verb|\stepcounter{stc}| pour incr�menter le compteur de secttocs \verb|stc|, seulement dans le cas non
+% �toil� (la version~\#25 a �limin� une d�cr�mententation superflue de ce compteur).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \let\mtc@svsection\section
+     \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection}
+     \let\mtc@svss\@ssect
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour une section �toil�e}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \verb|\mtcaddsection| macro, which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|)
+% or omitted, we add a \index{xsection}\verb|\contentsline{xsection}{}...|
+% line in the \index{.toc}\texttt{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \verb|\contentsline{section}{title...}...| line in the \texttt{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \verb|\contentsline{xsection}{}...| line in the \index{.lof}\texttt{.lof} and \index{.lot}\texttt{.lot} files.
+% Then we increment the
+% \texttt{stc} counter, via \verb|\adjuststc| (defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}).
+% Using \texttt{xsection} as first argument of
+% \verb|\contentsline| means that \verb|\l@xsection| will be invoked
+% in place of \verb|\l@section| to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \verb|\l@xsection| uses a huge depth (10000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour une section �toil�e, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \verb|\mtcaddsection|, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit appara�tre dans la
+% table des mati�res. Par d�faut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est test� par \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|) ou
+% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \index{xsection}\verb|\contentsline{xsection}{}...| dans le fichier
+% \index{.toc}\texttt{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \verb|\contentsline{section}{title...}...|
+% dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \verb|\contentsline{xsection}{}...| dans les
+% fichiers \index{.lof}\texttt{.lof} et \index{.lot}\texttt{.lot}. Puis nous incr�mentons le compteur \texttt{stc},
+% via \verb|\adjuststc| (d�finie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}). Le fait d'utiliser
+% \texttt{xsection} comme premier argument de \verb|\contentsline| signifie que \verb|\l@xsection| sera invoqu�e au
+% lieu de \verb|\l@section| pour imprimer l'entr�e dans la table des mati�res, mais \verb|\l@xsection| utilise une
+% tr�s grande profondeur (10000) pour cette entr�e, donc elle ne sera jamais r�ellement imprim�e (sauf si vous
+% trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsection}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xsection}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xsection}{}%
+    \adjuststc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }}%
+   {%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The chapter level macros are defined if \verb|\chapter| is defined, \emph{i.e.}~in
+% document classes like \index{book}\texttt{book} or \index{report}\texttt{report}. So we
+% test if \verb|\chapter| is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the
+% ``else'' branch of \texttt{\bs @ifundefined\{chapter\}}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les macros au niveau chapitre sont d�finies si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, c'est-�-dire, dans les classes de
+% document telles que \index{book}\texttt{book} ou \index{report}\texttt{report}. Donc nous testons si \verb|\chapter|
+% est d�finie, avec les avertissements ad�quats. Ce test a d�j� �t� fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche
+% �~sinon~� de \texttt{\bs @ifundefined\{chapter\}}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \PackageInfo{minitoc}{*** chapter level macros available ***\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \texttt{\bs chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\chapter| command is defined (by the document class, usually).
+% We patch its two branches, \verb|\@chapter| (for the unstarred version) or \verb|\@schapter| (for the
+% starred version, \verb|\chapter*|): we add call to \verb|\stepcounter{mtc}| to increment the minitoc counter \verb|mtc|.
+% Only the unstarred branch (\verb|\@chapter|) is patched here.
+% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\chapter| est d�finie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux
+% branches, \verb|\@chapter| (pour la version non �toil�e) ou \verb|\@schapter| (pour la version �toil�e,
+% \verb|\chapter*|): nous ajoutons un appel �~\verb|\stepcounter{mtc}| pour incr�menter le compteur de minitocs \verb|mtc|.
+% Seule la branche non �toil�e est modifi�e ici. L'autre branche sera modifi�e plus loin (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter
+\def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour un chapitre �toil�}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| macro, which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|)
+% or omitted, we add a \index{xchapter}\verb|\contentsline{xchapter}{}...| line
+% in the \texttt{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \verb|\contentsline{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \texttt{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \verb|\contentsline{xchapter}{}...| line in the \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lot} files. Then we increment the
+% \texttt{mtc} counter, via \verb|\adjustmtc|
+% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}).
+% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of
+% \verb|\contentsline| means that \verb|\l@xchapter| will be invoked in place of
+% \verb|\l@chapter| to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \verb|\l@xchapter| uses a huge depth (10000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entr�e dans la table des mati�res pour un chapitre �toil�, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter|, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait appara�tre dans la
+% table des mati�res. Par d�faut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est test� via \verb|\mtc@ifmtarg|) ou
+% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \index{xchapter}\verb|\contentsline{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}.
+% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \verb|\contentsline{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}.
+% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \verb|\contentsline{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \texttt{.lof} et
+% \texttt{.lot}. Puis nous incr�mentons le compteur \texttt{mtc}, via \verb|\adjustmtc| (d�finie dans la
+% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument
+% de \verb|\contentsline| signifie que \verb|\l@xchapter| sera invoqu�e au lieu de \verb|\l@chapter| pour imprimer
+% l'entr�e dans la table des mati�res, mais \verb|\l@xchapter| utilise une tr�s grande profondeur (10000) pour cette
+% entr�e, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprim�e (sauf si vous trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}%
+    \adjustmtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands,
+% \emph{i.e.}~terminates the \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}| at the beginning of
+% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-�-dire termine la construction
+% \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}| du d�but de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{D�clarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\newread}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\newread| command must be redeclared as being \verb|\outer| (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me).
+% We need a token register (\verb|\mtc@toks|), a temporary string (\verb|\mtc@string|), struts (two kinds, each
+% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all
+% dimensions equal to zero (\verb|\mtc@zrule|) and a command discouraging page breaks (\verb|\mtc@BBR|, for ``bad
+% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units,
+% to follow the current font.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\newread| doit �tre red�clar�e comme �tant \verb|\outer| (comme me l'a conseill�
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\verb|\mtc@toks|), d'une cha�ne temporaire (\verb|\mtc@string|),
+% d'�tais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une bo�te contenant un filet vertical invisible)
+% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont �~z�ro (\verb|\mtc@zrule|) et d'une commande pour d�courager les
+% coupures de page (\verb|\mtc@BBR|, pour �~\emph{bad break}~�). Pour les �tais, qui sont des bo�tes contenant un
+% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unit�s �~\texttt{ex}~�, pour suivre la fonte courante.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n}
+\newtoks\mtc@toks
+\def\mtc@string{\relax}
+\newbox\mtc@strutbox
+\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}}
+\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox
+                     \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi}
+\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox
+\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}}
+\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox
+                      \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi}
+\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut}
+\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}}
+\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code is a hack to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters)
+% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\verb|\tf@mtc|) to write files\,\footnote{%
+% Note that it is the \emph{only} new
+% file descriptor created by the \texttt{minitoc} package. All files written by \texttt{minitoc} use this
+% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g. for the \texttt{.log} file. In fact, \texttt{minitoc}
+% writes also in the
+% \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands
+% like \texttt{\bs tableofcontents}, \texttt{\bs listoffigures} and \texttt{\bs listoftables}. We can conclude that
+% \texttt{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter
+% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing),
+% because they called the standard internal \texttt{\bs @starttoc} macro, which invokes \texttt{\bs newwrite},
+% for each mini-table. As \texttt{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \texttt{.log} file,
+% and in the standard contents files,
+% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem.
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command
+% (\texttt{\bs part}, \texttt{\bs chapter}, or \texttt{\bs section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table
+% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\texttt{\bs doparttoc}, \ldots,
+% \texttt{\bs dosectlot}), once at a time.
+% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}.
+% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot
+% be used, else the messages are only written in the \texttt{.log} file. The sequencing of these operations is vital. The
+% figure~\vref{f+code+8.3} shows this sequence. A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{figure}[t]
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Phase (time from left to right):}&&1&2&3\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc1}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\
+% \space &\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc(1)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \caption{Hack to detect the limitation to short extensions.}\label{f+code+8.3}
+% \end{figure}
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code est une astuce pour d�terminer si le syst�me d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes
+% longs (${}>3$~caract�res) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous d�finissons un descripteur de fichier (\verb|\tf@mtc|)
+% pour �crire des fichiers \,\footnote{%
+% Notez que c'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier cr�� par le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}. Tous les
+% fichiers �crits par \texttt{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier
+% \texttt{.log}. En fait, \texttt{minitoc} �crit aussi dans les fichiers \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lot},
+% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers d�j� utilis�s par des commandes standard telle que \texttt{\bs tableofcontents},
+% \texttt{\bs listoffigures} et \texttt{\bs listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \texttt{minitoc} lui-m�me
+% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'�criture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des
+% mati�res par chapitre ont �chou� en conduisant rapidement �~un �puisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\
+% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en �criture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard
+% \texttt{\bs @starttoc}, qui invoque \texttt{\bs newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \texttt{minitoc} �crit
+% dans seulement un seul fichier �~la fois (et dans le fichier \texttt{.log}, et dans les fichiers standard de
+% contenus, bien s�r), nous pouvons r�utiliser le m�me descripteur de fichier et �viter ce s�rieux probl�me.
+% Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} �crit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de
+% sectionnement majeure (\texttt{\bs part}, \texttt{\bs chapter}, ou \texttt{\bs section}), si n�cessaire. Il �crit
+% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de pr�paration des mini-tables
+% (\texttt{\bs doparttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{\bs dosectlot}), un �~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau
+% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas �tre utilis�s, sinon les
+% messages sont �crits seulement dans le fichier \texttt{.log}. Le s�quencement de ces op�rations est vital.
+% La figure~\vref{f+code+8.3} montre ce s�quencement. Un ast�risque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{figure}[t]
+% \centering
+% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Phase (temps de gauche �~droite):}&&1&2&3\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{S.E. avec suffixes longs}&\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc1}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\
+% \space &\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{S.E. avec suffixes courts}&\texttt{\bs jobname.mtc(1)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \caption{Astuce pour d�tecter la limitation �~des suffixes courts.}\label{f+code+8.3}
+% \end{figure}
+% \fi
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\input}
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
+% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%    First, a message and a new flag:
+% \or\relax
+%    D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+   {*** Autoconfiguration of extensions ***\@gobble}
+\newif\if@longextensions@\@longextensions@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We write ``\verb|\@longextensions@true|'' in \verb|\jobname.mtc1|. But if the OS has short extensions, the
+%       real name of the file will be truncated to \verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous �crivons �~\verb|\@longextensions@true|~� dans \verb|\jobname.mtc1|. Mais si le syst�me
+%       d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqu� �~\verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc1
+\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@longextensions@true}
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We write ``\verb|\@longextensions@false|'' in \verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous �crivons �~\verb|\@longextensions@false|~� dans \verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@longextensions@false}
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%        We read \verb|\jobname.mtc1|. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be
+%        truncated to \verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \or\relax
+%        Nous lisons \verb|\jobname.mtc1|. Mais si le syst�me d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du
+%        fichier sera tronqu� �~\verb|\jobname.mtc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\input{\jobname.mtc1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Hence, the flag is true if we read really from \verb|\jobname.mtc1|, but false if we read from
+%       \verb|\jobname.mtc|. The text and the severity of the messages are different.
+% \or\relax
+%       En cons�quence, l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \verb|\jobname.mtc1|, mais faux
+%       si nous lisons depuis \verb|\jobname.mtc|. Le texte et la s�v�rit� des messages sont diff�rents.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@longextensions@
+ \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+   {*** Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used ***\@gobble}
+ \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+ {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like \MessageBreak
+   \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}%
+\else
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+   {*** Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used ***sight***}
+ \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+   {==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like
+   \MessageBreak \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We erase the contents of the two files (because \verb|\jobname.mtc| is also used later as a~scratch file,
+%       see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous effa�ons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \verb|\jobname.mtc| est aussi utilis� comme fichier de
+%       travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc1
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{D�tection des versions obsol�tes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@font}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and with which the \texttt{minitoc}
+% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some internal \LaTeX\ commands,
+% \verb|\@inputcheck| and \verb|\reset@font|.
+% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \Virage\emph{urgently} update your
+% \LaTeX\ installation, which is rusting since\ldots\ many years!
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code d�tecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues et avec lesquelles le paquetage
+% \texttt{minitoc} auront beaucoup de mal �~fonctionner. L'astuce est de d�tecter l'absence de certaines commandes
+% internes de \LaTeX, \verb|\@inputcheck| et \verb|\reset@font|. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous �tes
+% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \Virage\emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre �~jour votre installation de \LaTeX,
+% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'ann�es!
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}%
+  {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+     {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.\MessageBreak
+     Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{reset@font}%
+  {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+     {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.\MessageBreak
+     Trying to continue... crossing fingers}%
+  \let\reset@font\relax}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A macro to make a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Une macro pour faire une entr�e dans la table des mati�res sans points de conduite ni num�ros de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The (internal) macro \verb|\@undottedtocline| is a modified version of the standard command \verb|\@dottedtocline|.
+% It will be used in customization macros.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro (interne) \verb|\@undottedtocline| est une version modifi�e de la commande standard \verb|\@dottedtocline|.
+% Elle sera utilis�e dans les macros de personnalisation.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+  \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@
+  {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+   \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \leavevmode
+   \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}%
+   \hskip -\leftskip
+    #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak
+           \null\par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Default values for the page-number customization macros}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Valeurs par d�faut pour les macros de personnalisation des num�ros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or
+% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \index{memoir}\texttt{memoir} class~\cite{memoir} is loaded,
+% it does the job. So, we test first \texttt{\bs if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% to use the commands of \texttt{memoir} when they
+% are available.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette section d�finit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la pr�sence ou l'absence des num�ros de
+% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \index{memoir}\texttt{memoir}~\cite{memoir} est charg�e, elle
+% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \texttt{\bs if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de
+% \texttt{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entr�es dans les minitocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{section}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\nomtcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in secttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entr�es dans les secttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\nostcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entr�es dans les parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{chapter}
+  \cftpagenumberson{section}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\noptcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entr�es dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+  \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+  \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entr�es dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+  \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+  \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Else, \texttt{minitoc} will use its own commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Sinon, \texttt{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax}
+ \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null}
+ \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax}
+ \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null}
+ \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax}
+ \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null}
+ \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax}
+ \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null}
+ \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax}
+ \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax}
+ \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present:
+% \or\relax
+% Et enfin, les valeurs par d�faut sont �tablies; les num�ros de pages sont pr�sents:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ptcpagenumbers
+\plfpagenumbers
+\pltpagenumbers
+\mtcpagenumbers
+\mlfpagenumbers
+\mltpagenumbers
+\stcpagenumbers
+\slfpagenumbers
+\sltpagenumbers
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.85\textheight}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each kind of mini-table has three ``features'': a ``before'' feature, an ``after'' feature and a ``thispagestyle''
+% feature.
+%
+% A ``before'' feature is defined by a macro like \verb|\beforeparttoc| which contains code to be executed
+% before any mini-table of a given type: \verb|\beforeparttoc| is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features
+% contains only trivial commands like \verb|\clear[double]page|, or \verb|\empty|.
+%
+% An ``after'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type.
+%
+% A ``thispagestyle'' feature is defined by a macro like \verb|\thispagestyleparttoc| which contains code to define the page
+% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \verb|\thispagestyleparttoc| can be defined as
+% \verb|\thispagestyle{...}|. Usually, the ``thispagestyle'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables,
+% which use page breaks in their \verb|before| and \verb|after| features. For chapter- and section-level
+% mini-tables, the ``thispagestyle'' feature is usually defined as \verb|\empty|.
+%
+% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \verb|\chapter| command, as
+% \texttt{article}-like documents are different from the \texttt{book}- or \texttt{report}-like documents for the
+% layout of part-level mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% �~chaque type de mini-table sont associ�s trois �~dispositifs~� (\emph{features}): un dispositif �~before~�
+% (avant), un dispositif �~after~� (apr�s) et un dispositif �~thispagestyle~� (style de cette page).
+%
+% Un dispositif �~before~� est d�fini par une macro telle que \verb|\beforeparttoc| qui contient du code �~ex�cuter
+% avant toute mini-table d'un type donn�: \verb|\beforeparttoc| est ex�cut�e avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement,
+% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \verb|\clear[double]page| ou \verb|\empty|.
+%
+% Un dispositif �~after~� est analogue mais son code est ex�cut� apr�s chaque mini-table d'un type donn�.
+%
+% Un dispositif �~thispagestyle~� est d�fini par une macro comme \verb|\thispagestyleparttoc| qui contient du
+% code pour d�finir le style de page impliqu� par les mini-tables d'un type donn�: la commande \verb|\thispagestyleparttoc|
+% peut �tre d�finie comme �tant \verb|\thispagestyle{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif �~thispagestyle~� n'est
+% d�fini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs �~before~�
+% et �~after~�. Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif �~thispagestyle~� est
+% habituellement d�fini comme �tant \verb|\empty|.
+%
+% Nous �tablissons les valeurs par d�faut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la pr�sence de la commande
+% \verb|\chapter|, car les documents du genre \texttt{article} sont diff�rents des documents du genre \texttt{book}
+% ou \texttt{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``before'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif �~before~� (par d�faut):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \let\beforeparttoc\empty
+   \let\beforepartlof\empty
+   \let\beforepartlot\empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But if \verb|\chapter| is defined, they have a \verb|\cleardoublepage| as default ``before'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, elles ont \verb|\cleardoublepage| comme dispositif �~before~� par d�faut
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage
+    \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage
+    \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``before'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par d�faut), pas de dispositif �~before~�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeminitoc\empty
+\let\beforeminilof\empty
+\let\beforeminilot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level mini-tables have no ``before'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par d�faut), pas de dispositif �~before~�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforesecttoc\empty
+\let\beforesectlof\empty
+\let\beforesectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``after'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif �~after~� (par d�faut):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \let\afterparttoc\empty
+   \let\afterpartlof\empty
+   \let\afterpartlot\empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But if \verb|\chapter| is defined, they have a \verb|\cleardoublepage| as default ``after'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, elles ont \verb|\cleardoublepage| comme dispositif �~after~� par d�faut
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage
+    \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage
+    \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``after'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par d�faut, pas de dispositif �~after~�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\afterminitoc\empty
+\let\afterminilof\empty
+\let\afterminilot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level mini-tables have no ``after'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par d�faut, pas de dispositif �~after~�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\aftersecttoc\empty
+\let\aftersectlof\empty
+\let\aftersectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, all the ``thispagestyle'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style.
+% It affects only the first page of the mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, tous les dispositifs �~thispagestyle~� (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}.
+% Ceci affecte seulement la premi�re page de la mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
+\def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
+\def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
+\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \verb|\mtcsetfeature| macro which is
+% much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''.
+% \or\relax
+% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous d�finirons la macro \verb|\mtcsetfeature| qui est une
+% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les �~dispositifs~� des mini-tables.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tables des mati�res invisibles}\label{s+code+fake}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs,
+% you need to create the \texttt{.toc} file, without inserting it
+% into your document. This \verb|\faketableofcontents| command is a stripped off version
+% of the standard command \verb|\tableofcontents|. We define in the same way the commands \verb|\fakelistoffigures| and
+% \verb|\fakelistoftables|,
+% using in fact a stripped version \verb|\fake@starttoc| of \verb|\@starttoc|. But it is nice to reset to zero the
+% \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{mtc}, and \texttt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous
+% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des mati�res, mais avoir quand m�me des minitocs, il vous faut cr�er le
+% fichier \texttt{.toc}, sans l'ins�rer dans votre document. Cette commande
+% \verb|\faketableofcontents| est une version restreinte de la commande standard \verb|\tableofcontents|. Nous
+% d�finissons de la m�me mani�re les commandes \verb|\fakelistoffigures| et \verb|\fakelistoftables|, en utilisant
+% en fait une version restreinte \verb|\fake@starttoc| de \verb|\@starttoc|. Mais il est bon de remettre �~z�ro
+% maintenant les compteurs \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{mtc} et \texttt{stc}, s'ils sont d�finis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous
+% de l'inf�me erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}%
+    }
+\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}}
+\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}}
+\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+             \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname
+             \jobname.#1\relax
+  \fi
+  \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code utilise les m�mes descripteurs de fichier (en �criture) que les commandes d'origine.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \index{lofdepth}\texttt{lofdepth} and \index{lotdepth}\texttt{lotdepth} are defined,
+% we create the necessary new counters:
+% \index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth} and \index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth}.
+% These counters are initialized to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \index{lofdepth}\texttt{lofdepth} et \index{lotdepth}\texttt{lotdepth} sont d�finis, nous cr�ons
+% les nouveaux compteurs n�cessaires:
+% \index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth} et \index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialis�s �~2.
+% Ceci est fait apr�s le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% From here, we define the chapter-level commands.
+% \or\relax
+% �~partir d'ici, nous d�finissons les commandes au niveau chapitre.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots):
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous m�morisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilis�, mais\ldots):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+\global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Parties, chapitres et section �toil�s}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \verb|\part*|, \verb|\chapter*| and \verb|\section*|.
+% The section-level is different depending if \verb|\chapter| is defined or not. Eventually, a counter is incremented. A
+% contents line is added in the \texttt{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later,
+% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement �toil�es: \verb|\part*|, \verb|\chapter*|
+% et \verb|\section*|. Le niveau section est diff�rent selon que \verb|\chapter| est d�finie ou non. �ventuellement,
+% un compteur est incr�ment�. Une ligne de contenu est ajout�e dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}, avec la bonne
+% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addst@rred#1#2{%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}%
+  \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax
+      \stepcounter{ptc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax
+      \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
+%%      \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}%
+      \stepcounter{stc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is not defined, we just define \verb|\addstarredsection|:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie, nous d�finissons simplement \verb|\addstarredsection|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}|):
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% sinon, nous commen�ons �~d�finir le mat�riel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche �~sinon~� de
+% \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}|):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define now: the internal format of the \index{mtc}\texttt{mtc} counter (\verb|\The@mtc|), the obsolete command
+% \verb|\firstchapteris| (it just emits a harmless warning), the \texttt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0),
+% the \verb|\adjustmtc| command (increments \texttt{mtc}, by~1 by default),
+% the \verb|\decrementmtc| command (decrements \texttt{mtc} by~1),
+% the \verb|\incrementmtc| command (increments \texttt{mtc} by~1),
+% the format of the \texttt{mtc} counter (\verb|\themtc|),
+% the counter \index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc
+% (analog to the standard
+% \texttt{tocdepth} counter), the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\verb|\mtc@rule|), and we copy
+% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of
+% \verb|\mtcindent|, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via
+% \verb|\hrule| to stay in vertical mode for the final \verb|\kern|.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \index{mtc}\texttt{mtc} (\verb|\The@mtc|), la commande
+% obsol�te \verb|\firstchapteris| (elle ne fait d'�mettre un avertissement b�nin), le compteur \texttt{mtc} (initialis�
+% �~0), la commande \verb|\adjustmtc| (incr�mente \texttt{mtc}, de~1 par d�faut),
+% la commande \verb|\decrementmtc| (d�cr�mente \texttt{mtc} de~1),
+% la commande \verb|\incrementmtc| (incr�mente \texttt{mtc} de~1),
+% le format du compteur \texttt{mtc} (\verb|\themtc|),
+% le compteur \index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth}, initialis� �~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue
+% au compteur standard \texttt{tocdepth}), les filets horizontaux �~tracer avant et apr�s les minitocs
+% (\verb|\mtc@rule|), puis nous copions cette d�finition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de
+% mini-tables. Nous �tablissons aussi la valeur par d�faut (24pt) de \verb|\mtcindent|, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des
+% deux c�t�s). Les filets sont �pais de 0.4pt. Ils sont d�finis via \verb|\hrule| pour rester en mode vertical
+% pour le \verb|\kern| final.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}}
+\def\firstchapteris#1%
+  {\PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete command ***}%
+     \@firstchapteris@used@true}
+\newcounter{mtc}
+\setcounter{mtc}{0}
+\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}}
+\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
+\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}}
+\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}
+\newcounter{minitocdepth}
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2}
+\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}
+\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule
+\mtcindent=24\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \verb|\chapter| is
+% defined.
+% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \verb|\mtcsetfont| macro
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| macro later
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} compl�tes. Ces d�fintions sont effectives
+% si \verb|\chapter|
+% est d�finie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi d�finies ici. Voir aussi la macro \verb|\mtcsetfont|
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| plus loin
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}
+\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont
+\let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont
+\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont
+\let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont
+\let\mlffont\mtcfont
+\let\mltfont\mtcfont
+\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And \verb|\coffeefont| is used for ``coffee breaks'' in the \index{minutes}\texttt{minutes} package~\cite{minutes}.
+% \or\relax
+% Et \verb|\coffeefont| est utilis�e pour les �~pauses caf�~� dans le paquetage \texttt{minutes}~\cite{minutes}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center,
+% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified.
+% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \verb|\df@mtitc|, \verb|\df@mtilf| or
+% \verb|\df@mtilt|; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \verb|\do@mtitc|,
+% \verb|\do@mtilf| or \verb|\do@mtilt|. See the \verb|\minitoc@| macro later
+% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier �~gauche,
+% centrer, justifier �~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par d�faut, ces titres sont
+% justifi�s �~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et m�moris� dans \verb|\df@mtitc|,
+% \verb|\df@mtilf| ou \verb|\df@mtilt|; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rang� dans
+% \verb|\do@mtitc|, \verb|\do@mtilf| ou \verb|\do@mtilt|. Voir la macro \verb|\minitoc@| plus loin
+% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide n�cessite une correction verticale
+% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles:
+% \or\relax
+% Titres centr�s, justifi�s �~gauche, justifi�s �~droite ou vides:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Default: titles on left:
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sont justifi�s �~gauche:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
+\let\df@mtitc\l@mti
+\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
+\let\df@mtilf\l@mti
+\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
+\let\df@mtilt\l@mti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each minitoc is placed inside a \texttt{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
+% standard \texttt{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \verb|\mtc@verse| and \verb|\endmtc@verse|.
+% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \verb|\list{}| and set some
+% dimensions like \verb|\itemsep|, \verb|\itemindent|, \verb|\listparindent|, \verb|\topsep|.
+% \verb|\parsep| is set to zero if the \index{tight}\texttt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines).
+% Both margins are set to \verb|\mtcindent|. \verb|\endmtc@verse| terminates the list and discourages a page break.
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque minitoc est plac�e �~l'int�rieur d'un environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
+% �~l'environnement standard \texttt{verse} et donc il est d�fini �~l'aide de deux commandes: \verb|\mtc@verse| et
+% \verb|\endmtc@verse|. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous d�finissons d'abord (de mani�re locale) \verb|\\|,
+% puis nous appelons \verb|\list{}| et �tablissons quelques dimensions telles que \verb|\itemsep|, \verb|\itemindent|,
+% \verb|\listparindent|, \verb|\topsep|. \verb|\parsep| est forc�e �~z�ro si l'option \index{tight}\texttt{tight}
+% est active (pour r�duire l'espacement des lignes). Les deux marges sont �tablies �~\verb|\mtcindent|.
+% \verb|\endmtc@verse| termine  la liste et d�courage une coupure de page.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@
+  \itemindent \z@
+  \listparindent \itemindent
+  \partopsep\z@
+  \iftightmtc \parsep\z@ \fi
+  \ifktightmtc \parskip\z@ \fi
+  \topsep=1ex
+  \leftmargin\mtcindent
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs minilof}, and \texttt{\bs minilot} commands}
+% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs minilof} et \texttt{\bs minilot}}
+% Ces trois commandes sont tr�s similaires, avec seulement des diff�rences de d�tail.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\minitoc| command must be used after \verb|\chapter| if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\minitoc| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\chapter| si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de
+% minitoc automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \verb|\dominitoc| command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \verb|\dominitoc| has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \verb|\minitoc|. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \verb|\dominitoc| command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \verb|\dominitoc|, or locally via the optional argument of \verb|\minitoc|.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par d�faut �ventuellement �t� �tablie plus t�t par
+% une commande \verb|\dominitoc|. La lettre~�~\texttt{d}~� repr�sente cette valeur par d�faut. \verb|\dominitoc| a elle-m�me
+% un argument optionnel qui �tablit la valeur par d�faut de l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minitoc|. La valeur par
+% d�faut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \verb|\dominitoc| est~�~\texttt{l}~�. Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple �~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par d�faut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut �tre alt�r� globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dominitoc|, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minitoc|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \verb|\minitoc| with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \verb|\minitoc@| macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \verb|\@ifnextchar| trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous d�finissons \verb|\minitoc| avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par d�faut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro the \verb|\minitoc@| (qui a un argument d�limit�); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \verb|\@ifnextchar| pour d�tecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \verb|\minitoc| is in \verb|\minitoc@|, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le v�ritable code de \verb|\minitoc| est dans \verb|\minitoc@|, qui a un argument obligatoire (d�limit� par les
+% crochets) sp�cifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \verb|\@minitoc@used@true| to note that \verb|\minitoc| has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% D'abord, nous �tablissons l'indicateur global \verb|\@minitoc@used@true| pour noter que \verb|\minitoc| a �t�
+% appel�e (ceci sera utilis� par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minitoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@minitoc@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \verb|\jobname| and a
+% suffix \verb|\@tocfile|, which is \index{mtc}\texttt{mtc} (long extensions) or~\index{M}\texttt{M} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit �~partir de \verb|\jobname| et d'un suffixe \verb|\@tocfile|,
+% qui est \index{mtc}\texttt{mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\index{M}\texttt{M} (suffixes courts) suivi du num�ro absolu
+% de la minitoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@longextensions@
+\def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we test (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that and empty minitoc has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) la vacuit� de ce fichier. Un avertissement est �mis si le fichier est
+% vide et un indicateur est �tabli (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide a �t� demand�e).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\thispageminitocstyle| to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\thispageminitocstyle| pour �tablir le style de page (par d�faut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% d�faut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas trait�es, car habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminitocstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\mtctitle}}{\uppercase{\mtctitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\beforeminitoc|,
+% then begin a \texttt{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\verb|\mtifont|),
+% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page
+% break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \verb|\mtcfont|.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\beforeminitoc|, puis commen�ons un environnement \texttt{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% d�courager les coupures de page �~l'int�rieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrig�e. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\verb|\mtifont|), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minitoc (si les filets sont pr�sents), en utilisant un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher une
+% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est �tablie �~\verb|\mtcfont|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminitoc
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\mtcfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent %%
+        \ifx\mtc@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \texttt{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page apr�s le titre et le filet sup�rieur, puis �tablissons quelques param�tres
+% de mise en page et commen�ons un environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent
+        \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) to the required depth (\verb|\c@minitocdepth|),
+% so the printing is done inside the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, where \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth}
+% has been forced to \index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough.
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous for�ons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) �~la profondeur demand�e
+% (\verb|\c@minitocdepth|), dons l'impression est faite �~l'int�rieur de l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, o�
+% \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth} a �t� forc�e �~\index{minitocdepth}\texttt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entr�es dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est n�cessaire
+% pour �viter une indentation n�gative parasite.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file.
+% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \texttt{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| and the macro
+% \verb|\mtc@setform| which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence de points de conduite et de num�ros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en ins�rant le
+% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demand�e par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| et la macro \verb|\mtc@setform| qui ajuste certains param�tres de mise en page
+% (d�finis par l'utilisateur via \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines red�finitions de macros restent locales.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mtc@setform%
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \texttt{samepage} environment, and call \verb|\afterminitoc|. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inf�rieur (tout en �vitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \texttt{samepage}, et enfin appelons \verb|\afterminitoc|. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kern0.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule
+        \end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous d�finissons le filet inf�rieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@bottom@rule{%
+  \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else
+      \vskip -2.5ex
+        \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{\bs minilof} command is very similar to the \texttt{\bs minitoc} command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \texttt{\bs minilof} est tr�s similaire �~la commande \texttt{\bs minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\minilof| command must be used after \verb|\chapter| if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\minilof| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\chapter| si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de
+% minilof automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \verb|\dominilof| command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \verb|\dominilof| has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \verb|\minilof|. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \verb|\dominilof| command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \verb|\dominilof|, or locally via the optional argument of \verb|\minilof|.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par d�faut �ventuellement �t� �tablie plus t�t par
+% une commande \verb|\dominilof|. La lettre~�~\texttt{d}~� repr�sente cette valeur par d�faut. \verb|\dominilof| a elle-m�me
+% un argument optionnel qui �tablit la valeur par d�faut de l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minilof|. La valeur par
+% d�faut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \verb|\dominilof| est~�~\texttt{l}~�. Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple �~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par d�faut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut �tre alt�r� globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dominilof|, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minilof|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \verb|\minilof| with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \verb|\minilof@| macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \verb|\@ifnextchar| trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous d�finissons \verb|\minilof| avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par d�faut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro the \verb|\minilof@| (qui a un argument d�limit�); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \verb|\@ifnextchar| pour d�tecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \verb|\minilof| is in \verb|\minilof@|, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le v�ritable code de \verb|\minilof| est dans \verb|\minilof@|, qui a un argument obligatoire (d�limit� par les
+% crochets) sp�cifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \verb|\@minilof@used@true| to note that \verb|\minilof| has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% D'abord, nous �tablissons l'indicateur global \verb|\@minilof@used@true| pour noter que \verb|\minilof| a �t�
+% appel�e (ceci sera utilis� par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilof@[#1]{%
+\global\@minilof@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \verb|\jobname| and a
+% suffix \verb|\@tocfile|, which is \index{mlf}\texttt{mlf} (long extensions) or~\index{F}\texttt{F} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minilof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit �~partir de \verb|\jobname| et d'un suffixe \verb|\@tocfile|,
+% qui est \index{mlf}\texttt{mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\index{F}\texttt{F} (suffixes courts) suivi du num�ro absolu
+% de la minilof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we test (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that and empty minilof has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) la vacuit� de ce fichier. Un avertissement est �mis si le fichier est
+% vide et un indicateur est �tabli (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof vide a �t� demand�e).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minilof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\thispageminilofstyle| to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\thispageminilofstyle| pour �tablir le style de page (par d�faut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% d�faut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas trait�es, car habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminilofstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\mlftitle}}{\uppercase{\mlftitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\beforeminilof|,
+% then begin a \texttt{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\verb|\mtifont|),
+% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit
+% a page break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \verb|\mlffont|.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\beforeminilof|, puis commen�ons un environnement \texttt{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% d�courager les coupures de page �~l'int�rieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrig�e. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\verb|\mtifont|), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minilof (si les filets sont pr�sents), en utilisant un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est �tablie �~\verb|\mlffont|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminilof
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@
+        \reset@font\mlffont
+        \parindent=\z@
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\mlf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \texttt{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page apr�s le titre et le filet sup�rieur, puis �tablissons quelques param�tres
+% de mise en page et commen�ons un environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent
+        \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) to the required depth (\verb|\c@minilofdepth|),
+% so the printing is done inside the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, where \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth}
+% has been forced to \index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough.
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous for�ons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) �~la profondeur demand�e
+% (\verb|\c@minitocdepth|), dons l'impression est faite �~l'int�rieur de l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, o�
+% \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth} a �t� forc�e �~\index{minilofdepth}\texttt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entr�es dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est n�cessaire
+% pour �viter une indentation n�gative parasite.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@minilofdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file.
+% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \texttt{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| and the macro
+% \verb|\mlf@setform| which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence de points de conduite et de num�ros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en ins�rant le
+% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demand�e par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| et la macro \verb|\mlf@setform| qui ajuste certains param�tres de mise en page
+% (d�finis par l'utilisateur via \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines red�finitions de macros restent locales.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mlf@setform
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \texttt{samepage} environment, and call \verb|\afterminilof|. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inf�rieur (tout en �vitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \texttt{samepage}, et enfin appelons \verb|\afterminilof|. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{\bs minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \texttt{\bs minilof} command:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \texttt{\bs minilot} est absolument similaire �~la commande \texttt{\bs minilof}:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\minilot| command must be used after \verb|\chapter| if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\minilot| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\chapter| si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de
+% minilot automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \verb|\dominilot| command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \verb|\dominilot| has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \verb|\minilot|. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \verb|\dominilot| command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \verb|\dominilot|, or locally via the optional argument of \verb|\minilot|.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par d�faut �ventuellement �t� �tablie plus t�t par
+% une commande \verb|\dominilot|. La lettre~�~\texttt{d}~� repr�sente cette valeur par d�faut. \verb|\dominilot| a elle-m�me
+% un argument optionnel qui �tablit la valeur par d�faut de l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minilot|. La valeur par
+% d�faut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \verb|\dominilot| est~�~\texttt{l}~�. Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple �~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par d�faut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut �tre alt�r� globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dominilot|, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \verb|\minilot|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \verb|\minilot| with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \verb|\minilot@| macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \verb|\@ifnextchar| trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous d�finissons \verb|\minilot| avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par d�faut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro the \verb|\minilot@| (qui a un argument d�limit�); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \verb|\@ifnextchar| pour d�tecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \verb|\minilot| is in \verb|\minilot@|, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le v�ritable code de \verb|\minilot| est dans \verb|\minilot@|, qui a un argument obligatoire (d�limit� par les
+% crochets) sp�cifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \verb|\@minilot@used@true| to note that \verb|\minilot| has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% D'abord, nous �tablissons l'indicateur global \verb|\@minilot@used@true| pour noter que \verb|\minilot| a �t�
+% appel�e (ceci sera utilis� par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilot@[#1]{%
+\global\@minilot@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \verb|\jobname| and a
+% suffix \verb|\@tocfile|, which is \index{mlt}\texttt{mlt} (long extensions) or~\index{T}\texttt{T} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minilot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit �~partir de \verb|\jobname| et d'un suffixe \verb|\@tocfile|,
+% qui est \index{mlt}\texttt{mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\index{T}\texttt{T} (suffixes courts) suivi du num�ro absolu
+% de la minilot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we test (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that and empty minilot has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons (via \verb|\mtc@CkFile|) la vacuit� de ce fichier. Un avertissement est �mis si le fichier est
+% vide et un indicateur est �tabli (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a �t� demand�e).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minilot@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\thispageminilotstyle| to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\thispageminilotstyle| pour �tablir le style de page (par d�faut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% d�faut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas trait�es, car habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminilotstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\mlttitle}}{\uppercase{\mlttitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \verb|\beforeminilot|,
+% then begin a \texttt{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\verb|\mtifont|),
+% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \texttt{tabular} environment
+% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \verb|\mltfont|.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \verb|\beforeminilot|, puis commen�ons un environnement \texttt{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% d�courager les coupures de page �~l'int�rieur d'une minilot) et exminons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrig�e. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\verb|\mtifont|), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minilot (si les filets sont pr�sents), en utilisant un environnement \texttt{tabular}
+% (pour emp�cher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est �tablie �~\verb|\mltfont|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminilot
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\mltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\mlt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \texttt{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page apr�s le titre et le filet sup�rieur, puis �tablissons quelques param�tres
+% de mise en page et commen�ons un environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent
+        \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) to the required depth (\verb|\c@minilotdepth|),
+% so the printing is done inside the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, where \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth}
+% has been forced to \index{minilotdepth}\texttt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough.
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous for�ons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\verb|\c@tocdepth|) �~la profondeur demand�e
+% (\verb|\c@minitocdepth|), dons l'impression est faite �~l'int�rieur de l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, o�
+% \index{tocdepth}\texttt{tocdepth} a �t� forc�e �~\index{minilotdepth}\texttt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entr�es dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est n�cessaire
+% pour �viter une indentation n�gative parasite.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@minilotdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file.
+% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \texttt{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| and the macro
+% \verb|\mlt@setform| which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence de points de conduite et de num�ros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en ins�rant le
+% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demand�e par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \verb|\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile| et la macro \verb|\mlt@setform| qui ajuste certains param�tres de mise en page
+% (d�finis par l'utilisateur via \verb|\mtcsetformat|).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines red�finitions de macros restent locales.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mlt@setform
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \texttt{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \texttt{samepage} environment, and call \verb|\afterminilot|. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inf�rieur (tout en �vitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \texttt{samepage}, et enfin appelons \verb|\afterminilot|. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs chapter} command, \mbox{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \texttt{\bs chapter}, \mbox{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we define \verb|\l@xchapter| which is like \verb|\l@chapter|, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its
+% printing (except if you cheat):
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�finissons \verb|\l@xchapter| qui est semblable �~\verb|\l@chapter|, mais avec une profondeur
+% tr�s grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}}
+\def\xchapter{xchapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch \verb|\@chapter| (the non-starred branch of \verb|\chapter|)
+% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by
+% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions \verb|\@chapter| (la branche non �toil�e de \verb|\chapter|) pour ajouter des entr�es de
+% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entr�es seront utilis�es par les
+% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour d�couper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@chapter\@chapter
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax%
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}%
+   \ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We also patch \verb|\@schapter| (the starred branch of \verb|\chapter|)
+% to add marks in the TOC to delimit
+% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as
+% they are defined as \verb|\relax|, they should not perturbate other packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions aussi \verb|\@schapter| (la branche �toil�e de \verb|\chapter|) pour ajouter des marques dans la
+% table des mati�res afin de d�limiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilis�es par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX|
+% pour pr�lever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont d�finies comme
+% �tant \verb|\relax|, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter
+\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter}
+\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter}
+\let\chapterbegin\relax
+\let\chapterend\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \texttt{\bs addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the command \verb|\chapter| is undefined, we define the command \verb|\addstarredsection|
+% (only if \verb|\section| is defined). If the command \verb|\chapter| is defined, we define the command
+% \verb|\addstarredchapter|. If the command \verb|\part| is defined, we define the command \verb|\addstarredpart|.
+% We use the utility command \verb|\addst@rred| defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie, alors nous devons d�finir la commande \verb|\addstarredsection| (mais
+% seulement si \verb|\section| est d�finie). Si la commande \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, nous d�finissons la
+% commande \verb|\addstarredchapter|. Si la commande \verb|\part| est d�finie, nous d�finissons la commande
+% \verb|\addstarredpart|. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \verb|\addst@rred| d�finie dans la
+% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\@ifundefined{section}%
+      {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}%
+   {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}}
+\@ifundefined{part}%
+   {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Entr�es de table des mati�res sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro
+% \verb|\@Undottedtocline| prints no page number, but \verb|\@Undottedtoclinep| prints~it.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entr�es de table des mati�res sans points de
+% conduite. La macro \verb|\@Undottedtocline| n'imprime pas de num�ro de page, mais \verb|\@Undottedtoclinep|
+% l'imprime.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+    \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+    {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+     \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \@tempdima #3\relax
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak
+     \nobreak\null
+     \par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The same but with the page number:
+% \or\relax
+% La m�me chose, mais avec le num�ro de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+    \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+    {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+     \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \@tempdima #3\relax
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {#4}\nobreak
+        \hfill
+     \nobreak\null
+     \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}%
+     \par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code creates the flag, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part).
+% We alter the commands \verb|\minitoc@|, \verb|\minilof@|, etc., to test the flag \texttt{\bs ifundottedmtc} and,
+% if true, replace locally \verb|\@dottedtocline| by its dotless version \verb|\@Undottedtoclinep|. Of course,
+% we must also test the availability of the \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\part| and \verb|\section| commands, to avoid to
+% define many unnecessary commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code cr�e l'indicateur, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions
+% les commandes \verb|\minitoc@|, \verb|\minilof@|, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \texttt{\bs ifundottedmtc} et, s'il
+% est vrai, remplacer localement \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa version sans points de conduite \verb|\@Undottedtoclinep|.
+% Bien s�r, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilit� des commandes \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\part| et \verb|\section|,
+% pour �viter de d�finir de nombreuses commandes non n�cessaires.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+   \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@
+   \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@
+   \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minilof@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@
+   \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minilot@[#1]}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the part level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+   \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@
+   \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@
+   \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@partlof@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@
+   \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@partlot@[#1]}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{%
+      \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@
+      \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}%
+      \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@
+      \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}%
+      \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@
+      \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \texttt{\bs dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The three commands \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof| and \verb|\dominilot| are, of course, very similar.
+% They take the \verb|\jobname.toc| file (resp. the \verb|\jobname.lof| and \verb|\jobname.lot| files)
+% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and
+% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \verb|\jobname.mtc|\meta{N} files
+% (resp. the \verb|\jobname.mlf|\meta{N} and \verb|\jobname.mlt|\meta{N} files), using specific
+% lines in the \verb|\jobname.toc| (resp. \verb|\jobname.lof| and \verb|\jobname.lot|) file. These lines are
+% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \verb|\contentsline{chapter}...|, \verb|\contentsline{xchapter}...|,
+% \verb|\contentsline{starchapter}...|, \verb|\chapbegin| delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the
+% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% Les trois commandes \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dominilof| et \verb|\dominilot| sont, bien s�r, tr�s similaires.
+% Elles prennent le fichier \verb|\jobname.toc| (respectivement les fichiers \verb|\jobname.lof| et \verb|\jobname.lot|)
+% produit par l'ex�cution pr�c�dente de \LaTeX\ et l'�clatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre
+% �toil�) vers les fichiers \verb|\jobname.mtc|\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \verb|\jobname.mlf|\meta{N} et
+% \verb|\jobname.mlt|\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes sp�cifiques dans le fichier \verb|\jobname.toc|
+% (respectivement, \verb|\jobname.lof| et \verb|\jobname.lot|). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour
+% des entr�es au niveau chapitre (telles que \verb|\contentsline{chapter}...|, \verb|\contentsline{xchapter}...|,
+% \verb|\contentsline{starchapter}...|, \verb|\chapbegin| d�limitant les chapitres dans la table des mati�res (ou
+% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie d�limitent les
+% parties, donc aussi les chapitres.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As \verb|\dominitoc| has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \verb|\dominitoc@|
+% with a argument delimited by brackets.
+%
+% The macros are \verb|\dominitoc| (user interface), which calls \verb|\dominitoc@[l]| (or with the optional argument
+% of \verb|\dominitoc|).
+% Then \verb|\dominitoc@[l]| processes its argument and calls \verb|\@@dominitoc|.
+% \verb|\@@dominitoc| calls \verb|\@dominitoc| (passing \verb|\jobname| as argument) then close the minitoc file
+% written. \verb|\@dominitoc| reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where
+% \verb|#1| is the value of \verb|\jobname|, then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to
+% \verb|\dominitoc@| (\emph{i.e.}~to \verb|dominitoc|) sets the flag \verb|\@dominitoc@used@true|. This will be used later
+% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \verb|\minitoc| \emph{after} \verb|\dominitoc| and that both
+% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
+% The code is similar for \verb|\dominilof| and \verb|\dominilot|.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque \verb|\dominitoc| a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par d�faut est~�~\texttt{l}~� (gauche), elle
+% appelle  \verb|\dominitoc@| avec un argument d�limit� par des crochets.
+%
+% Les macros sont \verb|\dominitoc| (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \verb|\dominitoc@[l]| (ou avec l'argument
+% optionnel de \verb|\dominitoc|). Puis \verb|\dominitoc@[l]| traite son argument et appelle \verb|\@@dominitoc|.
+% \verb|\@@dominitoc| appelle \verb|\@dominitoc| (en passant \verb|\jobname| comme argument) puis ferme le fichier
+% minitoc �crit. \verb|\@dominitoc| remet �~z�ro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (o�
+% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \verb|\jobname|, puis remet encore �~z�ro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel
+% �~\verb|\dominitoc@| (c'est-�-dire, �~\verb|dominitoc|) �tablit l'indicateur \verb|\@dominitoc@used@true|. Ceci
+% sera utilis� plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui d�tecte si vous avez appel� correctement \verb|\minitoc|
+% \emph{apr�s} \verb|\dominitoc| et que les deux ont �t� appel�es). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
+% Le code est similaire pour \verb|\dominilof| et \verb|\dominilot|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dominitoc| command extracts information from the \texttt{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dominitoc| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.toc} et cr�e les fichiers minitocs,
+% avec le suffixe ad�quat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominitoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dominilof| command extracts information from the \texttt{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dominilof| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lof} et cr�e les fichiers minilofs,
+% avec le suffixe ad�quat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominilof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dominilot| command extracts information from the \texttt{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dominilot| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lot} et cr�e les fichiers minilots,
+% avec le suffixe ad�quat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominilot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title:
+% \or\relax
+% Un peu de code pour noter que la commande a �t� utilis�e et g�rer la position du titre de la minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominitoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@dominitoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title:
+% \or\relax
+% Un peu de code pour noter que la commande a �t� utilis�e et g�rer la position du titre de la minilof:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominilof@[#1]{%
+\global\@dominilof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominilof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title:
+% \or\relax
+% Un peu de code pour noter que la commande a �t� utilis�e et g�rer la position du titre de la minilot:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominilot@[#1]{%
+\global\@dominilot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominilot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour cr�er le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le
+% descripteur de fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et �clatement du fichier table des mati�res}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the
+% \texttt{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David}{Carlisle}, with his permission. The strings ``\texttt{HO}'',
+% ``\texttt{DV}'', and ``\texttt{BJ}'' in the comments denote modifications made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \texttt{hyperref}, essentially by adding an
+% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait gr�ce �~une boucle g�r�e par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est d�riv� du paquetage
+% \texttt{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission. Les cha�nes <<~\texttt{HO}~>>,
+% <<~\texttt{DV}~>> et <<~\texttt{BJ}~>> dans les commentaires indiquent des modifications faites par
+% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \texttt{hyperref},
+% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument �~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de
+% contenu.}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retire de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MTC@list{#2}%
+  \MTC@loop{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@toc{%
+  \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\MTC@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\chapter| is found, the \texttt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute)
+% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MTC@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des mati�res et d�tecte les
+% mots-cl�s int�ressants. Si \verb|\chapter| est trouv�e, le compteur \texttt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de
+% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier minitoc est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO/BJ: 4 instead of 3 parameters
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after
+% closing the file descriptor):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% l'ouvrir (apr�s avoir ferm� le descripteur de fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \verb|\mtc@toks| is used as a verbatim memory.
+% \or\relax
+% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} �tant utilis� comme m�moire % \emph{verbatim}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standatd
+% sectionning commands, below \verb|\chapter|:
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque ligne de contenu int�ressante est copi�e, avec une commande de fonte ajout�e devant
+% elle. Nous commen�ons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \verb|\chapter|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A coffee break contents line is written for \verb|\coffee|:
+% \or\relax
+% Une ligne de contenu de pause-caf� est �crite pour \verb|\coffee|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If it is \verb|\starchapter| (for a starred chapter), we increment the \texttt{mtc} counter,
+% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si c'est \verb|\starchapter| (pour un chapitre �toil�), nous incr�mentons le compteur \texttt{mtc},
+% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le r�-ouvrons avec ce
+% nouveau fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \if@longextensions@
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For starred sectionning commands lower than \verb|\chapter|, a contents line is written into the minitoc file,
+% with a font command added:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les commandes de sectionnement �toil�es plus basses que \verb|\chapter|, une ligne de contenu est �crite
+% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \verb|\MTC@next| to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des mati�res; elle expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle
+% \verb|\MTC@next| pour traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entr�es int�ressantes. Sinon, on traite
+% l'entr�e suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.\MessageBreak MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MTC@toc
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MTC@read
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\MTC@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La s�rie de points \verb|.....| garantit que \verb|\MTC@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@% %%HO: . added
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\MTC@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MTC@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier table des mati�res,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les chapitres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%HO/BJ: now patch \MTC@test,
+%%HO/BJ: call \MTC@contentsline with 4 instead of 3 parameters
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e int�ressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \verb|\@input|, le fichier est ajout� �~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignor�e. Nous recommen�ons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    %%HO/BJ: 4. parameter added by Tony Roberts
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+    \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \expandafter\MTC@toc
+  \else
+    \expandafter\MTC@read
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
+% \or\relax
+% Le code est similaire �~celui pour les mini-tables des mati�res, mais avec moins de commandes �~reconna�tre.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et �clatement du fichier liste des figures}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait gr�ce �~une boucle g�r�e par les macros suivantes:
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retire de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MLF@list{#2}%
+  \MLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Checks if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\MLF@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\xchapter| is found, \texttt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MLF@contentsline| analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et d�tecte les mots-cl�s
+% int�ressants. Si \verb|\xchapter| est trouv�e, \texttt{mtc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier minilof est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: added #4
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the minilof file is build from \texttt{\bs jobname} and a long or short extension:
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \texttt{\bs jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble}
+      \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble}
+      \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If we found a \texttt{\bs figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file:
+% \or\relax
+% Si nous trouvons une entr�e \texttt{\bs figure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \texttt{\bs MLF@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle
+% \texttt{\bs MLF@next} pour traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And now, we scan the \texttt{.lof} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Et maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \texttt{.lof}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.\MessageBreak MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MLF@lof
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry in the \texttt{.lof} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lof}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\MLF@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La s�rie de points \verb|.....| garantit que \verb|\MLF@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\MLF@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MLF@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les chapitres.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e int�ressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \verb|\@input|, le fichier est ajout� �~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignor�e. Nous recommen�ons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
+% \or\relax
+% Le code est similaire �~celui pour les mini-tables des mati�res, mais avec moins de commandes �~reconna�tre.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et �clatement du fichier liste des tableaux}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait gr�ce �~une boucle g�r�e par les macros suivantes:
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retire de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MLT@list{#2}%
+  \MLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Checks if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\MLT@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\xchapter| is found, \texttt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MLT@contentsline| analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et d�tecte les mots-cl�s
+% int�ressants. Si \verb|\xchapter| est trouv�e, \texttt{mtc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier minilot est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: added #4
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the minilot file is build from \texttt{\bs jobname} and a long or short extension:
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \texttt{\bs jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If we found a \texttt{\bs table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file:
+% \or\relax
+% Si nous trouvons une entr�e \texttt{\bs table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \texttt{\bs MLT@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle
+% \texttt{\bs MLT@next} pour traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And now, we scan the \texttt{.lot} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Et maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \texttt{.lot}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.\MessageBreak MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MLT@lot
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry in the \texttt{.lot} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lot}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\MLT@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La s�rie de points \verb|.....| garantit que \verb|\MLT@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\MLT@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MLT@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les chapitres.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e int�ressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \verb|\@input|, le fichier est ajout� �~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignor�e. Nous recommen�ons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a
+% \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}| alternative).
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la
+% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}|).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macro pour �crire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline| macro makes the definition of \verb|\MTC@contentsline| shorter. An extra \verb|\edef|
+% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline| rend la d�finition de \verb|\MTC@contentsline| plus courte. Un niveau
+% suppl�mentaire de \verb|\edef| est retir� (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The arguments of \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline| are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \verb|\csname #2font\endcsname|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \verb|\MTC@contentsline| (hyperlink).
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Les arguments de \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline| sont:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \verb|\csname #2font\endcsname|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \verb|\MTC@contentsline| (hyperlien).
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@dot{.}
+\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \def\mtc@param{#4}%
+   \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
+    {\string\reset@font
+     \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
+     \string\mtc@string
+     \string\contentsline{#1}%
+     {\the\mtc@toks}%
+     {\string\reset@font
+      \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
+      \space #3%
+     }%
+     \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param
+     \else
+       {#4}% %%HO/BJ: #4 is hyperlink
+     \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the same for a ``coffee'' line. The arguments of \verb|\MTC@WriteCoffeeline| are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \verb|\MTC@contentsline|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Et la m�me chose pour une ligne de �~pause caf�~�. Les arguments de \verb|\MTC@WriteCoffeeline| sont:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \verb|\MTC@contentsline|;
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \verb|\MTC@contentsline|.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{%
+  \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
+    {\string\reset@font
+     \string\coffeefont
+     \string\mtc@string
+%% COFFEE \string\textbf{#1}%
+     {\the\mtc@toks}%
+     {\string\reset@font
+      \string\coffeefont
+      \space #3%
+     }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \texttt{lofdepth} and \texttt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters:
+% \index{partlofdepth}\texttt{partlofdepth} and \index{partlotdepth}\texttt{partlotdepth}.
+% These counters are initialised to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \texttt{lofdepth} et \texttt{lotdepth} sont d�finis, nous cr�ons les nouveaux compteurs
+% correspondants: \index{partlofdepth}\texttt{partlofdepth} et \index{partlotdepth}\texttt{partlotdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialis�s �~2.
+% Ceci est fait apr�s le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\part| is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter \index{ptc}(\texttt{ptc})
+% for the parttocs and related commands (\verb|\theptc|, \verb|\Thepart|, \verb|\adjustptc|, \verb|\decrementptc|,
+% \verb|\incrementptc|), the
+% obsolete command \verb|\firstpartis|, and the depth counter \index{parttocdepth}\texttt{parttocdepth}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\part| est d�finie, nous d�finissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur \index{ptc}(\texttt{ptc})
+% pour les parttocs et les commandes associ�es (\verb|\theptc|, \verb|\Thepart|, \verb|\adjustptc|,
+% \verb|\decrementptc|, \verb|\incrementptc|), la commande
+% obsol�te \verb|\firstpartis| et le compteur de profondeur \index{parttocdepth}\texttt{parttocdepth}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}%
+{%
+\def\xpart{xpart}
+\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}}
+\def\firstpartis#1%
+  {\PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete command ***}%
+     \@firstpartis@used@true}
+\newcounter{ptc}
+\setcounter{ptc}{0}
+\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}}
+\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
+\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}}
+\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}}
+\newcounter{parttocdepth}
+\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \verb|\chapter| defined?), to
+% have a different layout: the definition of \verb|\ptc@rule| is empty except if \verb|\chapter| is undefined.
+% By default, there is no rule before/after  parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare
+% \verb|\ptc@rule| if you want these rules.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une diff�rence entre les classes \texttt{book/report} et \texttt{article}
+% (\verb|\chapter| est-elle d�finie?), pour avoir une pr�sentation diff�rente: la d�finition de \verb|\ptc@rule| est
+% vide sauf si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie. Par d�faut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et apr�s les  parttocs,
+% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez red�clarer \verb|\ptc@rule| si vous voulez ces filets.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}%
+   {\let\ptc@rule\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous d�clarons l'indentation (des deux c�t�s) par d�faut des parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\ptcindent
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \verb|\chapter| is defined (\texttt{book/report}-like
+% document classes) than when it is not (\texttt{article}-like document classes):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie
+% (classes de document analogues �~\texttt{book/report} que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de document
+% analogues �~\texttt{article}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
+   \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections)
+   \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)
+   \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)
+   \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)
+   \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+   \let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)
+   \let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)
+   \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is defined, the fonts are larger and \verb|\ptcCfont| must be defined:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \verb|\ptcCfont| doit �tre d�finie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+   \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
+   \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters)
+   \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections)
+   \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)
+   \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)
+   \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)
+   \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+   \let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)
+   \let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)
+   \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Titres par d�faut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\verb|\parttoc|,
+% \verb|\partlof| and \verb|\partlot|). This formating is different if \verb|\chapter| is undefined or defined.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons la position par d�faut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau
+% partie (\verb|\parttoc|, \verb|\partlof| et \verb|\partlot|). Cette mise en page est diff�rentes selon que
+% \verb|\chapter| est non d�finie ou d�finie.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for
+% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles.
+% Empty titles need a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie, les d�finitions sont tr�s simples, pour des titres centr�s, cadr�s
+% �~gauche, cadr�s �~droite, ou vides.
+% Les titres vides ont besoin d'une correction verticale (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+\def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+\def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+\def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But, if \verb|\chapter| is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex.
+% Empty titles need a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais, si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une t�te de chapitre, qui est plus
+% complexe.
+% Les titres vides ont besoin d'une correction verticale (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre cadr� �~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn
+    \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]%
+    \else
+    \@makephead@l{#1}%
+    \@afterheading
+    \fi}
+\def\@makephead@l#1{%
+    \vspace*{50\p@}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+     \ptifont
+     #1\par
+     \nobreak
+     \vskip 40\p@
+    }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre cadr� �~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn
+    \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}]%
+    \else
+    \@makephead@r{#1}%
+    \@afterheading
+    \fi}
+\def\@makephead@r#1{%
+    \vspace*{50\p@}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft
+     \ptifont
+     #1\par
+     \nobreak
+     \vskip 40\p@
+    }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre centr�, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn
+    \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]%
+    \else
+    \@makephead@c{#1}%
+    \@afterheading
+    \fi}
+\def\@makephead@c#1{%
+    \vspace*{50\p@}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \centering
+     \ptifont
+     #1\par
+     \nobreak
+     \vskip 40\p@
+    }}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on left:
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sont �~gauche:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@ptitc\l@pti
+\let\df@ptitc\l@pti
+\let\do@ptilf\l@pti
+\let\df@ptilf\l@pti
+\let\do@ptilt\l@pti
+\let\df@ptilt\l@pti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each parttoc is placed inside a \texttt{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
+% standard \texttt{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \texttt{\bs ptc@verse} and
+% \texttt{\bs endptc@verse}.
+% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \texttt{\bs list\{\}} and
+% set some dimensions like \texttt{\bs itemsep}, \texttt{\bs itemindent}, \texttt{\bs listparindent},
+% \texttt{\bs itemindent}, \texttt{\bs partopsep}, \texttt{\bs topsep}.
+% \texttt{\bs parsep} is set to zero if
+% the \index{tight}\texttt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
+% \texttt{\bs parskip} is set to zero if
+% the \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
+% Both margins are set to \texttt{\bs ptcindent}. \texttt{\bs endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages
+% a page break.
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque parttoc est plac�e �~l'int�rieur d'un environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
+% �~l'environnement standard \texttt{verse} est est donc d�fini �~l'aide de deux commandes:
+% \texttt{\bs ptc@verse} et \texttt{\bs endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous d�finissons d'abord
+% (de mani�re locale)~ \texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \texttt{\bs list\{\}} et �tablissons quelques dimensions
+% telles que \texttt{\bs itemsep}, \texttt{\bs itemindent}, \texttt{\bs listparindent}, \texttt{\bs itemindent},
+% \texttt{\bs partopsep}, \texttt{\bs topsep}.
+% \texttt{\bs parsep} est forc�e �~z�ro si
+% l'option \index{tight}\texttt{tight} est active (ceci r�duit l'espacement entre les lignes).
+% \texttt{\bs parskip} est forc�e �~z�ro si
+% l'option \index{k-tight}\texttt{k-tight} est active (ceci r�duit l'espacement entre les lignes).
+% Les deux marges sont
+% forc�es �~\texttt{\bs ptcindent}. \texttt{\bs endptc@verse} termine la liste et d�courage une coupure de page.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@
+          \itemindent \z@
+          \listparindent \itemindent
+          \partopsep\z@
+          \iftightmtc \parsep\z@ \fi
+          \ifktightmtc \parskip\z@ \fi
+          \topsep=1ex
+          \leftmargin\ptcindent
+          \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The part level mini-tables: \texttt{\bs parttoc}, \texttt{\bs partlof}, and \texttt{\bs partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \texttt{\bs parttoc}, \texttt{\bs partlof} et \texttt{\bs partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}
+% \fi
+% \end{raggedright}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands are essentialy similar to the \verb|\minitoc| command, except that they should be placed after a
+% \verb|\part| command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends of
+% the availability of the
+% \verb|\chapter| command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \verb|\partlof|
+% and \verb|\partlot| commands are siblings of the \verb|\parttoc| command.
+% Note that \verb|\parttoc|, \verb|\partlof| and \verb|\partlot| use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and
+% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence
+% \verb|\markboth{...}{...}| must be called.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires �~la commande \verb|\minitoc|, sauf qu'elles devraient �tre plac�es
+% apr�s une commande \verb|\part| pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est
+% diff�rente et d�pend de la disponibilit� de la commande \verb|\chapter| (pour les fontes et les filets
+% horizontaux). Le code est tr�s similaire. Les commandes \verb|\partlof| et \verb|\partlof| sont les cousines
+% de la commande \verb|\parttoc|. Notez que \verb|\parttoc|, \verb|\partlof| et \verb|\partlot| utilisent des styles
+% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande
+% \verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \verb|\markboth{...}{...}| doit �tre appel�e.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs parttoc} command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs parttoc}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \verb|\part| if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc).
+% First, \verb|\parttoc| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\parttoc@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\part| si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \verb|\parttoc| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \verb|\parttoc@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\parttoc@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@parttoc@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\parttoc@| fait le v�ritable travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@parttoc@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilis�s ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier parttoc):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@parttoc@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous v�rifions la pr�sence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas l�:
+% \fi
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforeparttoc|, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est pr�sent, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la pr�sentation;
+% d'abord, \verb|\beforeparttoc|, bien s�r:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeparttoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, vous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et
+% �tablissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+        \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+        \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+        \thispageparttocstyle
+        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\ptctitle}}{\uppercase{\ptctitle}}%
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage}, puis l'argument est trait� pour �tablir le
+% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la cha�ne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forc�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc,
+% puis �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\ptcfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The parttoc title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|. It is the top rule of the parttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la parttoc est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher une coupure
+% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la parttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\ptc@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent
+        \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \texttt{parttocdepth}\index{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is
+% necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table
+% des mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{parttocdepth}\index{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est
+% n�cessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est n�cessaire pour �viter une indentation n�gative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth%
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \verb|\l@chapter| ignoring the page number argument.
+% A hook (redefinissable coommand) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated
+% via \verb|\ptc@setform|.
+% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de num�ros de pages, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entr�es au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \verb|\l@chapter| en
+% ignorant l'argument num�ro de page. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\ptc@setform|. Puis le fichier parttoc est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, puis l'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
+  {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter%
+    \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \ptc@setform
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \verb|\chapter| is
+% not defined), and \verb|\afterparttoc|.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement �~ajouter le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la possibilit� d'une coupure de page
+% (si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie), et \verb|\afterparttoc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterparttoc\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs partlof} command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs partlof}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \verb|\part| if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof).
+% First, \verb|\partlof| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\partlof@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\part| si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \verb|\partlof| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \verb|\partlof@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\partlof@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@partlof@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\partlof@| fait le v�ritable travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@partlof@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilis�s ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier partlof):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@partlof@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous v�rifions la pr�sence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas l�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforepartlof|, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est pr�sent, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la pr�sentation;
+% d'abord, \verb|\beforepartlof|, bien s�r:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforepartlof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, vous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et
+% �tablissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+        \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+        \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+        \thispagepartlofstyle
+        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\plftitle}}{\uppercase{\plftitle}}%
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage}, puis l'argument est trait� pour �tablir le
+% position du titre de la partlof. Si la cha�ne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forc�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof,
+% puis �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\plffont%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The parttoc title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the
+% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|.  It is the top rule of the partlof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la partlof est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher une coupure
+% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la partlof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\plf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline
+        \mtc@hstrut\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent
+        \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof.
+% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \texttt{partlofdepth}\index{partlofdepth}.
+% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof.
+% Si n�cessaire la profondeur de table des mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{partlofdepth}\index{partlofdepth}.
+% Une petite astuce est n�cessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est n�cessaire pour �viter une
+% indentation n�gative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@partlofdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated via \verb|\plf@setform|.
+% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de num�ros de pages, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entr�es au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \verb|\l@chapter| en
+% ignorant l'argument num�ro de page. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\plf@setform|. Puis le fichier partlof est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, puis l'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \plf@setform
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-0\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \verb|\chapter| is
+% not defined), and \verb|\afterpartlof|. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement �~ajouter le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la possibilit� d'une coupure de page
+% (si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie), et \verb|\afterpartlof|. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterpartlof\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs partlot} command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs partlot}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \verb|\part| if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot).
+% First, \verb|\partlot| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\partlot@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\part| si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \verb|\partlot| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \verb|\partlot@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\partlot@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@partlot@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\partlot@| fait le v�ritable travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@partlot@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilis�s ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier partlot):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\def\partlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@partlot@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous v�rifions la pr�sence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas l�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforepartlot|, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est pr�sent, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la pr�sentation;
+% d'abord, \verb|\beforepartlot|, bien s�r:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforepartlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \verb|\chapter| is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \verb|\chapter| est d�finie, vous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et
+% �tablissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+        \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+        \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+        \thispagepartlotstyle
+        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\plttitle}}{\uppercase{\plttitle}}%
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}\index{samepage}, puis l'argument est trait� pour �tablir le
+% position du titre de la partlot. Si la cha�ne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forc�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot,
+% puis �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\pltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The partlot title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|. It is the top rule of the partlot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la partlot est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la partlot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\plt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline
+        \mtc@hstrut\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent
+        \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc.
+% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \texttt{partlotdepth}\index{partlotdepth}.
+% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot.
+% Si n�cessaire la profondeur de table des mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{partlotdepth}\index{partlotdepth}.
+% Une petite astuce est n�cessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est n�cessaire pour �viter une
+% indentation n�gative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@partlotdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated via \verb|\plt@setform|.
+% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de num�ros de pages, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entr�es au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \verb|\l@chapter| en
+% ignorant l'argument num�ro de page. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\plt@setform|. Puis le fichier partlot est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, puis l'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \plt@setform
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-0\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \verb|\chapter| is
+% not defined), and \verb|\afterpartlot|. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement �~ajouter le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la possibilit� d'une coupure de page
+% (si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie), et \verb|\afterpartlot|. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterpartlot\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@psection}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\psection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \verb|\l@xpart| uses a huge depth
+% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These command are similar to
+% \verb|\l@subsection|, only the arguments have been altered:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilis�es dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \verb|\l@xpart|
+% utilise une profondeur �norme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces
+% commandes sont similaires �~\verb|\l@subsection|, seuls les arguments ont �t� alt�r�s:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@psection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\pchapter{pchapter}
+\def\psection{psection}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \texttt{\bs part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We patch both branches of the \verb|\part| command: \verb|\@part| (unstarred \verb|\part|) and \verb|\@spart|
+% (\verb|\part*|). We add the incrementation of the \index{ptc}\texttt{ptc} counter to both branches.
+% In the unstarred branch,
+% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \verb|\partbegin|
+% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\verb|\relax|).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \verb|\part|: \verb|\@part| (\verb|\part| non �toil�e) et \verb|\@spart|
+% (\verb|\part*|). Nous ajoutons l'incr�mentation du compteur \index{ptc}\texttt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans
+% la branche non �toil�e, nous ajoutons des entr�es
+% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des mati�res, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche
+% �toil�e, nous ajoutons une ligne \verb|\partbegin| dans le fichier table des mati�res. Cette commande est juste un
+% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\verb|\relax|).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart
+\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax
+\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}%
+\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}%
+\stepcounter{ptc}}
+\let\sv@spart\@spart
+\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart}
+\let\ptc@spart\@spart
+\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart}
+\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart}
+\let\partend\relax
+\let\partbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \texttt{\bs doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\doparttoc| command works like the \verb|\dominitoc| command, \verb|\dopartlof| like \verb|\dominilof|
+% and \verb|\dopartlot| like \verb|\dominilot|.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\doparttoc| fonctionne comme la commande \verb|\dominitoc|, \verb|\dopartlof| comme \verb|\dominilof|
+% et \verb|\dopartlot| comme \verb|\dominilot|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\doparttoc| command extracts information from the \texttt{.toc} file and creates the
+% \texttt{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.ptc} becomes \texttt{.P} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\doparttoc| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.toc} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.ptc}\meta{N} (\texttt{.ptc} devient \texttt{.P} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@doparttoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dopartlof| command extracts information from the
+% \texttt{.lof} file and creates the \texttt{.plf}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.plf} becomes \texttt{.G} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dopartlof| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lof} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.plf}\meta{N} (\texttt{.plf} devient \texttt{.G} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dopartlof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dopartlot| command extracts information from the
+% \texttt{.lot} file and creates the \texttt{.plt}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.plt} becomes \texttt{.U} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dopartlot| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lot} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.plt}\meta{N} (\texttt{.plt} devient \texttt{.U} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dopartlot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui d�tectent l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\doparttoc| (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\doparttoc| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des parttocs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@doparttoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@doparttoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\dopartlof| (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dopartlof| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des partlofs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dopartlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@dopartlof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dopartlof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\dopartlot| (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dopartlot| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des partlots)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dopartlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@dopartlot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dopartlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour cr�er le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de
+% fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la t�te de liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PTC@list{#2}%
+  \PTC@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@toc{%
+  \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\PTC@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\part| is found, \texttt{ptc} is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PTC@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des mati�res et d�tecte les
+% mots-cl�s int�ressants. Si \verb|\part| est trouv�e, \texttt{ptc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier parttoc
+% est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO/DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \verb|\mtc@toks| is used to pass the entry to \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \verb|\mtc@toks| est utilis� pour passer l'entr�e �~\verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es; ce code extrait et �crit les informations pour les
+% chapitres, sections, etc.:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And for the starred sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement �toil�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
+%%HO: the following line should be disabled: \stepcounter{ptc}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\PTC@next| to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des mati�res; expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle \verb|\PTC@next| pour
+% traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entr�es int�ressantes. Sinon, traiter
+% l'entr�e suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PTC@toc
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PTC@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\PTC@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\PTC@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\PTC@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PTC@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier table des mati�res,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les parties:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%HO/BJ: now patch \PTC@test,
+%%HO/BJ: call \PTC@contentsline with 4 instead of 3 parameters
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e �~int�ressante~�, nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \verb|\@input|, nous ajoutons le fichier �~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommenc�e si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    %%HO/DV: 4 instead of 3 parameters
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc
+  \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante de la liste et le retirons de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PLF@list{#2}%
+  \PLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\PLF@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\part| is found, \texttt{ptc} is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PLF@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et d�tecte les
+% mots-cl�s int�ressants. Si \verb|\part| est trouv�e, \texttt{ptc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier partlof
+% est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: #4 added
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}%
+      \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}%
+      \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \verb|\mtc@toks| is used to pass the entry to \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \verb|\mtc@toks| est utilis� pour passer l'entr�e �~\verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\PLF@next| to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle \verb|\PLF@next| pour
+% traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entr�es int�ressantes. Sinon, traiter
+% l'entr�e suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PLF@lof
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.lof} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lof}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\PLF@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\PLF@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\PLF@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PLF@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les parties:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%HO/BJ: now patch \PLF@test,
+%%HO/BJ: call \PLF@contentsline with 4 instead of 3 parameters
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e �~int�ressante~�, nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \verb|\@input|, nous ajoutons le fichier �~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommenc�e si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante de la liste et le retirons de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PLT@list{#2}%
+  \PLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\PLT@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \verb|\part| is found, \texttt{ptc} is incremented and a new partlot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PLT@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et d�tecte les
+% mots-cl�s int�ressants. Si \verb|\part| est trouv�e, \texttt{ptc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier partlot
+% est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: #4 added
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}%
+      \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}%
+      \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \verb|\mtc@toks| is used to pass the entry to \verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \verb|\mtc@toks| est utilis� pour passer l'entr�e �~\verb|\MTC@WriteContentsline|:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\PLT@next| to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entr�es et appelle \verb|\PLT@next| pour
+% traiter la premi�re:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entr�es int�ressantes. Sinon, traiter
+% l'entr�e suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PLT@lot
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.lot} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lot}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\PLT@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\PLT@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\PLT@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\PLT@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% principalement pour d�limiter les parties:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%HO/BJ: now patch \PLT@test,
+%%HO/BJ: call \PLT@contentsline with 4 instead of 3 parameters
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \verb|\@input|, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entr�e �~int�ressante~�, nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \verb|\@input|, nous ajoutons le fichier �~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommenc�e si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
+% \or\relax
+% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (d�but� dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \texttt{lofdepth} and \texttt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of
+% the corresponding mini-tables:
+% \index{sectlofdepth}\texttt{sectlofdepth} and \index{sectlotdepth}\texttt{sectlotdepth}.
+% These counters are initialised to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \texttt{lofdepth} et \texttt{lotdepth} sont d�finis, nous cr�ons de nouveaux compteurs pour les
+% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes:
+% \index{sectlofdepth}\texttt{sectlofdepth} et \index{sectlotdepth}\texttt{sectlotdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialis�s �~2.
+% Ceci est fait apr�s le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level commands are defined only if \verb|\chapter| is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like
+% document classes, and only if \verb|\section| is defined:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes au niveau section sont d�finies seulement si \verb|\chapter| \emph{n'est pas} d�finie, donx dans
+% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \verb|\section| est d�finie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@undef@
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the obsolete command \verb|\firstsectionis| (with its harmless warning), the counter \index{stc}\texttt{stc}
+% of secttocs, the \verb|\adjuststc|, \verb|\decrementstc| and \verb|\incrementstc| commands,
+% the depth counter \index{secttocdepth}\verb|sectocdepth| and its default
+% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \verb|\stc@rule| (rule before/after
+% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \verb|\stcindent| for the secttocs (with its default
+% values).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons la commande obsol�te \verb|\firstsectionis| (avec son avertissement b�nin),
+% le compteur \index{stc}\texttt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \verb|\adjuststc|, \verb|\decrementstc|
+% et \verb|\incrementstc|,
+% le compteur de profondeur \index{secttocdepth}\verb|sectocdepth| et sa valeur par d�faut~2 (pour inclure au moins
+% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \verb|\stc@rule| (filet avant/apr�s la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation
+% (des deux c�t�s) \verb|\stcindent| pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par d�faut).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\firstsectionis#1%
+  {\PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete command ***}%
+     \@firstsectionis@used@true}
+\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}%
+\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}%
+\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}%
+\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}%
+\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}%
+\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}%
+\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}    % secttoc
+\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}  % (subsections)
+\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont    % (subsubsections)
+\let\stcPfont\stcfont      % (paragraphs)
+\let\stcSPfont\stcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+\let\slffont\stcfont       % sectlof (figures)
+\let\sltfont\stcfont       % sectlot (tables)
+\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}    % titles
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
+% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \verb|\dosecttoc| and \verb|\secttoc|
+% commands (and siblings):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
+% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des
+% commandes \verb|\dosecttoc| et \verb|\secttoc| (et leurs cousines):
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles,
+% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
+% \or\relax
+% Titres centr�s, cadr�s �~gauche, cadr�s �~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides,
+% d'apr�s \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are flushleft.
+% \or\relax
+% Par d�faut, les titres sur cadr�s �~gauche.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@stitc\l@sti
+\let\df@stitc\l@sti
+\let\do@stilf\l@sti
+\let\df@stilf\l@sti
+\let\do@stilt\l@sti
+\let\df@stilt\l@sti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \texttt{verse} environment.
+% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \texttt{tight/loose} and \texttt{k-tight/k-loose} package options are honored.
+% \or\relax
+% L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste tr�s simple, analogue �~l'environnement
+% standard \texttt{verse}. Certains param�tres de mise en page sont ajust�s. Les options de paquetage
+% \texttt{tight/loose} et \texttt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honor�es.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stc@verse{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@
+          \itemindent \z@
+          \listparindent \itemindent
+          \partopsep \z@
+          \iftightmtc \parsep \z@ \fi
+          \ifktightmtc \parskip \z@ \fi
+          \topsep \z@
+          \leftmargin\stcindent
+          \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]}
+\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs secttoc}, \texttt{\bs sectlof}, and \texttt{\bs sectlot} commands}
+% These three commands are very similar.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \texttt{\bs secttoc}, \texttt{\bs sectlof} et \texttt{\bs sectlot}}
+% Ces trois commandes sont tr�s similaires.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\secttoc| command must be used after \verb|\section| if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \verb|\minitoc| (but simpler).
+% First, \verb|\secttoc| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\secttoc@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\secttoc| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\section| si vous d�sirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc
+% automatique). Son code est similaire �~celui de \verb|\minitoc| (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \verb|\secttoc| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \verb|\secttoc@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\secttoc@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@secttoc@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\secttoc@| effectue le vrai travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@secttoc@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) est teste si les longs suffixes sont utilis�s ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier secttoc):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@secttoc@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{S\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons la pr�sence et la vacuit� du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforesecttoc|, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier secttoc est pr�sent et non vide, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais nous devons au pr�alable ajouter du
+% code de pr�sentation: d'abord, \verb|\beforesecttoc|, bien s�r, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforesecttoc
+        \thispagesecttocstyle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \texttt{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement �~\texttt{e}~�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%      \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\stctitle}}{\uppercase{\stctitle}}%
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous
+% �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\stcfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The secttoc title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|. It is the top rule of the secttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la secttoc est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la secttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \ifx\stc@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent
+        \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \texttt{secttocdepth}\index{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des
+% mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{secttocdepth}\index{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est n�cessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth%
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated via \verb|\stc@setform|.
+% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de num�ros, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\stc@setform|. Puis le fichier secttoc est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, et l'environnement \texttt{stc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \stc@setform%
+  \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \stc@setform%
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \verb|\aftersectoc|.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \verb|\aftersectoc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-1.\baselineskip%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\sectlof| command must be used after \verb|\section| if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \verb|\minilof| (but simpler).
+% First, \verb|\sectlof| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\sectlof@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\sectlof| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\section| si vous d�sirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof
+% automatique). Son code est similaire �~celui de \verb|\minilof| (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \verb|\sectlof| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \verb|\sectlof@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\sectlof@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@sectlof@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\sectlof@| effectue le vrai travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@sectlof@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) est teste si les longs suffixes sont utilis�s ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier sectlof):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@sectlof@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{H\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons la pr�sence et la vacuit� du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforesectlof|, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier sectlof est pr�sent et non vide, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais nous devons au pr�alable ajouter du
+% code de pr�sentation: d'abord, \verb|\beforesectlof|, bien s�r, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispagesectlofstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\slftitle}}{\uppercase{\slftitle}}%
+        \beforesectlof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \texttt{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement �~\texttt{e}~�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous
+% �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\slffont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectlof title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|. It is the top rule of the sectlof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la sectlof est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la sectlof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\slf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \mtc@hstrut
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent
+        \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \texttt{sectlofdepth}\index{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des
+% mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{sectlofdepth}\index{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est n�cessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@sectlofdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated via \verb|\slf@setform|.
+% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de num�ros, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\slf@setform|. Puis le fichier sectlof est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, et l'environnement \texttt{stc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \slf@setform%
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \verb|\afterseclof|.
+% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \verb|\afterseclof|.
+% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.\baselineskip% ABCD
+        \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\sectlot| command must be used after \verb|\section| if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \verb|\minilot| (but simpler).
+% First, \verb|\sectlot| detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \verb|\sectlot@| is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\sectlot| doit �tre utilis�e apr�s \verb|\section| si vous d�sirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot
+% automatique). Son code est similaire �~celui de \verb|\minilot| (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \verb|\sectlot| d�tecte la pr�sence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par d�faut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \verb|\sectlot@| est appel�e avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\sectlot@| macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \texttt{\bs if@sectlot@used@} (for a coherence
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\sectlot@| effectue le vrai travail. Elle positionne d'abord l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@sectlot@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de coh�rence) est teste si les longs suffixes sont utilis�s ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier sectlot):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@sectlot@used@true
+\if@longextensions@%
+\def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}%
+\else
+\def\@tocfile{I\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous testons la pr�sence et la vacuit� du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \verb|\beforesectlot|, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier sectlot est pr�sent et non vide, nous pouvons l'ins�rer, mais nous devons au pr�alable ajouter du
+% code de pr�sentation: d'abord, \verb|\beforesectlot|, bien s�r, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispagesectlotstyle
+%%      \mtc@markboth{\uppercase{\slttitle}}{\uppercase{\slttitle}}%
+        \beforesectlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \texttt{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement �~\texttt{e}~�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques param�tres de mise en page et �vitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous
+% �tablissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\sltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectlot title is set in a \texttt{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break
+% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \verb|\hline|. It is the top rule of the sectlot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la sectlot est compos� dans un environnement \texttt{tabular} (pour emp�cher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% n�cessaire. Ce filet est une \verb|\hline|. C'est le filet sup�rieur de la sectlot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\slt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \mtc@hstrut
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet sup�rieur et �tablissons l'indentation et quelques
+% param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent
+        \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \texttt{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \texttt{sectlotdepth}\index{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�butons un environnement \texttt{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des
+% mati�res est forc�e (localement) �~\texttt{sectlotdepth}\index{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est n�cessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}{\c@tocdepth=\c@sectlotdepth}
+        \ifnum\c@tocdepth<1\relax\c@tocdepth=1\fi
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR
+        \vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \verb|\mtcsetformat| are activated via \verb|\slt@setform|.
+% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \texttt{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de num�ros, nous rempla�ons la macro \verb|\@dottedtocline| par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un �~\emph{hook}~� (point d'attache, commande red�finissable) est ajout�, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \verb|\mtcsetformat| sont activ�s \verb|\slt@setform|. Puis le fichier sectlot est
+% ins�r�, suivi d'un �tai, et l'environnement \texttt{stc@verse} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+   \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \slt@setform%
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \verb|\afterseclot|.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inf�rieur, si n�cessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \verb|\afterseclot|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.\baselineskip% ABCD
+        \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files).
+% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilis�es pour les mini-tables et comme d�limiteurs dans le
+% fichier table des mati�res (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux).
+% La profonteur de \texttt{xsect} est �norme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous
+% trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\xsect{xsect}
+\def\schapter{schapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \texttt{\bs section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \texttt{\bs section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We patch the both branches of the \verb|\section| command: \verb|\@sect| for the unstarred version and
+% \verb|\@ssect| for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\verb|\@sect|), we add a
+% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \texttt{\bs ifnum~\#2=1} restricts the action to the
+% section level macros (because \verb|\@sect| is also used by \verb|\subsection| and below, which have no
+% mini-tables).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \verb|\section|: \verb|\@sect| pour la version non �toil�e et
+% \verb|\@ssect| Pour la version �toil�e. Tout d'abord, pour la version non �toil�e (\verb|\@sect|), nous ajoutons
+% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
+% Le test \texttt{\bs ifnum~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \verb|\@sect| est
+% aussi utilis�e par \verb|\subsection| et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@sect\@sect
+\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+\ifnum #2=1
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \verb|\starsection|), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry
+% in the LOF and in the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Si c'est une section (non �toil�e ou �toil�e via \verb|\starsection|), nous ajoutons une entr�e \texttt{xsect}
+% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{
+\expandafter
+\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@svsec}
+% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the remainder of the section header formatting:
+% \or\relax
+% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-t�te de section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+   \let\@svsec\@empty
+\else
+   \refstepcounter{#1}%
+   \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}%
+\fi
+\@tempskipa #5\relax
+\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+   \begingroup #6\relax
+      \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+         {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}%
+   \endgroup
+   \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline
+   {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+             \else
+             \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+             \fi
+             #7}%
+\else
+   \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax
+   \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname
+   {#7}\addcontentsline
+   {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+             \else
+                \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}
+             \fi
+   #7}}%
+\fi
+\@xsect{#5}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch the starred branch (\verb|\@ssect|). We define also the delimiting commands \verb|\sectbegin| and
+% \verb|\sectend| commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions la branche �toil�e (\verb|\@ssect|). Nous d�finissons aussi les commandes de d�limitation
+% \verb|\sectbegin| et \verb|\sectend|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\stc@ssect\@ssect
+\def\@ssect{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectend}\stc@ssect}
+\def\@ssect{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin}\stc@ssect}
+\let\sectend\relax
+\let\sectbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \texttt{\bs dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dosectoc| command is very similar to \verb|\dominitoc|.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dosectoc| est tr�s similaire �~\verb|\dominitoc|.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dosecttoc| command extracts information from the
+% \texttt{.toc} file and creates the \texttt{.stc}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.stc} becomes \texttt{.S} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dosecttoc| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.toc} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.stc}\meta{N} (\texttt{.stc} devient \texttt{.S} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosecttoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dosectlof| command extracts information from the
+% \texttt{.lof} file and creates the \texttt{.slf}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.slf} becomes \texttt{.H} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dosectlof| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lof} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.slf}\meta{N} (\texttt{.slf} devient \texttt{.H} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosectlof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\dosectlot| command extracts information from the
+% \texttt{.lot} file and creates the \texttt{.slt}\meta{N} files (\texttt{.slt} becomes \texttt{.V} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\dosectlot| extrait des informations du fichier \texttt{.lot} et cr�e les fichiers
+% \texttt{.slt}\meta{N} (\texttt{.slt} devient \texttt{.V} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosectlot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui d�tectent l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\dosecttoc| (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dosecttoc| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des secttocs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@dosecttoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosecttoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\dosectlof| (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dosectlof| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des sectlofs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosectlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@dosectlof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosectlof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We treat the optional argument of \verb|\dosectlot| (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'argument optionnel de \verb|\dosectlot| (il devient la position par d�faut pour les titres des sectlots)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant �t� utilis�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosectlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@dosectlot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosectlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour cr�er le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le
+% descripteur de fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\STC@list{#2}%
+  \STC@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@toc{%
+  \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\STC@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the TOC file.
+% If \verb|\section| is found, \texttt{stc} is incremented and a new secttoc file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\STC@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des mati�res.
+% Si \verb|\section| est trouv�e, \texttt{stc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier secttoc est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: #4 added
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%%    \def\thestc{\arabic{stc}} %% HO: removed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file:
+% \or\relax
+% Une section �toil�e termine la section courante et cr�e un nouveau fichier secttoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+    \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons les entr�es pour les commandes de sectionnement �toil�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\STC@next| to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des mati�res; nous expansons la liste des entr�es et
+% appelons \verb|\STC@next| pour traiter la premi�re.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les entr�es �~int�ressantes~�. Sinon, nous
+% traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\STC@toc
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\STC@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\STC@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\STC@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\STC@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\STC@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier table des mati�res,
+% essentiellement pour d�limiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc
+  \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\SLF@list{#2}%
+  \SLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\SLF@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOF file.
+% If \verb|\section| is found, \texttt{stc} is incremented and a new sectlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\SLF@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures.
+% Si \verb|\section| est trouv�e, \texttt{stc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier sectlof est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: #4 added
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%%    \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} %%HO: removed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}%
+      \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}%
+      \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\SLF@next| to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entr�es et
+% appelons \verb|\SLF@next| pour traiter la premi�re.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les entr�es �~int�ressantes~�. Sinon, nous
+% traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\SLF@lof
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\SLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.lof} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lof}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\SLF@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\SLF@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line
+  \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\SLF@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\SLF@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% essentiellement pour d�limiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la t�te de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\SLT@list{#2}%
+  \SLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \verb|\SLT@contentsline| analyses the lines read from the LOT file.
+% If \verb|\section| is found, \texttt{stc} is incremented and a new sectlot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\SLT@contentsline| analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux.
+% Si \verb|\section| est trouv�e, \texttt{stc} est incr�ment� et un nouveau fichier sectlot est cr��.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{% %%HO: #4 added
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}% %%HO: space removed
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%%    \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}} %%HO: removed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilis�s, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@longextensions@%
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}%
+      \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}%
+      \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concern�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \verb|\SLT@next| to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entr�es et
+% appelons \verb|\SLT@next| pour traiter la premi�re.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries. Otherwise, process the next
+% entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si une entr�e est trouv�e, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les entr�es �~int�ressantes~�. Sinon, nous
+% traitons l'entr�e suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \PackageWarning{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1\MessageBreak SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\SLT@lot
+  \else
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\SLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \texttt{.lot} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entr�e suivante dans le fichier \texttt{.lot}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \verb|\SLT@test| has sufficient arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \verb|\SLT@test| a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line
+  \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@% %%HO: . added
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\SLT@test| macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\SLT@test| trouve les commandes �~int�ressantes~� dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% essentiellement pour d�limiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{% %%HO: #6 added
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% %%HO: #4 added
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \verb|\@ifundefined{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the
+% test \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to the test \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}|:
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \verb|\@ifundefined{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du
+% test \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide au test \verb|\@ifundefined{chapter}|:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@
+\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Necessary \texttt{\bs l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes \texttt{\bs l@.{}.{}.} n�cessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \verb|\l@section| or \verb|\l@paragraph|) are required to format some
+% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially:
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues �~\verb|\l@section| ou \verb|\l@paragraph|) sont requises pour
+% mettre en page certaines entr�es dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement
+% �toil�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
+\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
+\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
+\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par d�faut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of
+% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are
+% .4~pt high horizontal rules.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses
+% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une d�finition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant.
+% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux �pais de 0.4pt.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax}
+\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax}
+\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax}
+\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax}
+\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax}
+\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax}
+\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax}
+\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax}
+\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax}
+\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \texttt{\bs  mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed
+% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces
+% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept g�n�ral des commandes \texttt{\bs  mtcset.{}.{}.} a �t� propos� par
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont �t� introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune
+% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifi�e et logique.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Keywords for the \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mots-cl�s pour les commandes \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via
+% the \verb|\@namedef| -- \verb|\@nameuse| mechanism the following way:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\@namedef{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros,
+% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and
+% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...|
+% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost
+% of few keyword families.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons quelques mots-cl�s communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-cl� est cr�� via le
+% m�canisme \verb|\@namedef| -- \verb|\@nameuse| de la mani�re suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\@namedef{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abr�viation}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% o� \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-cl�s concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|,
+% \emph{nom} est le mot-cl� que l'utilisateur donne comme argument �~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et
+% \emph{abr�viation} est une cha�ne utilis�e pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilis�e. Comme
+% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs param�tres mots-cl�s, cette m�thode peut r�duire le nombre de
+% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-cl�s.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-cl�s pour les types de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plt}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their
+% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently used keywords.
+% Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with \texttt{\bs expandafter}
+% \texttt{\bs csname} \texttt{...} \texttt{\bs endcsname}.}
+% and meaning false or true:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-cl�s pour reconna�tre les mots-cl�s �~\texttt{off}~� et
+% �~\texttt{on}~�, avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (extr�me) montre la facilit� de cr�ation de
+% synonymes pour des mots-cl�s fr�quemment utilis�s. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-cl� contient un caract�re qui
+% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \texttt{\bs expandafter} \texttt{\bs csname} \texttt{...}
+% \texttt{\bs endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUEV
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}),
+% because no contents line for a
+% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'',
+% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons les mots-cl�s pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de
+% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut appara�tre dans une
+% mini-table, la partie �tant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~repr�sente <<~tout
+% niveau~>>, et est utilis�e pour �tablir la fonte globale par d�faut pour un genre donn� de mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mtcsetfont| command has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\mtcsetfont| a la syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like
+% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic
+% commands usually.
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de
+% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une sp�cification
+% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�clarons un indicateur, mis �~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous commen�ons la commande, qui a trois arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings.
+% We process the first argument which is a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \verb|\mtc@mta@abbrev|. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \verb|mtc|.
+% \or\relax
+% Les deux premiers arguments sont des mots-cl�s. Ils doivent �tre traduits en cha�nes effectives. Nous traitons
+% le premier argument qui est un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le r�sultat est rang� dans
+% \verb|\mtc@mta@abbrev|. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \verb|mtc|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setfont@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setfont@false
+   \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and the result is
+% stored into \verb|\mtc@level@abbrev|. Example: if \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get~\verb|SS|.
+% \or\relax
+% Le deuxi�me argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est trait� de ma m�me mani�re et le r�sultat
+% est rang� dans \verb|\mtc@level@abbrev|. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons~\verb|SS|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setfont@false
+   \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument (#2).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a sectionning level (part...subparagraph) or * }%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliqu�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the
+% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use
+% a \verb|\csname| \ldots\ \verb|\endcsname| pair to apply the constructed command).
+% \or\relax
+% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenins \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui
+% est le noms de la commande pour la fonte d'une entr�e de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la
+% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \verb|\csname| \ldots\ \verb|\endcsname| pour appliquer la
+% commande construite).
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table),
+% so we must test:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas l�gales (le niveau de l'entr�e doit �tre plus bas que celui de la
+% mini-table), donc nous devons tester:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\minitoc
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\minilof
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\minilot
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\secttoc
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\section\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\sectlof
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\section\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\sectlot
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\part\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\chapter\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\section\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the combinaison is legal, we apply it, \emph{i.e.}~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence
+% of commands given as third argument of \verb|\mtcsetfont| and we log that event (we store the third argument in a
+% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim}).
+%
+% If the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la combinaison est l�gale, nous l'appliquons, c'est-�-dire que nous red�finissons la signification de la
+% macro construite comme �tant la s�quence de commandes donn�e en troisi�me argument de \verb|\mtcsetfont| et nous
+% notons cet �v�nement dans le fichier \texttt{.log} (nous rangeons le troisi�me argument dans un registre
+% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'�crire \emph{verbatim}).
+%
+% Si la combinaison n'est pas l�gale, un message d'erreur est affich�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setfont@
+   \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
+   \mtc@toks{#3}
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro
+        \mtc@tmp@name \space as "\the\mtc@toks"}
+   \expandafter\def\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{#3}
+\else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible\MessageBreak
+       first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \verb|\mtcsetfont| command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est tr�s similaire �~ la commande \verb|\mtcsetfont|. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using
+% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because
+% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind.
+%
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une
+% sp�cification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La diff�rence est
+% l'absence du deuxi�me argument mot-cl�, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliqu�es au titre de chaque
+% mini-table du genre donn�.
+%
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�clarons un indicateur, mis �~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we begin the definition of the \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| command, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous commen�ons la d�finition de la commande \verb|\mtcsettitlefont|, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into
+% \verb|\mtc@mtatf@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le r�sultat est rang� dans
+% \verb|\mtc@mtatf@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@settitlefont@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@settitlefont@false
+   \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we build the name of the effective command and apply this command:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@settitlefont@
+   \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font}
+   \mtc@toks{#2}
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro
+       \mtc@tmptf@name \space as "\the\mtc@toks"}
+   \expandafter\def\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{#2}
+\else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {Illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \verb|\mtcsettitlefont| command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est tr�s similaire �~la commande \verb|\mtcsettitlefont|. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre
+% de mini-table.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�clarons un indicateur, mis �~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define the \verb|\mtcsettitle| command, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons la commande \verb|\mtcsettitle|, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, which is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \verb|\mtc@mtati@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, qui est un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le r�sultat est rang�
+% dans \verb|\mtc@mtati@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@settitle@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@settitle@false
+   \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@settitle@
+   \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}
+   \mtc@toks{#2}
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro
+       \mtc@tmpti@name \space as "\the\mtc@toks"}
+   \expandafter\def\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{#2}
+\else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {Illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command
+% can alter:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons d'abord les mots-cl�s (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois param�tres de mise en page
+% que cette commande peut alt�rer:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}%
+\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}%
+\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}%
+\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth}
+%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available
+%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mtcsetformat| command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the
+% defaults values of the formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\mtcsetformat| a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en d�but de document pour �tablir les
+% valeurs par d�faut des param�tes de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \verb|\@pnumwith| for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par d�faut de \verb|\@pnumwith| pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+% \lneed{10}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \verb|\@tocrmarg| for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par d�faut de \verb|\@tocrmarg| pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \verb|\@dotsep| for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par d�faut de \verb|\@dotsep| pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we terminate the \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous terminons le bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \verb|\mtc@verse|-like
+% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \verb|\mtcsetformat|.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie ex�cutive est effectu�e via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoqu�es dans les environnements analogues
+% �~\verb|\mtc@verse| pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregiste�es par
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat|.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\ptc@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|ptc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\ptc@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|ptc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mtc@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|mtc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\mtc@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|mtc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\stc@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|stc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\stc@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|stc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\plf@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|ptc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\plf@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|ptc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\plf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mlf@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|mtc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\mlf@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|mtc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mlf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\slf@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|stc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\slf@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|stc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\plt@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|ptc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\plt@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|ptc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\plt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mlt@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|mtc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\mlt@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|mtc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mlt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\slt@setform| macro is invoked in \verb|stc@verse| to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \verb|\slt@setform| est invoqu�e dans \verb|stc@verse| pour �tablir les param�tres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We now define a flag and the \verb|\mtcsetformat| command, which has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of
+% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons un indicateur et la commande \verb|\mtcsetformat|, qui a la syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetformat{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-param�tre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-param�tre} est un mot-cl� de la
+% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce param�tre pour le genre de mini-table donn�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true
+\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We now process the first argument and store the result in \verb|\mtc@mtf@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le r�sultat dans \verb|\mtc@mtf@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
+\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setformat@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \@mtc@setformat@false
+  \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+     \MessageBreak
+     It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+     {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the second argument is processed and the result is stored in \verb|\mtc@fparam@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis le deuxi�me argument est trait� et le r�sultat est rang� dans \verb|\mtc@fparam@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \@mtc@setformat@false
+  \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument (#2).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a formatting param
+      (pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval)}%
+     {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the storage macro is build and it receives the third parameter as value:
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle re�oit le troisi�me param�tre comme valeur:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setformat@
+  \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+  \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines
+      the macro \mtc@tmpfm@name \space as \string#3}
+  \expandafter\def\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{#3}
+\else
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible
+      \MessageBreak
+      first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
+% or \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande active ou inhibe les num�ros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donn�. Sa syntaxe est la
+% suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
+% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-cl� pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les num�ros de
+% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the \verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers| macro, with two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis la macro \verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers|, avec deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in
+% \verb|\mtc@mttpn@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le r�sultat dans
+% \verb|\mtc@mttpn@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true
+\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first argument (#1).}%
+      {It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)\MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code, type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, and store the result in \verb|\mtc@pnsw@abbrev|.
+% The name of the effective macro is build and the macro executed.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis le second argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{YN}, et nous rangeons le r�sultat dans \verb|\mtc@pnsw@abbrev|.
+% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro ex�cut�e.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@spn@ok@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@spn@ok@false
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second argument (#2)}%
+      {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off\MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code, type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X}
+   \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
+   \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers}
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Page numbers are inhibited for the #1s}
+   \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Page numbers are activated for the #1s}
+   \fi
+   \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is very similar to \verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers| and its syntax is the same:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
+% or \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
+%
+% Hence the code is similar.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup �~\verb|\mtcsetpagenumbers| et sa syntaxe est la m�me:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
+% et \texttt{on} ou
+% \texttt{off} un mot-cl� pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et
+% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
+%
+% Donc le code est similaire.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the \verb|\mtcsetrules| macro, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis la macro \verb|\mtcsetrules|, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in
+% \verb|\mtc@mttru@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le r�sultat dans
+% \verb|\mtc@mttru@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setrules@true
+\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setrules@false
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument (#1).}%
+      {It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code, type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family, and store the result in \verb|\mtc@rusw@abbrev|.
+% The name of the effective macro is build and the macro executed.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis le second argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{YN}, et nous rangeons le r�sultat dans \verb|\mtc@rusw@abbrev|.
+% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est ex�cut�e.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@sru@ok@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@sru@ok@false
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+   \@mtc@setrules@false
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument (#2)}%
+      {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code, type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X}
+   \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
+   \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule}
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Horizontal rules are inhibited for the #1s}
+   \else
+      \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+         {Horizontal rules are activated for the #1s}
+   \fi
+   \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word
+% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\texttt{thispage}'' is used.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Pour cette commande, nous devons d�finir trois familles de mots-cl�s, mais la troisi�me ne sert qu'� ajouter le mot
+% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\texttt{thispage}~>> est utilis�.
+%
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A family for the long names of the types of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Une famille pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A family for the type of feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Une famille pour le type de dispositif:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And a family to add ``style'' if it is a ``pagestyle'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Et une famille pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~pagestyle~>>:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}%
+    \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|\mtcsetfeature| command has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of
+% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which
+% constitute the selected feature.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \verb|\mtcsetfeature| a la syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetfeature{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% o� \emph{mini-table} est une mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-cl�
+% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les
+% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a flag and the \verb|\mtcsetfeature| command, with three arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�finissons un indicateur et la commande \verb|\mtcsetfeature|, qui a trois arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true
+\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family and store
+% the result in \verb|\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} et rangeons le r�sultat dans
+% \verb|\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
+\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setfeature@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \@mtc@setfeature@false
+  \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+     {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in
+% \verb|\mtc@featparam@|; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the
+% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \verb|\mtc@featparam@third|.
+% \or\relax
+% Le deuxi�me argument est un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le r�sultat est rang� dans
+% \verb|\mtc@featparam@|; et le compl�ment est calcul� d'apr�s le premier argument, interpr�t� comme un mot-cl� de
+% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le r�sultat rang� dans \verb|\mtc@featparam@third|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \@mtc@setfeature@false
+  \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
+  \def\mtc@featparam@third{X}
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {*** \string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument (#2).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a feature param (before, after, pagestyle)}%
+     {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}}
+  \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three pieces (named \verb|\mtc@featparam@abbrev|,
+% \verb|\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev|, and \verb|\mtc@featparam@third| respectively), then this macro is
+% executed:
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom de la macro effective est construit en concat�nant ces trois morceaux (nomm�s \verb|\mtc@featparam@abbrev|,
+% \verb|\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev| et \verb|\mtc@featparam@third| respectivement), puis cette macro est ex�cut�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setfeature@
+  \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name%
+     {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}
+  \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro
+      "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as "\string#3"}
+  \expandafter\def\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{#3}
+\else
+  \PackageError{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible\MessageBreak
+      first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}{}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \verb|\mtcsettitle| command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table.
+% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be
+% available}, \emph{i.e.}~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \index{subfig}\texttt{subfig}
+% package~\cite{subfig}).
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est tr�s similaire �~la commande \verb|\mtcsettitle|. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-cl� tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur
+% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur
+% correspondant \virage\emph{doit �tre disponible}, c'est-�-dire qu'il doit avoir �t� cr�� (souvent par un paquetage
+% ad�quat, tel que le paquetage \index{subfig}\texttt{subfig}~\cite{subfig}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�clarons un indicateur, vrai par d�faut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define the \verb|\mtcsetdepth| command, with two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons la commande \verb|\mtcsetdepth|, avec deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the first argument, which is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \verb|\mtc@mtade@abbrev|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, qui est un mot-cl� de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le r�sultat est rang�
+% dans \verb|\mtc@mtade@abbrev|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setdepth@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setdepth@false
+   \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {*** \string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we construct the name of the effective counter and gave it the value:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif et lui donnons la valeur:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setdepth@
+   \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}
+   \expandafter\noexpand\@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}%
+      {\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {***  \string\mtcsetdepth \space attempt to use\MessageBreak
+             an undefined counter (#1depth).}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{%
+   \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the.
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter
+       \mtc@tmpde@name \space as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+    \expandafter\setcounter{\mtc@tmpde@name}{#2}}%
+\else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.\MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
+\fi}% end of \mtcsettitle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc}}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The flag \texttt{\bs if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment:
+% \or\relax
+% L'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilis� pour d�tecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file commands of the form \verb|\setcounter{tocdepth}{...}|.
+% It also save and restore the value of the counter \texttt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of
+% the entries in the main TOC.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons cet environnement, qui �crit dans le fichier table des mati�res des commandes de la
+% forme \verb|\setcounter{tocdepth}{...}|. Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \texttt{tocdepth}, car
+% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entr�es dans la table des mati�res principale.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]%
+{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\PackageError{minitoc}%
+    {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}%
+    {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
+ \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true
+ \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\PackageError{minitoc}%
+    {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}%
+    {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
+ \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} and \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the
+% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments.
+% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages.
+% 
+% First, for the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Les environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons
+% v�fifier la pr�sence du compteur de profondeur associ�, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements.
+% Ceci doit �tre fait \emph{apr�s} le chargement des paquetages.
+%
+% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
+    \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}}
+}%
+{%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
+    \def\mtc@svf@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@false
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then for the list of tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
+    \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}}
+}%
+{%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
+    \def\mtc@svt@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\PackageError{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Correction de l'entr�e <<~Index~>> dans la table des mati�res}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcfixindex[part|chapter|section]+
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Depending of the document class, the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
+% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
+% stored in the macro \verb|\mtc@ixfix@level|. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message:
+% \or\relax
+% Selon la classe du document, l'entr�e <<~Index~>> dans la table des mati�res est trait�e comme un chapitre �toil�
+% ou une section �toil�e. Donc nous devons d'abord d�terminer la valeur par d�faut de l'argument optionnel. La
+% valeur par d�faut est alors rang�e dans la macro \verb|\mtc@ixfix@level|. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
+% produit �ventuellement un message d'avertissement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}%
+      {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+       {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
+        \MessageBreak Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex\space %
+           without optional argument [part]}%
+       \@ifundefined{part}%
+         {\PackageError{minitoc}%
+            {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
+            {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}%
+       {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+          {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with the [part]
+           optional argument, which becomes the default}%
+        \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}%
+       }%
+       {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}}%
+{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define a flag and the command \verb|\mtcfixindex|, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF
+% and the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons un indicateur et la commande \verb|\mtcfixindex|, qui ajoute les lignes n�cessaires dans
+% la table des mati�res, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false
+\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{%
+   \@mtcfixindex@false
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \if@mtcfixindex@
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
+   \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax
+   \else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex\space is wrong}%
+      {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level),
+       or be part, chapter or section}%
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Correction de l'entr�e <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des mati�res}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcfixglossary[part|chapter|section]+
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Depending of the document class, the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
+% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
+% stored in the macro \verb|\mtc@glofix@level|. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning
+% message:
+% \or\relax
+% Selon la classe du document, l'entr�e <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des mati�res est trait�e comme un chapitre �toil�
+% ou une section �toil�e. Donc nous devons d'abord d�terminer la valeur par d�faut de l'argument optionnel. La
+% valeur par d�faut est alors rang�e dans la macro \verb|\mtc@glofix@level|. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
+% produit �ventuellement un message d'avertissement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}%
+      {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+       {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
+        \MessageBreak Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary\space %
+           without optional argument [part]}%
+       \@ifundefined{part}%
+         {\PackageError{minitoc}%
+            {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
+            {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}%
+       {\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+          {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used with the [part]
+           optional argument, which becomes the default}%
+        \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}%
+       }%
+       {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}}%
+{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define a flag (\texttt{\bs if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \verb|\mtcfixglossary|, which adds
+% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous d�finissons un indicateur et la commande \verb|\mtcfixglossary|, qui ajoute les lignes n�cessaires dans
+% la table des mati�res, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false
+\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{%
+   \@mtcfixglossary@false
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \if@mtcfixglossary@
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
+   \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax
+   \else
+   \PackageError{minitoc}%
+      {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary\space is wrong}%
+      {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level),
+       or be part, chapter or section}%
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command loads a minitoc language definition file \emph{language}\texttt{.mld} to set the language-dependent
+% titles for the mini-tables.
+% But first, we verify that this file exists.
+% The flag \texttt{\bs if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc de d�finition de langue \emph{langue}\texttt{.mld} pour �tablir les
+% titres d�pendants de la langue pour les mini-tables.
+% Mais au pr�alable, nous v�rifions que ce fichier existe.
+% L'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous smmes dans cette macro.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false
+\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{%
+     \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}%
+       {\PackageInfo{minitoc}{#1 language selected.%
+         \MessageBreak}}%
+       {\PackageError{minitoc}%
+          {#1 is not a known language, \MessageBreak
+           #1.mld not found. \MessageBreak
+           Command ignored}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation. \MessageBreak
+           Correct the source using a valid language name. \MessageBreak
+           Press RETURN}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande interne \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\texttt{.mlo}\index{.mlo} to set the language-dependent
+% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed.
+% This command is used only in some \texttt{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal
+% processing of \texttt{minitoc.dtx}. The \texttt{.mlo} files are generated by \texttt{filecontents} environments in the
+% \texttt{minitoc.ins} file.
+% But first, we verify that this \texttt{.mlo} file exists.
+%
+% This command\virage{} should not be directly invoked by the user. This is verified via the flag
+% \texttt{\bs if@mtc@insellang@}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\texttt{.mlo}\index{.mlo} pour �tablir les
+% titres d�pendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caract�res exotiques sont n�cessaires.
+% Cette commande n'est utilis�e que dans certains fichiers \texttt{.mld}, lorsque les cha�nes de titres ne peuvent
+% pas �tre produites par le traitement normal de \texttt{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \texttt{.mlo} sont produits
+% par des environments \texttt{filecontents} dans le fichier \texttt{minitoc.ins}.
+% Mais au pr�alable, nous v�rifions que ce fichier \texttt{.mlo} existe.
+%
+% Cette commande\virage{} ne devrait pas �tre invoqu�e directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est v�rifi� gr�ce
+% �~l'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@insellang@}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcloadmlo#1{%
+     \if@mtc@insellang@
+     \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}%
+       {\PackageInfo{minitoc}{#1 minitoc language object selected.%
+         \MessageBreak}}%
+       {\PackageError{minitoc}%
+          {#1 is not a known minitoc language object file (.mlo), \MessageBreak
+           #1.mlo not found. \MessageBreak
+           Command ignored}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation. \MessageBreak
+           Correct the source using a valid language name. \MessageBreak
+           Press RETURN}}%
+     \else
+       \PackageError{minitoc}%
+           {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command\MessageBreak
+            outside of a .mld file}%
+           {It will be ignored}
+       \@mtc@insellang@false
+     \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les <<~pauses caf�~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \texttt{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special
+% entries, undotted, in the
+% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks'' in a conference. Hence we define \verb|\addcoffeeline|, \verb|\coffeeline| and
+% \verb|\l@coffee|, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le paquetage \texttt{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques
+% commandes pour ins�rer des entr�es sp�ciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des mati�res pour marquer les
+% <<~pauses caf�~>> dans une conf�rence. Donc nous d�finissons \verb|\addcoffeeline|, \verb|\coffeeline| et
+% \verb|\l@coffee|, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la
+% table des mati�res.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{%
+  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}}
+\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname}
+\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they
+% are defined.
+% \or\relax
+% Au d�but du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils
+% sont d�finis.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}
+\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{D�clarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options are just setting a flag.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{tight} and \texttt{loose}, \texttt{k-tight} and \texttt{k-loose}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{tight} et \texttt{loose}, \texttt{k-tight} et \texttt{k-loose}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kiftightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default
+\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{checkfiles} and \texttt{nocheckfiles}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{checkfiles} et \texttt{nocheckfiles}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuit� sur les fichiers des mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default
+\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{dotted} and \texttt{undotted}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \texttt{dotted} et \texttt{undotted}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Option \texttt{notoccite}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Option \texttt{notoccite}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option will later load the \texttt{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Option \texttt{shortext}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Option \texttt{shortext}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option forces the use of short extensions.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{shortext}{\@longextensions@false
+\PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc}%
+   {*** You have forced the use of short extensions ***}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \texttt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option is available only if \verb|\chapter| is not defined and \verb|\section| defined.
+% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option n'est disponible que si \verb|\chapter| n'est pas d�finie et \verb|\section| est d�finie.
+% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont �ventuellement permises
+% ensemble, peut-�tre dans un avenir lointain.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+                         {%
+                          \DeclareOption{insection}%
+                           {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}%
+                         }%
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\texttt{.mld} file via
+% the specialized macro \verb|\mtcselectlanguage|. If the file
+% does not exists, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order.
+% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\texttt{.mld} file for
+% each language option, but this file can load another one (as \texttt{francais.mld} loads \texttt{french.mld}).
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\texttt{.mld} correspondant via
+% la macro sp�cialis�e \verb|\mtcselectlanguage| macro. Si le fichier
+% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affich�. Les options de langue sont (devraient) �tre par ordre
+% alphab�tique. Plusieurs options pourraient charger le m�me fichier, mais, par convention, il devrait y~avoir un
+% fichier \emph{langue}\texttt{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, mais ce fichier peut en charger un autre
+% (ainsi \texttt{francais.mld} charge \texttt{french.mld}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{acadian}{\mtcselectlanguage{acadian}}%
+\DeclareOption{acadien}{\mtcselectlanguage{acadien}}%
+\DeclareOption{afrikaan}{\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}}%
+\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaans}}%
+\DeclareOption{american}{\mtcselectlanguage{american}}%
+\DeclareOption{arab}{\mtcselectlanguage{arab}}%
+\DeclareOption{arabic}{\mtcselectlanguage{arabic}}%
+\DeclareOption{armenian}{\mtcselectlanguage{armenian}}%
+\DeclareOption{austrian}{\mtcselectlanguage{austrian}}%
+\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\mtcselectlanguage{bahasa}}%
+\DeclareOption{bangla}{\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}}%
+\DeclareOption{basque}{\mtcselectlanguage{basque}}%
+\DeclareOption{bicig}{\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}}%
+\DeclareOption{brazil}{\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}}%
+\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\mtcselectlanguage{brazilian}}%
+\DeclareOption{breton}{\mtcselectlanguage{breton}}%
+\DeclareOption{british}{\mtcselectlanguage{british}}%
+\DeclareOption{bulgarian}{\mtcselectlanguage{bulgarian}}%
+\DeclareOption{bulgarianb}{\mtcselectlanguage{bulgarianb}}%
+\DeclareOption{buryat}{\mtcselectlanguage{buryat}}%
+\DeclareOption{canadian}{\mtcselectlanguage{canadian}}%
+\DeclareOption{canadien}{\mtcselectlanguage{canadien}}%
+\DeclareOption{castillan}{\mtcselectlanguage{castillan}}%
+\DeclareOption{castillian}{\mtcselectlanguage{castillian}}%
+\DeclareOption{catalan}{\mtcselectlanguage{catalan}}%
+\DeclareOption{chinese1}{\mtcselectlanguage{chinese1}}%
+\DeclareOption{chinese2}{\mtcselectlanguage{chinese2}}%
+\DeclareOption{croatian}{\mtcselectlanguage{croatian}}%
+\DeclareOption{czech}{\mtcselectlanguage{czech}}%
+\DeclareOption{danish}{\mtcselectlanguage{danish}}%
+\DeclareOption{dutch}{\mtcselectlanguage{dutch}}%
+\DeclareOption{english}{\mtcselectlanguage{english}}%
+\DeclareOption{esperant}{\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}}%
+\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\mtcselectlanguage{esperanto}}%
+\DeclareOption{estonian}{\mtcselectlanguage{estonian}}%
+\DeclareOption{ethiopia}{\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}}%
+\DeclareOption{ethiopian}{\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopian}}%
+\DeclareOption{farsi1}{\mtcselectlanguage{farsi1}}%
+\DeclareOption{farsi2}{\mtcselectlanguage{farsi2}}%
+\DeclareOption{finnish}{\mtcselectlanguage{finnish}}%
+\DeclareOption{finnish2}{\mtcselectlanguage{finnish2}}%
+\DeclareOption{francais}{\mtcselectlanguage{francais}}%
+\DeclareOption{french}{\mtcselectlanguage{french}}%
+\DeclareOption{frenchb}{\mtcselectlanguage{frenchb}}%
+\DeclareOption{frenchle}{\mtcselectlanguage{frenchle}}%
+\DeclareOption{frenchpro}{\mtcselectlanguage{frenchpro}}%
+\DeclareOption{galician}{\mtcselectlanguage{galician}}%
+\DeclareOption{german}{\mtcselectlanguage{german}}%
+\DeclareOption{germanb}{\mtcselectlanguage{germanb}}%
+\DeclareOption{greek}{\mtcselectlanguage{greek}}%
+\DeclareOption{greek-mono}{\mtcselectlanguage{greek-mono}}%
+\DeclareOption{greek-polydemo}{\mtcselectlanguage{greek-polydemo}}%
+\DeclareOption{greek-polykatha}{\mtcselectlanguage{greek-polykatha}}%
+\DeclareOption{guarani}{\mtcselectlanguage{guarani}}%
+\DeclareOption{hangul1}{\mtcselectlanguage{hangul1}}%
+\DeclareOption{hangul2}{\mtcselectlanguage{hangul2}}%
+\DeclareOption{hangul3}{\mtcselectlanguage{hangul3}}%
+\DeclareOption{hangul4}{\mtcselectlanguage{hangul4}}%
+\DeclareOption{hanja1}{\mtcselectlanguage{hanja1}}%
+\DeclareOption{hanja2}{\mtcselectlanguage{hanja2}}%
+\DeclareOption{hebrew}{\mtcselectlanguage{hebrew}}%
+\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\mtcselectlanguage{hungarian}}%
+\DeclareOption{icelandic}{\mtcselectlanguage{icelandic}}%
+\DeclareOption{interlingua}{\mtcselectlanguage{interlingua}}%
+\DeclareOption{irish}{\mtcselectlanguage{irish}}%
+\DeclareOption{italian}{\mtcselectlanguage{italian}}%
+\DeclareOption{japanese}{\mtcselectlanguage{japanese}}%
+\DeclareOption{japanese2}{\mtcselectlanguage{japanese2}}%
+\DeclareOption{japanese3}{\mtcselectlanguage{japanese3}}%
+\DeclareOption{japanese4}{\mtcselectlanguage{japanese4}}%
+\DeclareOption{japanese5}{\mtcselectlanguage{japanese5}}%
+\DeclareOption{latin}{\mtcselectlanguage{latin}}%
+\DeclareOption{latin2}{\mtcselectlanguage{latin2}}%
+\DeclareOption{latvian}{\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}}%
+\DeclareOption{letton}{\mtcselectlanguage{letton}}%
+\DeclareOption{lithuanian}{\mtcselectlanguage{lithuanian}}%
+\DeclareOption{lsorbian}{\mtcselectlanguage{lsorbian}}%
+\DeclareOption{magyar}{\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}}%
+\DeclareOption{magyar2}{\mtcselectlanguage{magyar2}}%
+\DeclareOption{malayalam-keli}{\mtcselectlanguage{malayalam-keli}}%
+\DeclareOption{malayalam-rachana}{\mtcselectlanguage{malayalam-rachana}}%
+\DeclareOption{malayalam-rachana2}{\mtcselectlanguage{malayalam-rachana2}}%
+\DeclareOption{mongol}{\mtcselectlanguage{mongol}}%
+\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\mtcselectlanguage{naustrian}}%
+\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\mtcselectlanguage{ngerman}}%
+\DeclareOption{ngermanb}{\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}}%
+\DeclareOption{norsk}{\mtcselectlanguage{norsk}}%
+\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\mtcselectlanguage{nynorsk}}%
+\DeclareOption{polish}{\mtcselectlanguage{polish}}%
+\DeclareOption{polish2}{\mtcselectlanguage{polish2}}%
+\DeclareOption{portuges}{\mtcselectlanguage{portuges}}%
+\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}}%
+\DeclareOption{romanian}{\mtcselectlanguage{romanian}}%
+\DeclareOption{russian}{\mtcselectlanguage{russian}}%
+\DeclareOption{russianb}{\mtcselectlanguage{russianb}}%
+\DeclareOption{russianc}{\mtcselectlanguage{russianc}}%
+\DeclareOption{russian2m}{\mtcselectlanguage{russian2m}}%
+\DeclareOption{russian2o}{\mtcselectlanguage{russian2o}}%
+\DeclareOption{samin}{\mtcselectlanguage{samin}}%
+\DeclareOption{scottish}{\mtcselectlanguage{scottish}}%
+\DeclareOption{serbian}{\mtcselectlanguage{serbian}}%
+\DeclareOption{serbianc}{\mtcselectlanguage{serbianc}}%
+\DeclareOption{slovak}{\mtcselectlanguage{slovak}}%
+\DeclareOption{slovene}{\mtcselectlanguage{slovene}}%
+\DeclareOption{spanish}{\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}}%
+\DeclareOption{spanish2}{\mtcselectlanguage{spanish2}}%
+\DeclareOption{spanish3}{\mtcselectlanguage{spanish3}}%
+\DeclareOption{swedish}{\mtcselectlanguage{swedish}}%
+\DeclareOption{thai}{\mtcselectlanguage{thai}}%
+\DeclareOption{turkish}{\mtcselectlanguage{turkish}}%
+\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\mtcselectlanguage{UKenglish}}%
+\DeclareOption{ukraineb}{\mtcselectlanguage{ukraineb}}%
+\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\mtcselectlanguage{USenglish}}%
+\DeclareOption{usorbian}{\mtcselectlanguage{usorbian}}%
+\DeclareOption{vietnam}{\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}}%
+\DeclareOption{vietnamese}{\mtcselectlanguage{vietnamese}}%
+\DeclareOption{welsh}{\mtcselectlanguage{welsh}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \texttt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we define some flags:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The flag \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \texttt{hints} option is required (default).
+%
+% \item The flag \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been
+%       altered since the loading of the document class.
+%
+% \item The flag \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \texttt{hints} option detects something curious
+%       and writes messages in the \texttt{.log} file.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous d�finissons quelques indicateurs:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item L'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \texttt{hints} est demand�e (d�faut).
+%
+% \item L'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@w@} est forc� �~vrai si nous d�tectons que certaines commandes de
+%       sectionnement ont �t� alt�r�es depuis le chargement de la classe de document.
+%
+% \item L'indicateur \texttt{\bs if@mtc@hints@given@} est forc� �~vrai si l'option \texttt{hints} d�tecte quelque
+%       chose de curieux et �crit des messages dans le fichier \texttt{.log}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare the \texttt{hints} (default) and \texttt{nohints} options:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�clarons les options \texttt{hints} (d�faut) et \texttt{nohints}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true}
+\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \verb|\mtc@hints@begindoc|, is executed via
+% \verb|\AtBeginDocument| and looks if some packages or classes are loaded and gives warnings about their compatibility
+% with \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option \texttt{hints} est constitu�e de trois parties: la premi�re, \verb|\mtc@hints@begindoc|, est ex�cut�e
+% via \verb|\AtBeginDocument| et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont charg�s, puis donne des
+% avertissements �~propos de leur compatibilit� avec \texttt{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \texttt{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros
+% are called in the right order.
+% \or\relax
+% La deuxi�me partie est faite de petits fragments de code ins�r�s dans le code de \texttt{minitoc}, pour v�rifier
+% que certaines macros sont appel�es dans le bon ordre.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The third and last part, \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc|, is executed via \verb|\AtEndDocument| and examines some flags set
+% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \texttt{.log} file and/or warnings on
+% the screen and in the \texttt{.log} file. Note that the \texttt{hints} option does not signal errors, only infos
+% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run.
+% \or\relax
+% La troisi�me et derni�re partie, \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc|, est ex�cut�e via \verb|\AtEndDocument| et examine
+% certains indicateurs positionn�s par les premi�re et deuxi�me parties. Puis, si n�cessaire, elle �crit quelques
+% informations dans le fichier \texttt{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'�cran et dans le fichier \texttt{.log}.
+% Notez que l'option \texttt{hints} ne signale pas d'erreurs, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et
+% donc elle n'interrompt pas l'ex�cution de \LaTeX.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{First part: \texttt{\bs mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Premi�re partie: \texttt{\bs mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare the first part of the \texttt{hints} option (for \verb|\AtBeginDocument|):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�clarons la premi�re partie de l'option \texttt{hints} (pour \verb|\AtBeginDocument|):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{%
+\PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {***** You requested the hints option *****\MessageBreak
+    ***** Some hints are eventually given below *****\@gobble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{appendix} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{appendix}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of the \texttt{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{appendix}~\cite{appendix}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{%
+\@mtc@hints@given@true
+\PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {--- The appendix package is loaded. \MessageBreak
+    See the minitoc package documentation\MessageBreak
+    for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{tocbibind} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{tocbibind}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of the \texttt{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {--- The tocbibind package is loaded. \MessageBreak
+       See the minitoc package documentation
+       for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{tocloft} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{tocloft}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of the \texttt{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The tocloft package is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation
+        for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{titletoc} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{titletoc}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of the \texttt{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning, because this package
+% is incompatible with \texttt{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc}, et �mettons un avertissement, puisque
+% ce paquetage est incompatible avec \texttt{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The titletoc package is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{placeins} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{placeins}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if the \texttt{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check that the right options
+% are selected:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si le paquetage \texttt{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est charg� et, si oui, nous regardons si les
+% bonnes options ont �t� choisies:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
+   {\if@mtc@ss@insection@
+    \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section,below}{}%
+       {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+        \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+           {--- The placeins package is loaded without
+            \MessageBreak
+            section and below options, but minitoc used
+            \MessageBreak
+            the insection option which implies them.
+            \MessageBreak
+            Try to inverse the loading order and use coherent options.
+            \MessageBreak
+            You may have got a message
+              ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}%
+       }%
+    \fi
+   \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{%
+      \@mtc@hints@given@true
+      \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+	 {--- The placeins package loaded is
+	  \MessageBreak
+	  too old. It should have a version date of
+	  \MessageBreak
+	  2005/04/18 at least}%
+   }%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{memoir} class}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \texttt{memoir}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if the \texttt{memoir} class~\cite{memoir} is loaded:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la classe \texttt{memoir}~\cite{memoir} est charg�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The memoir class is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{amsart} and \texttt{amsproc} classes}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \texttt{amsart} et \texttt{amsproc}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test is the \texttt{amsart} or \texttt{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning, because thess classes are
+% incompatible with \texttt{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si l'une des classes \texttt{amsart} ou \texttt{amsproc} a �t� charg�e et �mettons un
+% avertissement, puisque ces classes sont incompatibles avec \texttt{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{amsart}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsart class is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible with the minitoc package}}{}%
+\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsproc class is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{amsbook} class}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \texttt{amsbook}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if the \texttt{amsbook} class is loaded:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la classe \texttt{amsbook} est charg�e:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsbook class is loaded. \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \texttt{abstract} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{abstract}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of the \texttt{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}%
+   {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true%
+   \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}%
+      {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {The ``abstract'' package has been loaded with\MessageBreak
+           the ``addtotoc'' option.\MessageBreak
+           You need to look at the documentation to adjust.}
+      }}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'alt�ration des commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To check if the sectionning commands \verb|\part|, \verb|\chapter| or \verb|\section| have been altered by some
+% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing a \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block) with their saved
+% versions (saved by the
+% \texttt{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \verb|\mtc@hints@part|, \verb|\mtc@hints@chapter| and
+% \verb|\mtc@hints@section|. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself,
+% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \texttt{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} may interfere,
+% hence the formal precautions in the messages.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour v�rifier si les commandes de sectionnement \verb|\part|, \verb|\chapter| ou \verb|\section| ont �t� alt�r�es
+% par un paquetage ou dans le pr�ambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'ex�cution d'un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument|)
+% avec leurs versions sauvegard�es (par le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \verb|\mtc@hints@part|,
+% \verb|\mtc@hints@chapter| et \verb|\mtc@hints@section|. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous
+% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-m�me, sa branche non �toil�e et sa branche �toil�e. Mais le
+% paquetage \texttt{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut interf�rer, d'o� les pr�cautions formelles dans les messages.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \texttt{\bs part}}:
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Alt�ration de \texttt{\bs part}}:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We check the alteration of \verb|\part|, \verb|\@part| and \verb|\@spart|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si \verb|\part|, \verb|\@part| and \verb|\@spart| ont �t� alt�r�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\part\space command is altered after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \texttt{\bs chapter}}:
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Alt�ration de \texttt{\bs chapter}}:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We check the alteration of \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\@chapter| and \verb|\@schapter|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si \verb|\chapter|, \verb|\@chapter| and \verb|\@schapter| ont �t� alt�r�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \texttt{\bs section}}:
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Alt�ration de \texttt{\bs section}}:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We check the alteration of \verb|\section|, \verb|\@sect| and \verb|\@ssect|:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si \verb|\section|, \verb|\@sect| and \verb|\@ssect| ont �t� alt�r�es:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\section\space command is altered after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+  \relax\else\fi}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the coherence of the calling sequences of some commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la coh�rence des s�quences d'appel de certaines commandes}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And finally, we prepare the coherence tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands
+% like \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\parttoc| and \verb|\[fake]listofcontents|, and similar: to be able to use
+% \verb|\parttoc|, a table of contents file must have been
+% created via \verb|\[fake]listofcontents| and splitted into parttoc files via \verb|\doparttoc|.
+% \or\relax
+% Et enfin, nous pr�parons les tests de coh�rence sur les s�quences d'appel de triplets de commandes associ�es
+% telles que \verb|\doparttoc|, \verb|\parttoc| et \verb|\[fake]listofcontents|, et similaires: pour pouvoir
+% utiliser \verb|\parttoc|, un fichier table des mati�res doit avoir �t� cr�� via \verb|\[fake]listofcontents| et
+% �clat� en fichiers parttocs via \verb|\doparttoc|.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Hence we declare some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous d�clarons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@
+\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false
+\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false
+\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for
+% the main summaries:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions les commandes concern�es pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont
+% utilis�es. Nous commen�ons par les commandes des sommaires principaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
+\def\tableofcontents%
+   {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
+\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures
+\def\listoffigures%
+   {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
+\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables
+\def\listoftables%
+   {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, their ``fake'' siblings:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@sv@faketableofcontents\faketableofcontents
+\def\faketableofcontents%
+   {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@faketableofcontents}
+\let\mtc@sv@fakelistoffigures\fakelistoffigures
+\def\fakelistoffigures%
+   {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fakelistoffigures}
+\let\mtc@sv@fakelistoftables\fakelistoftables
+\def\fakelistoftables%
+   {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fakelistoftables}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the \verb|\mtc@hints@begindoc| definition is finished (it begins in
+% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
+% \or\relax
+% Et la d�finition de \verb|\mtc@hints@begindoc| est termin�e (elle commence �~la
+% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Final part: \texttt{\bs mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Partie finale: \texttt{\bs mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part of the \texttt{hints} option is executed via \verb|\AtEndDocument|. Its code is in the
+% \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc| macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set
+% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc| macro:
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale de l'option \texttt{hints} est ex�cut�e via \verb|\AtEndDocument|. Son code est dans la
+% macro \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc|. C'est une s�quence de tests sur les paquetages et classes charg�s et sur les
+% indicateurs positionn�s durant les premi�re et deuxi�me parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous d�clarons
+% la macro \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about \texttt{\bs sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \texttt{insection} option}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \texttt{\bs sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \texttt{insection}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont �t� demand�es au niveau section.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If yes, we verify that the
+% \texttt{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \texttt{insection}
+% option of the \texttt{minitoc} package has been invoked.
+% If not, a warning is given.
+% \or\relax
+% Si oui, nous
+% v�rifions que le paquetage \texttt{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a �t� charg� avec les options correctes ou que
+% l'option \texttt{insection} du paquetage \texttt{minitoc} a �t� invoqu�e.
+% Sinon, un avertissement est �mis.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@
+\else
+  \if@mtc@sect@floats@%
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {***** You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or \MessageBreak
+       \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       hence the ``insection'' package option is recommended. *****}%
+   \@mtc@hints@w@true
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the coherence tests}\label{ss+final.coh}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de coh�rence}\label{ss+final.coh}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if \verb|\parttoc| has been used without \verb|\doparttoc|, etc., for each pair
+% of preparation/insertion commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si \verb|\parttoc| a �t� utilis�e \verb|\doparttoc|, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes
+% pr�paration/insertion.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the part level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les commandes au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@parttoc@used@
+   \if@doparttoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\parttoc\space
+       but not \string\doparttoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlof@used@
+   \if@dopartlof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\partlof\space
+       but not \string\dopartlof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlot@used@
+   \if@dopartlot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\partlot\space
+       but not \string\dopartlot\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the chapter level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les commandes au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@minitoc@used@
+   \if@dominitoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minitoc\space
+       but not \string\dominitoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilof@used@
+   \if@dominilof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minilof\space
+       but not \string\dominilof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilot@used@
+   \if@dominilot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minilot\space
+       but not \string\dominilot\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les commandes au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@secttoc@used@
+   \if@dosecttoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\secttoc\space
+       but not \string\dosecttoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlof@used@
+   \if@dosectlof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\sectlof\space
+       but not \string\dosectlof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlot@used@
+   \if@dosectlot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\sectlot\space
+       but not \string\dosectlot\space*****}
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{V�rifier si les tables principales ont �t� pr�par�es (premi�re partie)}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we test if a \verb|\doparttoc| macro has been called but without any matching \verb|\parttoc|, hence its a
+% vain call. We do the same for each analog command.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \verb|\doparttoc| a �t� appel�e sans aucune commande \verb|\parttoc|
+% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de m�me pour chaque commande analogue.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@doparttoc@used@
+   \if@parttoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\doparttoc\space
+       but not \string\parttoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dopartlof@used@
+   \if@partlof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dopartlof\space
+       but not \string\partlof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dopartlot@used@
+   \if@partlot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dopartlot\space
+       but not \string\partlot\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@dominitoc@used@
+   \if@minitoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dominitoc\space
+       but not \string\minitoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dominilof@used@
+   \if@minilof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dominilof\space
+       but not \string\minilof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dominilot@used@
+   \if@minilot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dominilot\space
+       but not \string\minilot\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@dosecttoc@used@
+   \if@secttoc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dosecttoc\space
+       but not \string\secttoc\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dosectlof@used@
+   \if@sectlof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dosectlof\space
+       but not \string\sectlof\space*****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dosectlot@used@
+   \if@sectlot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\dosectlot\space
+       but not \string\sectlot\space*****}
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{V�rifier si les tables principales ont �t� pr�par�es (seconde partie)}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Another coherence test verifies that if \verb|\parttoc| has been called, then the macro \verb|\tableofcontents| or
+% \verb|\faketableofcontents| has also been called (to create the necessary contents file); and similar tests are made
+% for the other mini-table commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Un autre test de coh�rence v�rifie que si \verb|\parttoc| a �t� appel�e, alors la macro \verb|\tableofcontents| ou
+% \verb|\faketableofcontents| a aussi �t� appel�e (pour cr�er le fichier de contenu n�cessaire); et des tests
+% similaires sont effectu�s pour les autres commandes de mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@parttoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\parttoc\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents\space nor
+       \string\faketableofcontents\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\partlof\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\listoffigures\space nor
+       \string\fakelistoffigures\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\partlot\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables\space nor
+       \string\fakelistoftables\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@minitoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minitoc\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents\space nor
+       \string\faketableofcontents\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minilof\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\listoffigures\space nor
+       \string\fakelistoffigures\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\minilot\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables\space nor
+       \string\fakelistoftables\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@secttoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\secttoc\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents\space nor
+       \string\faketableofcontents\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\sectlof\space but not\MessageBreak
+      \string\listoffigures\space nor
+      \string\fakelistoffigures\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {**** You have used \string\sectlot\space but not\MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables\space nor
+       \string\fakelistoftables\space *****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If short extensions are used, you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary
+% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \verb|\jobname.U100| has its name truncated to
+% \verb|\jobname.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The
+% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On
+% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les suffixes courts sont utilis�s, vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de
+% mini-tables sont cr��es, les fichiers auxiliaires seront �cras�s; le centi�me fichier minitoc \verb|\jobname.U100|
+% a son nom tronqu� �~\verb|\jobname.U10|, qui est d�j� le dixi�me fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une
+% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le rem�de est amer et
+% co�teux: soit utiliser un meilleur syst�me d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.},
+% soit revoir la conception du document.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{%
+\if@longextensions@
+\else
+  \if@mtc@part@def@
+    \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}
+       \@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {**** You have used short extensions
+           and more than 99 parts *****}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@mtc@chapter@def@
+    \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}
+       \@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {**** You have used short extensions
+           and more than 99 chapters *****}
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if@mtc@section@def@
+      \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}
+         \@mtc@hints@given@true
+         \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+            {**** You have used short extensions
+             and more than 99 sections *****}
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi}
+\mtc@hints@checklongext
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \texttt{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if \texttt{sectsty}\index{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \texttt{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si \texttt{sectsty}\index{sectsty} a �t� charg� avant (correct) ou apr�s (incorrect) \texttt{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@
+     \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {**** The sectsty package should be loaded \MessageBreak
+           **before** the minitoc package ****}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont �t� d�tect�es}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test for each kind of mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty parttocs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For partlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les partlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@partlof@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty partlofs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For partlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les partlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@partlot@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty partlots ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minitocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty minitocs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minilofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minilofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minilof@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty minilofs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minilots:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minilots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minilot@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty minilots ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For secttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les secttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty secttocs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For sectlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sectlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For sectlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sectlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have attempted to insert empty sectlots ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG
+% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsol�tes ont �t� utilis�es}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG
+% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled in the \texttt{.log}
+% file.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas o� vous auriez utilis� des commandes obsol�tes, qui sont aussi
+% signal�es dans le fichier \texttt{.log}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \texttt{\bs firstpartis}:
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsol�te \texttt{\bs firstpartis}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstpartis@used@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have invoked an obsolete command: \string\firstpartis\space ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \texttt{\bs firstchapteris}:
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsol�te \texttt{\bs firstchapteris}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstchapteris@used@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have invoked an obsolete command: \string\firstchapteris\space ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \texttt{\bs firstsectionis}:
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsol�te \texttt{\bs firstsectionis}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstsectionis@used@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {**** You have invoked an obsolete command: \string\firstsectionis\space ****}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont �t� �crits}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We come at the end of the third part of the \texttt{hints} option: if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed;
+% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \texttt{.log} file if no problems have been detected.
+% And we terminate the \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc|
+% macro by a closing brace.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous arrivons �~la fin de la troisi�me partie de l'option \texttt{hints}: si des probl�mes ont �t� d�tect�s, un
+% avertissement est affich�; cet avertissement n'est pas affich� mais seulement �crit dans le fichier
+% \texttt{.log} si aucun probl�me n'a �t� d�tect�. Et nous terminons la macro \verb|\mtc@hints@enddoc| par une
+% accolade fermante.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@given@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {***** Some hints have been written\MessageBreak
+       in the \jobname.log file. *****}
+\else
+   \PackageInfo{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {***** No hints have been written\MessageBreak
+       in the \jobname.log file. *****\@gobble}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions{english}}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we apply the default language option, \texttt{english}:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous ex�cutons l'option de langue par d�faut, \texttt{english}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ExecuteOptions{english}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the
+% language options.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous ex�cutons toutes les options demand�es; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement
+% �~positionner un indicateur, ou �~charger un fichier pour les options de langue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions*
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et ex�cutons les actions n�cessaires.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \texttt{insection} option}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \texttt{insection}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \texttt{insection} option, we load the \texttt{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options
+% \texttt{verbose}, \texttt{section} and \texttt{below}; the correct loading is verified:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \texttt{insection}, nous chargeons le paquetage \texttt{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options
+% \texttt{verbose}, \texttt{section} et \texttt{below}; le chargement correct est v�rifi�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@ss@insection@
+   \RequirePackage[section,below,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]%
+   \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
+      {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}%
+      {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \texttt{notoccite} option}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \texttt{notoccite}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \texttt{notoccite} option, we just load the \texttt{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \texttt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \texttt{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@notoccite@
+   \RequirePackage{notoccite}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \texttt{hints} option}\index{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \texttt{hints}}\index{hints}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \texttt{hints} option, we set its first part in a \verb|\AtBeginDocument| block and its third (last) part
+% in a \verb|\AtEndDocument| block:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \texttt{hints}, nous pla�ons sa premi�re partie dans un bloc \verb|\AtBeginDocument| et sa
+% troisi�me (derni�re) partie dans un bloc \verb|\AtEndDocument|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}%
+   \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches),
+% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \texttt{hints} option executed in the preamble):
+% \or\relax
+% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les d�finitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non �toil�es et
+% �toil�es), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \texttt{hints} ex�cut�e dans le pr�ambule).
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \verb|\part| command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \verb|\part|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \verb|\chapter| command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \verb|\chapter|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \verb|\section| command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \verb|\section|:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the package is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Et le paquetage est termin�.
+% \fi
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</minitoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} file}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le fichier \texttt{fminitoc.dtx}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \begin{macro}{\input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its r�le is to
+% set \texttt{\bs jobname} to \texttt{fminitoc} in place of \texttt{fminitoc}. As \texttt{minitoc.ins}
+% generates the files \texttt{minitoc.lan} and \texttt{fminitoc.lan} which sets a language number \verb|\LANG|,
+% and \texttt{minitoc.dtx} reads \texttt{\bs jobname.lan}, the documentation can be in several languages
+% (english and french) in
+% \texttt{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \texttt{\bs ifcase\bs LANG\bs relax} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs or\bs relax}
+% \ldots\ \texttt{\bs fi} constructs. The \texttt{\bs relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce court fichier est n�cessaire pour cr�er la documentation en fran�ais. Son r�le est de forcer \texttt{\bs jobname}
+% �~\texttt{fminitoc} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \texttt{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers
+% \texttt{minitoc.lan} et \texttt{fminitoc.lan} qui �tablissent un num�ro de langue \verb|\LANG|, et comme
+% \texttt{minitoc.dtx} lit \texttt{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut �tre en plusieurs langues
+% (anglais et fran�ais) dans \texttt{minitoc.dtx}, la langue �tant choisie par des constructions
+% \texttt{\bs ifcase\bs LANG\bs relax} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs or\bs relax} \ldots\ \texttt{\bs fi}. Les primitives
+% \texttt{\bs relax} sont n�cessaires pour �viter de mauvaises surprises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fminitoc>
+\ProvidesFile{fminitoc.dtx}[2005/09/16 minitoc french documentation start file]
+\input minitoc.dtx
+%</fminitoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Commented code of \texttt{mtcoff.sty}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Code comment� de \texttt{mtcoff.sty}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% ^^A \lsneed{3}
+% ^^A \minilof
+% ^^A \mtcskip
+% ^^A \lsneed{3}
+% ^^A \minilot
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why \texttt{mtcoff.sty}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi \texttt{mtcoff.sty}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc,fminitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source
+% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement
+% package, \texttt{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the
+% \texttt{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing
+% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \texttt{minitoc} package,
+% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc,fminitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur ins�re de nombreuses commandes
+% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le pr�ambule du document. D'o� le concept d'un
+% paquetage de remplacement, \texttt{mtcoff} (c'est-�-dire, �~\emph{minitoc off}~�), qui substitue �~toutes les
+% commandes et �~tous les environnements du paquetage \texttt{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant
+% les m�mes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf �mettre quelques avertissements b�nins, dans des cas
+% sp�ciaux). De cette mani�re, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'�crire,
+% dans le pr�ambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
+% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% then the \texttt{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way:
+% \or\relax
+% alors le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} est activ� avec les options sp�cifi�es. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de
+% la mani�re suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
+% \verb|\usepackage{mtcoff}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% then the \texttt{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much
+% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \texttt{minitoc}. Moreover,
+% this operation is reversible.
+% \or\relax
+% alors le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} est d�sactiv� et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignor�s. Ceci
+% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et s�r que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements
+% de \texttt{minitoc}. De plus, cette op�ration est r�versible.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for
+% the \texttt{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to
+% support \texttt{minitoc}.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et v�rifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette v�rification
+% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff} lui-m�me, mais il est bon de v�rifier que votre
+% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \texttt{minitoc}.}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtcoff>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2005/09/16 v43 The mtcoff package]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\count@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As \texttt{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \verb|\count@| or
+% \verb|\dimen@|. For \verb|\mtcskipamount|, we use its default definition, \verb|\bigskipamount|.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque \texttt{minitoc} d�clare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant
+% \verb|\count@| ou \verb|\dimen@|. Pour \verb|\mtcskipamount|, nous utilisons sa d�finition par d�faut,
+% \verb|\bigskipamount|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\c@minitocdepth\count@
+\let\mtcindent\dimen@
+\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount
+\let\c@parttocdepth\count@
+\let\ptcindent\dimen@
+\let\c@secttocdepth\count@
+\let\stcindent\dimen@
+\let\c@mtc\count@
+\let\c@ptc\count@
+\let\c@stc\count@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking simple user commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simuler les commandes utilisateur simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some user commands are easy to fake:
+% \or\relax
+% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles �~simuler:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcskip\relax
+\let\faketableofcontents\relax
+\let\fakelistoffigures\relax
+\let\fakelistoftables\relax
+\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\let\decrementptc\relax
+\let\decrementmtc\relax
+\let\decrementstc\relax
+\let\incrementptc\relax
+\let\incrementmtc\relax
+\let\incrementstc\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appel�es directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales,
+% mais il faut les simuler:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\partend\relax
+\let\partbegin\relax
+\let\chapterend\relax
+\let\chapterbegin\relax
+\let\sectend\relax
+\let\sectbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking user commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simulation des commandes utilisateur ayant un \mbox{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \verb|\@ifnextchar| (to get
+% the optional argument) and the new utility command \verb|\gobbleopt@|.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simul�es en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{}
+% \verb|\@ifnextchar| (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \verb|\gobbleopt@|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\psection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We need also to disable some \texttt{minitoc} commands, with \verb|\relax| (macros with no argument) or
+% \verb|\@gobbletwo| (macros with two arguments):
+% \or\relax
+% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \texttt{minitoc}, avec \verb|\relax| (macros sans argument) ou
+% \verb|\@gobbletwo| (macros avec arguments):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tf@mtc\count@
+\let\mtc@string\relax
+\let\appendixmtc\relax
+\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo
+\let\xchapter\relax
+\let\pchapter\relax
+\let\psection\relax
+\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo
+\let\xpart\relax
+\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo
+\let\xsect\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{D�sactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the \texttt{minitoc} font commands (like \verb|\mtcSSfont|) with \verb|\empty|, because some users
+% might have used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous d�sactivons commandes de fonte de \texttt{minitoc} (telles que \verb|\mtcSSfont|) avec \verb|\empty|, car
+% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilis�:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{...}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% which will not work if we use \verb|\relax| here.
+% \or\relax
+% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \verb|\relax| ici.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ptcfont\empty
+\let\ptcCfont\empty
+\let\ptcSfont\empty
+\let\ptcSSfont\empty
+\let\ptcSSSfont\empty
+\let\ptcPfont\empty
+\let\ptcSPfont\empty
+\let\plffont\empty
+\let\pltfont\empty
+\let\ptifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcfont\empty
+\let\mtcSfont\empty
+\let\mtcSSfont\empty
+\let\mtcSSSfont\empty
+\let\mtcPfont\empty
+\let\mtcSPfont\empty
+\let\mlffont\empty
+\let\mltfont\empty
+\let\mtifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\stcfont\empty
+\let\stcSSfont\empty
+\let\stcSSSfont\empty
+\let\stcPfont\empty
+\let\stcSPfont\empty
+\let\slffont\empty
+\let\sltfont\empty
+\let\stifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Font for ``coffee'' lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Fonte pour les lignes de �~pause-caf�~�:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\coffeefont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo
+\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty}
+\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo
+\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo
+\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty}
+\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty}
+\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo
+\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the new \texttt{\bs l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+dissabling.l@XXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \texttt{\bs l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+dissabling.l@XXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \texttt{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning
+% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \texttt{minitoc} d�finit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entr�es de la
+% table des mati�res pour des commandes de sectionnement �toil�es. Nous revenons �~la version non �toil�e, lorsque
+% cela est n�cessaire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
+\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
+\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
+\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete,commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsol�tes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete,commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsol�tes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\firstpartis\@gobble
+\let\firstchapteris\@gobble
+\let\firstsectionis\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command has one mandatory argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande a un seul argument, obligatoire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command has one mandatory argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande a un seul argument, obligatoire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
+% % \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands have no argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ptcrule\relax
+\let\noptcrule\relax
+\let\mtcrule\relax
+\let\nomtcrule\relax
+\let\stcrule\relax
+\let\nostcrule\relax
+\let\plfrule\relax
+\let\noplfrule\relax
+\let\mlfrule\relax
+\let\nomlfrule\relax
+\let\slfrule\relax
+\let\noslfrule\relax
+\let\pltrule\relax
+\let\nopltrule\relax
+\let\mltrule\relax
+\let\nomltrule\relax
+\let\sltrule\relax
+\let\nosltrule\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les num�ros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands have no argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\stcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\slfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\plfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\mltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\sltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\pltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the commands for features (like \verb|\beforeparttoc|) with \verb|\empty|, because some users may have
+% used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \verb|\beforeparttoc|) avec \verb|\empty|, car
+% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\beforeparttoc}{...}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% which will not work if we use \verb|\relax| here. These commands have no argument,
+% \or\relax
+% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \verb|\relax| ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument,
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeparttoc\empty
+\let\beforepartlof\empty
+\let\beforepartlot\empty
+\let\afterparttoc\empty
+\let\afterpartlof\empty
+\let\afterpartlot\empty
+\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty
+\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty
+\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeminitoc\empty
+\let\beforeminilof\empty
+\let\beforeminilot\empty
+\let\afterminitoc\empty
+\let\afterminilof\empty
+\let\afterminilot\empty
+\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty
+\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty
+\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforesecttoc\empty
+\let\beforesectlof\empty
+\let\beforesectlot\empty
+\let\aftersecttoc\empty
+\let\aftersectlof\empty
+\let\aftersectlot\empty
+\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty
+\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty
+\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@longextensions@}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare:
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de d�clarer:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@longextensions@ \@longextensions@true
+\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse
+\let\l@listof\chapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section[Caution for some commands]{Caution for some commands\protect\virage}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
+% \or\relax
+% \section[Pr�caution pour certaines commandes]{Pr�caution pour certaines commandes\protect\virage}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \texttt{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using the
+% \texttt{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and a \verb|\AtEndDocument| block to signal
+% that you have used these commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Certaines commandes de \texttt{minitoc} devraient �ventuellement �tre remplac�es si vous d�cidez d'arr�ter
+% \emph{d�finitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \texttt{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous d�clarons un
+% indicateur et un bloc \verb|\AtEndDocument| pour signaler que vous avez utilis� ces commandes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false
+\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@
+   \PackageWarningNoLine{mtcoff}%
+      {You should scan (backwards) your .log file to find
+       \MessageBreak
+       some commands needing to be replaced if you decide to
+       \MessageBreak
+       DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this document.
+       \MessageBreak
+       It is more wise to keep the \string\usepackage\space lines for
+       \MessageBreak
+       minitoc and mtcoff and to comment out only one of them}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then these commands are disabled and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number):
+% \or\relax
+% Puis ces commandes sont inhib�es de mani�re qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce
+% qui est utile pour avoir le num�ro de ligne):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced\MessageBreak
+    by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}\MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+\fi}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+      {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced\MessageBreak
+       by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}\MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+\fi}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+      {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced\MessageBreak
+       by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}\MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-caf�~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders
+% of dots:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les �~pauses-caf�~�, ainsi que la version
+% sp�cifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax}
+\let\coffeeline\@gobble
+\let\l@coffee\relax
+\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
+\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These environments accept one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]%
+   {\empty}{\empty}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
+   {\empty}{\empty}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
+   {\empty}{\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcficindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcficindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{\bs addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \texttt{\bs addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands should be replaced by standard commands, but \texttt{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which
+% will be reminded at the end of document:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes devraient �tre remplac�es par des commandes standard, mais \texttt{mtcoff} les simule et donne un
+% avertissement, qui sera rappel� en fin de document:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by\MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}\MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}
+\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by\MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}\MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}
+\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \PackageWarning{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by\MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}\MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the \texttt{mtcoff} package is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Et le paquetage \texttt{mtcoff} est termin�.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</mtcoff>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% ^^A %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Patch for the \texttt{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}
+% This code must be loaded to fix an incompatibality of the \texttt{minitoc} package
+% with recent versions of the \texttt{memoir.cls} class.
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \texttt{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}
+% Ce code doit �tre charg� pour corriger une incompatibilit� du paquetage \texttt{minitoc}
+% avec les versions r�centes de la classe \texttt{memoir.cls}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtcpatchmem>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
+\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}%
+   [2005/09/16 v43 Package mtcpatchmem]
+\PackageInfo{mtcpatchmem}%
+   {*** mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class ***\@gobble}
+\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
+  \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
+   \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
+}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
+% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as
+% entry for all fields.
+   \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty
+     \def\f@rtoc{#2}%
+     \def\f@rhdr{#2}%
+   \else
+% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only
+% one was found.
+     \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
+     \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+       \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
+     \else
+       \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+     \if@mainmatter
+       \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}%
+   \ifartopt
+     \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+     \@afterheading
+   \else
+     \insertchapterspace
+     \if@twocolumn
+       \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+     \else
+       \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+     \fi
+     \@afterheading
+   \fi
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+     \if@mainmatter
+       \ifanappendix
+         \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
+           \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+       \else
+         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
+           \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+       \fi
+     \else
+       \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
+     \fi
+   \else
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
+   \fi
+   \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi
+}
+%</mtcpatchmem>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{The minitoc language definition (\texttt{.mld}) and object (\texttt{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}
+% \markboth{\uppercase{CHAPITRE\ \thechapter{}.} THE MINITOC LANGUAGE DEFINITION (\texttt{.mld}) FILES}{\uppercase{CHAPITRE\ \thechapter{}.} THE MINITOC LANGUAGE DEFINITION (\texttt{.mld}) FILES}\index{.mld}\index{.mlo}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Les fichiers minitoc de d�finition (\texttt{.mld}) et objets (\texttt{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}
+% \markboth{\uppercase{CHAPITRE\ \thechapter{}.} LES FICHIERS MINITOC DE D�FINITION DE LANGUE (\texttt{.mld})}{\uppercase{CHAPITRE\ \thechapter{}.} LES FICHIERS MINITOC DE D�FINITION DE LANGUE (\texttt{.mld})}\index{.mld}\index{.mlo}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% ^^A \lsneed{3}
+% ^^A \minilof
+% ^^A \mtcskip
+% ^^A \minilot
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This chapter shows the code of each \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} file. A \texttt{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language
+% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some
+% comments about its origin, if you need further details. It is loaded either via a
+% package option\,\footnote{It can also be a global option for the document.} in the \verb|\usepackage| command
+% for the \texttt{minitoc} package, either via the command:
+% \or\relax
+% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld}. Un fichier \texttt{.mld} est un fichier
+% de d�finition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui d�finit les titres des
+% mini-tables pour une langue donn�e. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez
+% besoin de plus de d�tails. Il est charg� soit via une option du paquetage\,\footnote{Ce peut aussi �tre une
+% option globale pour le document.} dans la commande \verb|\usepackage| pour le paquetage \texttt{minitoc},
+% soit via la commande:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\mtcselectlanguage|\marg{language}
+% \end{verse}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents,
+% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels):
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque fichier \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} doit d�finir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des
+% mati�res, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section):
+% \fi
+% \begin{multicols}{3}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{\bs ptctitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs plftitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs plttitle}\columnbreak
+% \item \texttt{\bs mtctitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs mlftitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs mlttitle}\columnbreak
+% \item \texttt{\bs stctitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs slftitle}
+% \item \texttt{\bs slttitle}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Many \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a
+% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using
+% the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,BEP}, the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}, the ANTOMEGA
+% system~\cite{antomega}, the ArabTeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, Bang\TeX~\cite{bangtex},
+% \texttt{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, Farsi\TeX\ (\url{htp://www.farsitex.org}), \texttt{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
+% Malayalam~\cite{malayalam}, Mon\TeX~\cite{mlsquick,montex},
+% or Arm\TeX~\cite{armtex} packages.
+% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding
+% \texttt{.mld} file.
+% \or\relax
+% De nombreux fichiers \index{.mld}\texttt{.mld} ont besoin de fontes sp�ciales ad�quates pour la langue
+% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte
+% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage
+% \texttt{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,BEP}, le syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}, le syst�me ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega},
+% les paquetages ArabTeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, Bang\TeX~\cite{bangtex}, \texttt{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
+% Farsi\TeX\ ({\froff\url{htp://www.farsitex.org}}),
+% \texttt{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, Malayalam~\cite{malayalam}, Mon\TeX~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou Arm\TeX~\cite{armtex}.
+% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilis� pour nommer le fichier \texttt{.mld}
+% correspondant.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian) hangul (korean), hanja (korean), japanese and
+% thai variants.}, the source of the titles use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to maniputale in a
+% \texttt{.dtx} file, the \texttt{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading
+% a \index{.mlo}\texttt{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension
+% \texttt{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
+% \texttt{.dtx} files in the current version of \texttt{minitoc} package. The adequate input encoding must be set up
+% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \texttt{.mld} file via \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi
+% (iranien), du cor�en (hangul et hanja), du japonais et du tha�.}, le code source des titres utilise quelques
+% \virage\emph{codages exotiques},
+% difficiles �~manipuler dans un fichier \texttt{.dtx}, le fichier \texttt{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge
+% un fichier \index{.mlo}\texttt{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \texttt{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object},
+% objet minitoc de langage.}, qui n'est pas engendr� par les fichiers \texttt{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du
+% paquetage \texttt{minitoc}. Le codage d'entr�e ad�quat doit �tre mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le
+% chargement du fichier \texttt{.mld}  via \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{environment}{filecontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To go around this limitation, the \texttt{minitoc.ins} file uses
+% \texttt{filecontents} environments to generate the \texttt{.mlo} files.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \texttt{minitoc.ins} utilise des environnements \texttt{filecontents}
+% pour engendrer les fichiers \texttt{.mlo}.
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Acadian'' language: \texttt{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\index{acadian.mld}
+% The \texttt{acadian} language\,\FAC{}
+% is just french, so we load the \texttt{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \texttt{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\index{acadian.mld}
+% La langue \texttt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du fran�ais,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier texttt{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*acadian>
+\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</acadian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Acadien'' language: \texttt{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\index{acadien.mld}
+% The ``\texttt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{}
+% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \texttt{french.mld}
+% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \texttt{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\index{acadien.mld}
+% La langue <<~\texttt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{}
+% est simplement du fran�ais (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme fran�ais pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais),
+% donc nous chargons le fichier \texttt{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*acadien>
+\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</acadien>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \texttt{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\index{afrikaan.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\texttt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa, it has dutch origins; compare with
+% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \texttt{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\index{afrikaan.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\texttt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e en Afrique du Sud, elle a des origines
+% n�erlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*afrikaan>
+\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Afrikaan(s) titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+%</afrikaan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \texttt{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\index{afrikaans.mld}
+% ``Afrikaans'' is a synonym of ``afrikaan'', so we just load \texttt{afrikaan.mld}\index{afrikaan.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \texttt{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\index{afrikaans.mld}
+% <<~Afrikaans~>> est un synonyme de <<~afrikaan~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{afrikaan.mld}\index{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*afrikaans>
+\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}%
+%</afrikaans>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``American'' language: \texttt{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\index{american.mld}
+% The ``american'' language is just like ``english''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the
+% languages themselves have some differences.}, so we just load \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~americain~>>: \texttt{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\index{american.mld}
+% La langue <<~american~>> (am�ricain) est comme <<~english~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait �tre vrai pour les titres des
+% mini-tables; les langues elles-m�mes ont quelques diff�rences.}, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*american>
+\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</american>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arab'' language: \texttt{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\index{arab.mld}
+% The titles for the ``arab'' language are taken from the Arab\TeX\ package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, which should be
+% used, with the associated fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \texttt{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\index{arab.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~arab~>> (arabe) sont tir�s du paquetage Arab\TeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, qui devrait �tre
+% utilis�, avec les fontes associ�es.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arab>
+\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Arabic titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex)
+%% (strings taken from arabtex; to be used with arabtex)
+\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}
+\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}
+\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}
+\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}
+\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}
+\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}
+\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}
+%</arab>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arabic'' language: \texttt{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\index{arabic.mld}
+% ``Arabic'' is a synomym for ``arab'', so we just load \texttt{arab.mld}\index{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \texttt{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\index{arabic.mld}
+% <<~Arabic~>> est un synonyme pour <<~arab~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \texttt{arab.mld}\index{arab.mld}
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arabic>
+\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/09]
+\mtcselectlanguage{arab}%
+%</arabic>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Armenian'' language: \texttt{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\index{armenian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``armenian'' language are taken from the Arm\TeX\ package~\cite{armtex}, which should be
+% used, with the associated fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \texttt{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\index{armenian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~armenian~>> (arm�nien) sont tir�s du paquetage Arm\TeX\ package~\cite{armtex},
+% qui devrait �tre utilis�, avec les fontes associ�es.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*armenian>
+\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]
+%% Armenian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}
+\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}
+\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}
+\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}
+\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}
+\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}
+\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}
+%</armenian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Austrian'' language: \texttt{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\index{austrian.mld}
+% For the mini-table titles, the ``austrian'' language is like the ``german'' language, so we load
+% \texttt{german.mld}\index{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \texttt{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\index{austrian.mld}
+% En ce qui concerne les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~austrian~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~german~>>
+% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \texttt{german.mld}\index{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*austrian>
+\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{german}%
+%</austrian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \texttt{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\index{bahasa.mld}
+% The titles of the mini-tables for the ``bahasa'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with
+% different pronunciations
+% but the same writing.} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. Specific fonts are needed.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \texttt{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\index{bahasa.mld}
+% Les titres des mini-tables pour la langue <<~bahasa~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e en Indon�sie et en Malaisie, avec des
+% prononciations diff�rentes mais avec la m�me �criture.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Des
+% fontes sp�cifiques sont n�cessaires.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bahasa>
+\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Bahasa titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+%</bahasa>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bangla'' language: \texttt{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\index{bangla.mld}
+% The titles for the ``bangla'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India.} are taken from
+% the \texttt{bangtex}\index{bangtex} package~\cite{bangtex}; they need specific fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \texttt{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\index{bangla.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~bangla~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de
+% l'Inde.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{bangtex}\index{bangtex}~\cite{bangtex}; ils ont besoin de fontes
+% sp�cifiques.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bangla>
+\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2002/03/14]
+%% Bangla titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs specific fonts
+\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*i potRo}
+\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}
+\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}
+\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}
+\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}
+\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}
+\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}
+%</bangla>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Basque'' language: \texttt{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\index{basque.mld}
+% The titles for the ``basque'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the Basque country, in the north of Spain and
+% south-west of France.} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. It seems that special fonts are needed.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \texttt{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\index{basque.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~basque~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e au Pays Basque, qui est situ� dans le nord de l'Espagne
+% et le sud-ouest de la France.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Il semble que des fontes
+% sp�ciales soient n�cessaires.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*basque>
+\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[1999/12/06]
+%% Basque titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs special fonts
+\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}
+\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}
+\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}
+\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}
+\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}
+\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}
+\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}
+%</basque>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bicig'' language: \texttt{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\index{bicig.mld}
+% The titles for the ``bicig'' language\,\footnote{Bicig is a written form of the mongolian language.} are taken
+% from the Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \texttt{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\index{bicig.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~bicig~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~bicig~>> est une forme �crite de la langue mongole.} sont
+% tir�s du paquetage Mon\TeX~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bicig>
+\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% needs mongol fonts
+%% Mongol (Bicig) titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}
+\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}
+\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}
+\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}
+\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}
+\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}
+\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%</bicig>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Brazil'' language: \texttt{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\index{brazil.mld}
+% The titles for the ``brazil'' language\,\footnote{It is the portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. These titles are
+% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \texttt{babel}
+% package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \texttt{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\index{brazil.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~brazil~>> (br�silien)\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais parl� au Br�sil. Ces
+% titres sont \emph{diff�rents} au Br�sil et au Portugal. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tir�s du
+% paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*brazil>
+\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Portugues (brazil) titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%</brazil>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``brazilian'' language: \texttt{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\index{brazilian.mld}
+% The ``brazilian'' language is just like ``brazil'', so we just load \texttt{brazil.mld}\index{brazil.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \texttt{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\index{brazilian.mld}
+% La langue <<~brazilian~>> est comme <<~brazil~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{brazil.mld}\index{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*brazilian>
+\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]
+\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}%
+%</brazilian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Breton'' language: \texttt{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\index{breton.mld}
+% The titles for the ``breton'' language\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany.} are taken from
+% the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \texttt{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\index{breton.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~breton~>>\,\footnote{Parl�es comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France).}
+% sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*breton>
+\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Breton titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}
+\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}
+\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}
+\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}
+\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Taolenn}
+\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}
+\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}
+%</breton>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``british'' language: \texttt{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\index{british.mld}
+% The ``british'' language is just like ``english'', so we just load \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \texttt{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\index{british.mld}
+% La langue <<~british~>> est comme <<~english~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*british>
+\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]
+\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</british>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \texttt{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\index{bulgarian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``bulgarian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}; they require
+% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \texttt{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\index{bulgarian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~bulgarian~>> (bulgare) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}; ils ont
+% besoin de fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bulgarian>
+\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2001/02/28]
+%% Bulgarian titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs special fonts
+\def\ptctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\plftitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\plttitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\mlttitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\slttitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+%</bulgarian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \texttt{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\index{bulgarianb.mld}
+% The titles for the ``bulgarianb'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel};
+% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \texttt{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\index{bulgarianb.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~bulgarianb~>> (haut bulgare) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel};
+% Ils requi�rent des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bulgarianb>
+\ProvidesFile{bulgariand.mld}[2005/03/24]
+%% Upper bulgarian titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian
+\def\ptctitle{%
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\plftitle{% Figuri
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\plttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\mlftitle{% Figurite
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\mlttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\slftitle{% Figuri
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\slttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+%</bulgarianb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Buryat'' language: \texttt{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\index{buryat.mld}
+% The titles for the ``buryat'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia, in the Buryat republic, near
+% Lake Baikal.} are taken from the Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \texttt{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\index{buryat.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~buryat~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e dans certaines r�gions de la Mongolie. dans la r�publique
+% Buryat, pr�s du lac Ba�kal.} sont tir�s du paquetage Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue
+% requiert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*buryat>
+\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Buryat titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs special fonts
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+%</buryat>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Canadian'' language: \texttt{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\index{canadian.mld}
+% The ``canadian'' language \virage(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'') is just the \emph{english} language spoken
+% in Canada. We just load the file \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \texttt{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\index{canadian.mld}
+% La langue <<~canadian~>> \virage(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final) est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise} parl�e
+% au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*canadian>
+\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</canadian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Canadien'' language: \texttt{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\index{canadien.mld}
+% The ``canadien'' language \virage(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'') is just the \emph{french} language spoken
+% in Canada. We just load the file \texttt{french.mld}\index{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \texttt{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\index{canadien.mld}
+% La langue <<~canadien~>> \virage(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final) est simplement la langue \emph{fran�aise} parl�e
+% au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \texttt{french.mld}\index{french.mld} (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*canadien>
+\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</canadien>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Castillan'' language: \texttt{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\index{castillan.mld}
+% The ``castillan'' language is more known as ``spanish'', but is spoken mainly in Castile, a part of central Spain. We
+% just load the \texttt{spanish.mld}\index{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \texttt{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\index{castillan.mld}
+% La langue <<~castillan~>> est plus connue sous le nom de <<~spanish~>> (espagnol), mais est parl�e principalement
+% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \texttt{spanish.mld}\index{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*castillan>
+%% Castillan (spanish) titles for minitoc.sty
+\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
+%</castillan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Castillian'' language: \texttt{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\index{castillian.mld}
+% The ``castillian'' language is more known as ``spanish'', but is spoken mainly in Castile, a part of central Spain.
+% ``Castillian'' is the english name for ``castillan''.
+% We just load the \texttt{spanish.mld}\index{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \texttt{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\index{castillian.mld}
+% La langue <<~castillian~>> est plus connue sous le nom de <<~spanish~>> (espagnol), mais est parl�e principalement
+% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. <<~Castillian~>> est le nom anglais du castillan.
+% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \texttt{spanish.mld}\index{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*castillian>
+\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]
+%% Castillian (spanish) titles for minitoc.sty
+\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
+%</castillian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Catalan'' language: \texttt{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\index{catalan.mld}
+% The titles for the ``catalan'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain, around Barcelona.}
+% are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \texttt{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\index{catalan.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~catalan~>>\,\footnote{Parl�e en Catalogne, la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour
+% de Barcelone.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*catalan>
+\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Catalan titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taules}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Taules}%
+%</catalan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \texttt{chinese1.mld} and \texttt{chinese1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}%
+% \index{chinese1.mld}\index{chinese1.mlo}
+% There are several variants for the chinese language.
+% The ``chinese1'' language uses titles taken from the \texttt{Bg5.cap} file in the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special
+% fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``chinese1'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{chinese1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \texttt{chinese1.mld} et \texttt{chinese1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}%
+% \index{chinese1.mld}\index{chinese1.mlo}
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise.
+% La langue <<~chinese1~>> (chinois premi�re variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \texttt{Bg5.cap} du
+% syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, �videmment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~chinese1~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre engendr�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \texttt{chinese1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chinese1>
+\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file file Bg5.cap of the CJK package
+%%   for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%%   created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Chinese captions
+%%
+%% character set: Big 5
+%% encoding: Big 5
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}
+%</chinese1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \texttt{chinese2.mld} and \texttt{chinese2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}%
+% \index{chinese2.mld}\index{chinese2.mlo}
+% The ``chinese2'' language uses titles taken from the \texttt{Bg5.cpx} file in the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special
+% fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``chinese2'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{chinese2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \texttt{chinese2.mld} et \texttt{chinese2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}%
+% \index{chinese2.mld}\index{chinese2.mlo}
+% La langue <<~chinese2~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \texttt{Bg5.cpx} dans
+% le syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, �videmment. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~chinese2~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre engendr�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \texttt{chinese2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chinese2>
+\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Chinese captions
+%%
+%% character set: Big 5
+%% encoding: Big 5
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}
+%</chinese2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Croatian'' language: \texttt{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\index{croatian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``croatian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~croatian~>>: \texttt{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\index{croatian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*croatian>
+\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Croatian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\plftitle{Slike}%
+\def\plttitle{Tablice}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tablice}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablice}%
+%</croatian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Czech'' language: \texttt{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\index{czech.mld}
+% The titles for the ``czech'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \texttt{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\index{czech.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~czech~>> (tch�que) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*czech>
+\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Czech titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Warning: defines \w as a ring accent
+\def\w#1{\accent'27 #1}
+\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\w{u}}%
+\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\w{u}}%
+\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\w{u}}%
+\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+%</czech>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Danish'' language: \texttt{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\index{danish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``danish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \texttt{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\index{danish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~danish~>> (danois) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*danish>
+\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Danish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Indholdsfortegnelse}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Indholdsfortegnelse}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Indholdsfortegnelse}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
+%</danish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Dutch'' language: \texttt{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\index{dutch.mld}
+% The titles for the ``dutch'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \texttt{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\index{dutch.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~dutch~>> (n�erlandais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dutch>
+\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[1999/03/16]
+% Dutch titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\plftitle{Lijst van figuren}%
+\def\plttitle{Lijst van tabellen}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lijst van figuren}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lijst van tabellen}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\slftitle{Lijst van figuren}%
+\def\slttitle{Lijst van tabellen}%
+%</dutch>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``English'' language: \texttt{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\index{english.mld}
+% The titles for the ``english'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+american}, \vref{s+mld+british}, \vref{s+mld+canadian}, \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. \virage\emph{It is the default language.}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \texttt{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\index{english.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~english~>> (anglais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% les sections~\vref{s+mld+american}, \vref{s+mld+british}, \vref{s+mld+canadian}, \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}. \virage\emph{C'est la langue par d�faut.}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english>
+\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% English titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}
+\def\plftitle{List of Figures}
+\def\plttitle{List of Tables}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contents}
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}
+\def\mlttitle{Tables}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Contents}
+\def\slftitle{Figures}
+\def\slttitle{Tables}
+%</english>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Esperant'' language: \texttt{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\index{esperant.mld}
+% The titles for the ``esperant'' (esperanto) language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \texttt{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\index{esperant.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~esperant~>> (esperanto) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*esperant>
+\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Esperanto titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+%</esperant>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \texttt{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\index{esperanto.mld}
+% The ``esperanto'' and ``esperant'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
+% \texttt{esperant.mld}\index{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \texttt{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\index{esperanto.mld}
+% Les langues <<~esperanto~>> et <<~esperant~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \texttt{esperant.mld}\index{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*esperanto>
+\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}%
+%</esperanto>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Estonian'' language: \texttt{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\index{estonian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``estonian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \texttt{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\index{estonian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~estonian~>> (estonien) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*estonian>
+\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Estonian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\plftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabelid}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\mlftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\slftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabelid}%
+%</estonian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \texttt{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\index{ethiopia.mld}
+% The titles for the ``ethiopia'' language are taken from the \texttt{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop}. Specific
+% fonts are needed.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \texttt{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\index{ethiopia.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~ethiopia~>> (�thiopien) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}. Des
+% fontes sp�cifiques sont n�cessaires.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ethiopia>
+\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Needs special fonts
+\def\ptctitle{yezate}%
+\def\plftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\plttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{yezate}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\mlttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{yezate}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\slttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149}
+    mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+%</ethiopia>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \texttt{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\index{ethopian.mld}
+% The ``ethiopian'' language is just a synonym for the ``ethiopia'' language, so we just load the
+% \texttt{ethiopia.mld}\index{ethopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \texttt{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\index{ethopian.mld}
+% La langue <<~ethiopian~>> (�thiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~ethiopia~>>, donc nous chargeons
+% simplement le fichier \texttt{ethiopia.mld}\index{ethopia.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ethiopian>
+\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+%% Needs ethopian special fonts
+\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}%
+%</ethiopian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \texttt{farsi1.mld} and \texttt{farsi1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}%
+% \index{farsi1.mld}\index{farsi1.mlo}
+% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran.
+% The ``farsi1'' language uses titles taken from the \texttt{farsi.sty} file in the Farsi\TeX\ system
+% ({\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}), by \name{Dr~Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``farsi1'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{farsi1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \texttt{farsi1.mld} et \texttt{farsi1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}%
+% \index{farsi1.mld}\index{farsi1.mlo}
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parl�e en Iran.
+% La langue <<~farsi1~>> (farsi premi�re variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \texttt{farsi.sty} du
+% syst�me Farsi\TeX\ ({\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}), par \name{Dr~Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
+% Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, �videmment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~farsi1~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre engendr�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \texttt{farsi1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*farsi1>
+\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]
+% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
+% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
+% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
+% http://www.farsitex.org
+\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}
+%</farsi1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \texttt{farsi2.mld} and \texttt{farsi2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}%
+% \index{farsi2.mld}\index{farsi2.mlo}
+% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran.
+% The ``farsi2'' language uses titles taken from the \texttt{farsi.sty} file in the Farsi\TeX\ system
+% ({\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}), by \name{Dr~Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others. Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``farsi2'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{farsi2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \texttt{farsi2.mld} et \texttt{farsi2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}%
+% \index{farsi2.mld}\index{farsi2.mlo}
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parl�e en Iran.
+% La langue <<~farsi2~>> (farsi seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \texttt{farsi.sty} du
+% syst�me Farsi\TeX\ ({\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}), par \name{Dr~Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
+% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
+% Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, �videmment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~farsi2~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre engendr�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \texttt{farsi2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*farsi2>
+\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]
+% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
+% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
+% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
+% http://www.farsitex.org
+\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}
+%</farsi2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Finnish'' language: \texttt{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\index{finnish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``finnish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \texttt{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\index{finnish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~finnish~>> (finnois) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish>
+\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Finnish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%   /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */
+\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%   /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */
+\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%   /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */
+\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
+%</finnish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \texttt{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\index{finnish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``finnish2'' language are taken from a variant proposed in the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \texttt{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\index{finnish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~finnish2~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tir�s d'une variante propos�e dans le
+% paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish2>
+\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2005/04/06]
+%% Finnish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
+%</finnish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Francais'' language: \texttt{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\index{francais.mld}
+% The ``francais''\footnote{The right spelling is ``fran�ais'', but we do not dare using a cedilla in a file name.}
+% language is a synonym for the ``french'' language, so we load the file \texttt{french.mld}\index{french.mld} (see
+% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \texttt{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\index{francais.mld}
+% La langue <<~francais~>>\footnote{L'orthographe correcte est <<~fran�ais~>>, mais je n'ai pas os� utiliser une
+% c�dille dans un nom de fichier.} est synonyme de la langue <<~french~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \texttt{french.mld}\index{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*francais>
+\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</francais>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``French'' language: \texttt{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\index{french.mld}
+% The titles for the ``french'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+acadian}, \vref{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais}, \vref{s+mld+frenchb},
+% \vref{s+mld+frenchle}, and~\vref{s+mld+frenchpro}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \texttt{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\index{french.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~french~>> (fran�ais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% les sections~\vref{s+mld+acadian}, \vref{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais},
+% \vref{s+mld+frenchb}, \vref{s+mld+frenchle} et~\vref{s+mld+frenchpro}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*french>
+\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2005/06/16]
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{Table des Mati\`eres}
+\def\plftitle{Liste des Figures}
+\def\plttitle{Liste des Tableaux}
+%%
+%% French titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}
+\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sommaire}
+\def\slftitle{Figures}
+\def\slttitle{Tableaux}
+%</french>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \texttt{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\index{frenchb.mld}
+% The ``frenchb'' language is a synonym for the ``french'' language, so we load the
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \texttt{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\index{frenchb.mld}
+% La langue <<~frenchb~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~french~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchb>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \texttt{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\index{frenchle.mld}
+% The ``frenchle'' language is a synonym for the ``french'' language, so we load the
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld} file. See
+% section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \texttt{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\index{frenchle.mld}
+% La langue <<~frenchle~� est un synonyme pour la langue <<~french~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchle>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \texttt{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\index{frenchpro.mld}
+% The ``frenchpro'' language is a synonym for the ``french'' language, so we load the
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \texttt{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\index{frenchpro.mld}
+% La langue <<~frenchpro~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~french~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \index{french.mld}\texttt{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchpro>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]
+\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchpro>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Galician'' language: \texttt{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\index{galician.mld}
+% The titles for the ``galician'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part of Spain, around
+% Santiago de Compostela.} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \texttt{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\index{galician.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~galician~>> (galicien)\,\footnote{Parl�e en Galice, dans la partie nord-ouest de
+% l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*galician>
+\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Galician titles for minitoc.sty
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice Xeral}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de T\'aboas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice Xeral}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de T\'aboas}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice Xeral}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de T\'aboas}%
+%</galician>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``German'' language: \texttt{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\index{german.mld}
+% The titles for the ``german'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also the
+% section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \texttt{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\index{german.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~german~>> (allemand) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*german>
+\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% German titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}
+\def\plftitle{Figuren}
+\def\plttitle{Tabellen}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}
+\def\mlftitle{Figuren}
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}
+\def\slftitle{Figuren}
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}
+%</german>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Germanb'' language: \texttt{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\index{germanb.mld}
+% The ``germanb'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles are taken from the \texttt{babel}
+% package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \texttt{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\index{germanb.mld}
+% La langue <<~germanb~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tir�s du
+% paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*germanb>
+\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% German titles (variant) for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%    % oder nur: Inhalt
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}
+\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%    % oder nur: Inhalt
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%    % oder nur: Inhalt
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}
+%</germanb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek'' language: \texttt{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\index{greek.mld}
+% The titles for the ``greek'' language (modern greek) are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% Greek fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \texttt{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\index{greek.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~greek~>> (grec moderne) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% Des fontes grecques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek>
+\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% greek.mld
+%% Needs greek fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}
+\def\plftitle{Kat'alogoc Sqhm'atwn}
+\def\plttitle{Kat'alogoc Pin'akwn}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}
+\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogoc Sqhm'atwn}
+\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogoc Pin'akwn}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}
+\def\slftitle{Kat'alogoc Sqhm'atwn}
+\def\slttitle{Kat'alogoc Pin'akwn}
+%</greek>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \texttt{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\index{greek-mono.mld}
+% The titles for the ``greek-mono'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly
+% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \texttt{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\index{greek-mono.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~greek-mono~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une r�cente
+% (1982) mais fortement constest�e -- et constestable -- r�forme de la langue grecque.}) sont tir�s du projet
+% ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-mono>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-mono>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \texttt{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\index{greek-polydemo.mld}
+% The titles for the ``greek-polydemo'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.}
+% are taken from the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \texttt{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\index{greek-polydemo.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~d�motique~>> (populaire), pour le grec
+% classique.} sont tir�s du projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-polydemo>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-polydemo>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \texttt{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\index{greek-polykatha.mld}
+% The titles for the ``greek-polykatha'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style, a form of
+% the Greek language created during the early 19th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, to purify the language
+% from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary. It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it
+% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are
+% taken from the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \texttt{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\index{greek-polykatha.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifi�),
+% une forme de la langue grecque cr��e au d�but du dix-neuvi�me si�cle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier
+% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant �t� d�mod� par le grec d�motique (populaire),
+% mais a laiss� d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.}
+% sont tir�s du projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-polykatha>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-polykatha>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Guarani'' language: \texttt{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\index{guarani.mld}
+% The ``guarani'' language is the main language spoken in Paraguay.
+% Very often, a mixture of Guarani and Spanish, known as Jopara, is spoken.
+% A special input encoding (\texttt{win-gn.def}) is needed.
+% The titles are taken from the \texttt{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}.
+% A special input encoding (\texttt{win-gn.def}) is needed.
+% These files are available on the CTAN archives.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \texttt{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\index{guarani.mld}
+% La langue �~guarani~� est la langue principale parl�e au Paraguay.
+% Tr�s souvent, un m�lange de guarani et d'espagnol, appel� �~jopara~�, est utilis�.
+% Les titres sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}. 
+% Un codage d'entr�e sp�cial (\texttt{win-gn.def}) est n�cessaire.
+% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*guarani>
+\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]
+%% Guarani titles for minitoc.sty
+%% from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos.
+%% Input encoding win-gn.def is needed.
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%</guarani>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \texttt{hangul1.mld} and \texttt{hangul1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}%
+% \index{hangul1.mld}\index{hangul1.mld}
+% The titles for the ``hangul1'' language (korean in hangul script, first variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hangul.cap} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4},
+% \vref{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hangul1'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hangul1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \texttt{hangul1.mld} et \texttt{hangul1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}%
+% \index{hangul1.mld}\index{hangul1.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul1~>> (cor�en, �criture hangul premi�re variante) sont tir�s du fichier
+% \texttt{hangul.cap} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4}, \vref{s+mld+hanja1}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul1~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hangul1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul1>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Hangul captions
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}
+%</hangul1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \texttt{hangul2.mld} and \texttt{hangul2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}%
+% \index{hangul2.mld}\index{hangul2.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``hangul2'' language (korean in hangul script, second variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hangul.cpx} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4},
+% \vref{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hangul2'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hangul2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \texttt{hangul2.mld} et \texttt{hangul2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}%
+% \index{hangul2.mld}\index{hangul2.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul2~>> (cor�en en �criture hangul, deuxi�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier
+% \texttt{hangul.cpx} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4}, \vref{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul2~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hangul2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul2>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Hangul captions
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}
+%</hangul2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \texttt{hangul3.mld} and \texttt{hangul3.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}%
+% \index{hangul3.mld}\index{hangul3.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``hangul3'' language (korean in hangul script, third variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hangul2.cap} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4},
+% \vref{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hangul3'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hangul3.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \texttt{hangul3.mld} et \texttt{hangul3.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}%
+% \index{hangul3.mld}\index{hangul3.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul3~>> (cor�en en �criture hangul, troisi�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier
+% \texttt{hangul2.cap} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4}, \vref{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul3~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hangul3.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul3>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Hangul captions set 2
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}
+%</hangul3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \texttt{hangul4.mld} and \texttt{hangul4.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}%
+% \index{hangul4.mld}\index{hangul4.mld}
+% The titles for the ``hangul4'' language (korean in hangul script, fourth variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hangul2.cpx} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3},
+% \vref{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hangul4'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hangul4.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \texttt{hangul4.mld} et \texttt{hangul4.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}%
+% \index{hangul4.mld}\index{hangul4.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul4~>> (cor�en en �criture hangul, quatri�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier
+% \texttt{hangul2.cpx} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hangul4~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hangul4.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul4>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Hangul captions set 2
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}
+%</hangul4>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \texttt{hanja1.mld} and \texttt{hanja1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}%
+% \index{hanja1.mld}\index{hanja1.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``hanja1'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hanja.cpx} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hanja1'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hanja1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \texttt{hanja1.mld} et \texttt{hanja1.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}%
+% \index{hanja1.mld}\index{hanja1.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hanja1~>>  (cor�en en �criture ancienne hanja, premi�re variante) sont tir�s du
+% fichier \texttt{hanja.cpx} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir ausi
+% les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+hanja2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hanja1~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hanja1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hanja1>
+\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Hanja captions
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}
+%</hanja1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \texttt{hanja2.mld} and \texttt{hanja2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}%
+% \index{hanja2.mld}\index{hanja2.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``hanja2'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file
+% \texttt{hanja.cap} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+hanja1}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``hanja2'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{hanja2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \texttt{hanja2.mld} et \texttt{hanja2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}%
+% \index{hanja2.mld}\index{hanja2.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hanja2~>>  (cor�en en �criture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tir�s du
+% fichier \texttt{hanja.cpx} du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir ausi
+% les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1}, \vref{s+mld+hangul2}, \vref{s+mld+hangul3}, \vref{s+mld+hangul4}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+hanja1}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hanja2~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{hanja2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hanja2>
+\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>
+%%
+%% Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997)
+%%
+%% Hanja captions
+%%
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}
+%</hanja2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \texttt{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\index{hebrew.mld}
+% The titles for the ``hebrew'' language are taken from the ArabTeX package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, which should be
+% used, with the associated fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \texttt{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\index{hebrew.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~hebrew~>> (h�breu) sont tir�s du paquetage ArabTeX~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, qui
+% devrait �tre utilis�, avec les fontes associ�es.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hebrew>
+\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]
+%% Hebrew titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation)
+\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\
+              \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\
+              \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\
+              \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\
+              \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+%</hebrew>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \texttt{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\index{hungarian.mld}
+% The ``hungarian'' language is a synonym of the ``magyar'' language, so we load \index{magyar.mld}\texttt{magyar.mld}.
+% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \texttt{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\index{hungarian.mld}
+% La langue <<~hungarian~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~magyar~>>, donc nous chargeons
+% \index{magyar.mld}\texttt{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hungarian>
+\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}%
+%</hungarian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \texttt{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\index{icelandic.mld}
+% The titles for the ``icelandic'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \texttt{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\index{icelandic.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~icelandic~>> (islandais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*icelandic>
+\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2001/02/28]
+%% Icelandic titles for minitoc.sty
+%% need inputenc with 8-bits encoding
+\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\plftitle{Myndaskr�}%
+\def\plttitle{T�fluskr�}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr�}%
+\def\mlttitle{T�fluskr�}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\slftitle{Myndaskr�}%
+\def\slttitle{T�fluskr�}%
+%</icelandic>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \texttt{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\index{interlingua.mld}
+% The titles for the ``interlingua'' language\,\footnote{A tentative for an universal language.} are taken from
+% the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \texttt{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\index{interlingua.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~interlingua~>>\,\footnote{Une tentative pour une langue universelle.} sont tir�s du
+% paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*interlingua>
+\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2001/07/04]
+\def\ptctitle{Contento}
+\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}
+\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabellas}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contento}
+\def\mlftitle{Figuras}
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Contento}
+\def\slftitle{Figuras}
+\def\slttitle{Tabellas}
+%</interlingua>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Irish'' language: \texttt{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\index{irish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``irish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \texttt{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\index{irish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~irish~>> (irlandais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*irish>
+\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Irish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar\'Abhair}
+\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}
+\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar\'Abhair}
+\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar\'Abhair}
+\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}
+\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}
+%</irish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Italian'' language: \texttt{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\index{italian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``italian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \texttt{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\index{italian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~italian~>> (italien) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*italian>
+\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Italian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+%</italian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese'' language: \texttt{japanese.mld} and \texttt{japanese.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese}%
+% \index{japanese.mld}\index{japanese.mlo}
+% They are several variants for the japanese titles.
+% The titles for a first variant of the ``japanese'' language have been found (by a Google search) on the Web site of
+% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,\footnote{\url{http:www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``japanese'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{japanese.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \texttt{japanese.mld} et \texttt{japanese.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese}%
+% \index{japanese.mld}\index{japanese.mlo}
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais.
+% Les titres pour une premi�re variante de la langue <<~japanese~>> (japonais) ont �t� trouv�s (par une recherche avec
+% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur
+% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,\footnote{\url{http:www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{japanese.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Japanese titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
+%% From Kumazawa Toshiki
+%% kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp
+%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
+\mtcloadmlo{japanese}
+%</japanese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \texttt{japanese2.mld} and \texttt{japanese2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}%
+% \index{japanese2.mld}\index{japanese2.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``japanese2'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file
+% \texttt{JIS.cap} of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``japanese2'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{japanese2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \texttt{japanese2.mld} et \texttt{japanese2.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}%
+% \index{japanese2.mld}\index{japanese2.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese2~>> (japonais, deuxi�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{JIS.cap} du
+% syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese},
+% \vref{s+mld+japanese3}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese2~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{japanese2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese2>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Japanese captions
+%%
+%% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+%% encoding: EUC
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}
+%</japanese2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \texttt{japanese3.mld} and \texttt{japanese3.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}%
+% \index{japanese3.mld}\index{japanese3.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``japanese3'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from file \texttt{JIS.cpx} of the CJK
+% system~\cite{cjk2}.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``japanese3'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{japanese3.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \texttt{japanese3.mld} et \texttt{japanese3.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}%
+% \index{japanese3.mld}\index{japanese3.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese3~>> (japonais, troisi�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{JIS.cpx} du
+% syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese},
+% \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese4} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese3~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{japanese3.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese3>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Japanese captions
+%%
+%% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+%% encoding: EUC
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}
+%</japanese3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \texttt{japanese4.mld}
+% and \texttt{japanese4.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\index{japanese4.mld}\index{japanese4.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``japanese4'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \texttt{SJIS.cap} of the
+% CJK system~\cite{cjk2}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``japanese4'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{japanese4.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \texttt{japanese4.mld}
+% et \texttt{japanese4.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\index{japanese4.mld}\index{japanese4.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese4~>> (japonais, quatri�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{SJIS.cap}
+% du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese4~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{japanese4.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese4>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: SJIS
+%
+\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}
+%</japanese4>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \texttt{japanese5.mld} and \texttt{japanese.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}%
+% \index{japanese5.mld}\index{japanese5.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``japanese5'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \texttt{SJIS.cpx} of
+% the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3},
+% and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``japanese5'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{japanese5.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \texttt{japanese5.mld} et \texttt{japanese.mlo}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}%
+% \index{japanese5.mld}\index{japanese5.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese5~>> (japonais, cinqui�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{SJIS.cpx} du
+% syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}. Des fontes sp�ciales sont n�cessaires, bien s�r. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese},
+% \vref{s+mld+japanese2}, \vref{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~japanese5~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre g�n�r�s facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \texttt{japanese5.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese5>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[[2005/01/28]
+%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%%
+%% Japanese captions
+%%
+%% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+%% encoding: SJIS
+%%
+%% preprocessed
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}
+%</japanese5>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latin'' language: \texttt{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\index{latin.mld}
+% The titles for the ``latin'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \texttt{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\index{latin.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~latin~>> sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin>
+\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2001/02/28]
+%% Latin titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+%</latin>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latin2'' language: \texttt{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\index{latin2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``latin2'' language (latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \texttt{babel}
+% package~\cite{babel}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \texttt{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\index{latin2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~latin2~>> (latin, variante abr�g�e) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel},
+% mais ont �t� abr�g�s. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin2>
+\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2005/04/06]
+%% Latin titles (short) for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabulae}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabulae}%
+%</latin2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latvian'' language: \texttt{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\index{latvian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``latvian'' language\,\footnote{``Latvian'' is the original name for ``letton''.} are taken from
+% the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}.  See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \texttt{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\index{latvian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~latvian~>>\,\footnote{<<~Latvien~>> est l'autre nom du <<~letton~>>.} sont tir�s du
+% projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latvian>
+\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from latvian.ldf (Antomega project)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+%</latvian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Letton'' language: \texttt{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\index{letton.mld}
+% The ``letton'' language is a synonym for the ``latvian'' language, so we just load
+% \index{latvian.mld}\texttt{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \texttt{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\index{letton.mld}
+% La langue <<~letton~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~latvian~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \index{latvian.mld}\texttt{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*letton>
+\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]
+\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}%
+%</letton>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \texttt{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\index{lithuanian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``lithuanian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \texttt{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\index{lithuanian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~lithuanian~>> (lithuanien) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lithuanian>
+\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[1999/07/29]
+%% Lithuanian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Turinys}
+\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\c u s\protect\c ara\protect\v sas}
+\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Turinys}
+\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\c u s\protect\c ara\protect\v sas}
+\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Turinys}
+\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\c u s\protect\c ara\protect\v sas}
+\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}
+%</lithuanian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \texttt{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\index{lsorbian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``lsorbian'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, is a member of the west
+% slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german
+% \emph{l�nder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
+% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
+% the medieval period (VIth century).} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \texttt{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\index{lsorbian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~lsorbian~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, est un membre
+% du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-europ�ennes parl� en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{l�nder}
+% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
+% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale �~l'ouest et l'Oder �~l'est pendant la p�riode m�di�vale (VI�me
+% si�cle).} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lsorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Lower sorbian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}
+\def\plftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\plttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}
+\def\mlftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\mlttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}
+\def\slftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\slttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%</lsorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Magyar'' language: \texttt{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\index{magyar.mld}
+% The titles for the ``magyar'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. A synonym of ``magyar'' is
+% ``hungarian'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+magyar2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \texttt{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\index{magyar.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~magyar~>> sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Un synonyme de <<~magyar~>>
+% est <<~hungarian~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*magyar>
+\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[1999/03/16]
+% Magyar titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+%</magyar>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \texttt{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\index{magyar2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``magyar2'' language are taken from a variant proposed in the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \texttt{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\index{magyar2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~magyar2~>> sont tir�s d'une variante propos�e dans le paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*magyar2>
+\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2005/04/06]
+%% Magyar titles for minitoc.sty (variant)
+\def\ptctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Tratalom}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+%</magyar2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \texttt{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\index{malayalam-keli.mld}
+% The titles for the ``malayalam'' language\,\footnote{The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of
+% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly
+% bound to the Tamil language. The alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries.},
+% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \texttt{malayalam}
+% package~\cite{malayalam}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \texttt{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\index{malayalam-keli.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~malayalam~>> (malayalam, �criture \emph{keli})\,\footnote{La langue Malayalam est
+% parl�e de la c�te occidentale de Malabar jusqu'� l'extr�me sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'�tat de Kerala.
+% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement li�e au Tamoul. L'alphabet et l'�criture datent du huiti�me ou
+% neuvi�me si�cle.}, avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>, sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam}. Cette
+% langue requert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-keli>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2005/06/07]
+%
+% Malayalam: Keli fonts
+%
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%</malayalam-keli>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \texttt{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\index{malayalam-rachana.mld}
+% The titles for the ``malayalam'' language, with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from
+% the \texttt{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam}.
+% This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-keli} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \texttt{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\index{malayalam-rachana.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~malayalam~>>, avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}),
+% sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam}. Cette langue requiert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir
+% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-keli} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-rachana>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]
+%
+% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal.
+%
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%</malayalam-rachana>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \texttt{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\index{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``malayalam'' language, with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the
+% \texttt{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam}.
+% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-keli} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \texttt{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\index{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
+% Les titres pout la langue <<~malayalam~>>, avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> r�form�es (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont
+% tir�s du paquetage \texttt{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam}. Cette langue requert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir aussi
+% les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-keli} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-rachana2>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2005/06/07]
+%
+% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed.
+%
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+%</malayalam-rachana2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Mongol'' language: \texttt{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\index{mongol.mld}
+% The titles for the ``mongol'' language are taken from the Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language
+% requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig} and~\vref{s+mld+buryat}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \texttt{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\index{mongol.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~mongol~>> sont tir�s du paquetage Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette
+% langue requiert des fontes sp�cifiques. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig} et~\vref{s+mld+buryat}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mongol>
+\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Mongol (xalx) titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs mongol fonts
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}
+%</mongol>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \texttt{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\index{naustrian.mld}
+% The ``naustrian'' language is a synonym of the ``ngermanb'' language (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb}
+% variant of the german language), so we load \index{ngermanb.mld}\texttt{ngermanb.mld}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \texttt{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\index{naustrian.mld}
+% La langue <<~naustrian~>> (n�o-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~ngermanb~>> (n�o-allemand) (une
+% version r�form�e de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons
+% \index{ngermanb.mld}\texttt{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*naustrian>
+\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
+%</naustrian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \texttt{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\index{ngerman.mld}
+% The ``ngerman'' language is a synonym of the ``ngermanb'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the
+% \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we load \index{ngermanb.mld}\texttt{ngermanb.mld}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \texttt{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\index{ngerman.mld}
+% La langue <<~ngerman~>> (n�o-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue <<~ngermanb~>>\,\footnote{Une version r�form�e
+% de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons \index{ngermanb.mld}\texttt{ngermanb.mld}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngerman>
+\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
+%</ngerman>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \texttt{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\index{ngermanb.mld}
+% The titles for the ``ngermanb'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are
+% taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \texttt{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\index{ngermanb.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~ngermanb~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe
+% r�form�e.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngermanb>
+\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[1999/12/06]
+%% New german (B) titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%    % oder nur: Inhalt
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+%</ngermanb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Norsk'' language: \texttt{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\index{norsk.mld}
+% The titles for the ``norsk'' language (or bokm\r{a}l, lamguage of the kingdom) are taken from the
+% \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}, with help
+% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \texttt{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\index{norsk.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~norsk~>> (norv�gien, ou <<~bokm{\aa}l~>>, langue du royaume) sont tir�s du paquetage
+% \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*norsk>
+\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Norsk titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\ptctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}% or Figurliste
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}% or Figurliste
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}% or Figurliste
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste
+%</norsk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \texttt{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\index{nynorsk.mld}
+% The titles for the ``nynorsk'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800 by \xname{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen} to make a real
+% independant and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialect spoken in the
+% country.} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}, with help from
+% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \texttt{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\index{nynorsk.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~nynorsk~>> (n�o-norv�gien)\,\footnote{Cr��e vers 1800 par \xname{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}
+% pour construire une vraie langue norv�gienne ind�pendante et nationale, en r�action au danois, �~partir des
+% divers dialectes parl�s dans le pays.} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}, avec l'aide de
+% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nynorsk>
+\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Nynorsk titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\mtctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurar}% or Figurliste
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurar}% or Figurliste
+\def\plttitle{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurar}% or Figurliste
+\def\slttitle{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste
+%</nynorsk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Polish'' language: \texttt{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\index{polish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``polish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+polish2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \texttt{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\index{polish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~polish~>> (polonais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+polish2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polish>
+\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Polish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Spis rzeczy}%
+\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Spis rzeczy}%
+\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Spis rzeczy}%
+\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}%
+%</polish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Polish2'' language: \texttt{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\index{polish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``polish2'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``polish''.} are taken from
+% the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+polish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \texttt{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\index{polish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~polish2~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tir�s du projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+polish}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polish2>
+\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega project)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+%</polish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Portuges'' language: \texttt{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\index{portuges.mld}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% This is another spelling for ``portuguese'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load
+% \index{portuguese.mld}\texttt{portuguese.mld}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>> language: \texttt{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\index{portuges.mld}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% C'est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons
+% simplement \index{portuguese.mld}\texttt{portuguese.mld}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*portuges>
+\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/06]
+\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}
+%</portuges>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \texttt{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\index{portuguese.mld}
+% The titles for the ``portuguese'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \texttt{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\index{portuguese.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~portuguese~>> (portugais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir
+% aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont diff�rents au Br�sil, m�me si l'on y parle aussi
+% le portugais.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*portuguese>
+\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2005/07/08]
+%% Portuguese titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%</portuguese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Romanian'' language: \texttt{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\index{romanian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``romanian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \texttt{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\index{romanian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~romanian~>> (roumain) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*romanian>
+\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Romanian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+%</romanian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian'' language: \texttt{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\index{russian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``russian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \texttt{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\index{russian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~russian~>> (russe) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% Des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian>
+\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Russian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+%</russian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \texttt{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\index{russian2m.mld}
+% The titles for the ``russian2m'' language (``russian2m'' is a modern variant of ``russian'') are taken from
+% the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \texttt{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\index{russian2m.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~russian2m~>> (une variante moderne de <<~russian~>>) sont tir�s du projet
+% ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}. Des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian2m>
+\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^0439}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^0439}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^0439}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+%</russian2m>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \texttt{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\index{russian2o.mld}
+% The titles for the ``russian2o'' language (``russian2o'' is an old variant of ``russian'') are taken from
+% the ANTOMEGA project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \texttt{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\index{russian2o.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~russian2o~>> (<<~russian2o~>> est une ancienne variante de <<~russian~>>) sont tir�s
+% du projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}. Des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian2o>
+\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]
+%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old)
+%% Needs Omega
+%% Alexej M. Kryokov
+%% Dmitry Ivanov
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446%
+ ^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+%</russian2o>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russianb'' language: \texttt{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\index{russianb.mld}
+% The titles for the ``russianb'' language (``russianb'' is a variant of ``russian'') are taken from
+% the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \texttt{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\index{russianb.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~russianb~>> (<<~russianb~>> est une variante de <<~russian~>>) sont tir�s du
+% paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russianb>
+\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% russianb.mld
+\def\ptctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\def\plftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\plttitle{%
+  \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}%
+}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{%
+  \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}%
+}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\slttitle{%
+  \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}%
+}
+%</russianb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russianc'' language: \texttt{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\index{russianc.mld}
+% The titles for the ``russianc'' language (``russianc'' is a variant of ``russian'', used in the part of
+% Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \texttt{russian.def} in the
+% Mon\TeX\ package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \texttt{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\index{russianc.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~russianc~>> (<<~russianc~>> est une variante du russe <<~russian~>>, utilis�e dans la
+% partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{russian.def} dans le paquetage
+% Mon\TeX~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques sp�cifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russianc>
+\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+%% Russian titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}
+\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}
+\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}
+\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}
+\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}
+\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}
+\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}
+%</russianc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Samin'' language: \texttt{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\index{samin.mld}
+% The titles for the ``samin'' language\,\footnote{\smooth Several Sami dialects/languages are spoken in Finland,
+% Norway, Sweden,
+% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \texttt{.dtx}
+% files for e.g. Lule and South Sami. Hence the name \texttt{samin.dtx} (and not \texttt{sami.dtx} or the like) in the
+% North Sami case. This note is copied from the \texttt{samin.dtx} file.} are taken from the \texttt{samin.dtx} file
+% of the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. Specific fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \texttt{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\index{samin.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~samin~>> (Sami du Nord)\,\footnote{\smooth Plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sami sont
+% parl�s en Finlande, Norv�ge, Su�de et dans la p�ninsule de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont diff�rents, donc il
+% y~aurait �ventuellement besoin de plusieurs fichiers \texttt{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sami du Sud.
+% D'o� le nom \texttt{samin.dtx} (et non pas \texttt{sami.dtx} ou analogue dans le cas du Sami du Nord. Cette note
+% est tir�e du fichier \texttt{samin.dtx}.} sont tir�s du fichier \texttt{samin.dtx} du paquetage
+% \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Des fontes sp�cifiques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*samin>
+\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2001/02/28]
+%% Samin titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\plftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\slftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}%
+%</samin>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Scottish'' language: \texttt{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\index{scottish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``scottish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} language~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \texttt{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\index{scottish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~scottish~>> (�cossais) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*scottish>
+\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%%Scottish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}
+\def\plftitle{LiostaDhealbh}
+\def\plttitle{LiostaChl\`ar}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}
+\def\mlftitle{LiostaDhealbh}
+\def\mlttitle{LiostaChl\`ar}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}
+\def\slftitle{LiostaDhealbh}
+\def\slttitle{LiostaChl\`ar}
+%</scottish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Serbian'' language: \texttt{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\index{serbian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``serbian'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also
+% section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \texttt{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\index{serbian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~serbian~>> (serbe) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*serbian>
+\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[1999/12/06]
+%%Serbian titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\plftitle{Slike}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
+%</serbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \texttt{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\index{serbianc.mld}
+% The titles for the ``serbianc'' language\,\footnote{The ``serbianc'' language is written with cyrillic characters.} have
+% been given by \xname{Marko}{�ehaja} and \xname{Frank}{K�ster}. Cyrillic fonts are required.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \texttt{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\index{serbianc.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~serbianc~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~serbianc~>> est �crite en
+% caract�res cyrilliques.} ont �t� donn�s par \xname{Marko}{�ehaja} et \xname{Frank}{K�ster}. Des fontes cyrilliques
+% sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*serbianc>
+\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2001/11/25]
+%% Provides titles for minitoc.sty in Serbian Cyrillic
+%%
+%%Marko �ehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org
+%%Frank K�ster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch
+%%Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie
+\def\ptctitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\plftitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+%</serbianc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Slovak'' language: \texttt{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\index{slovak.mld}
+% The titles for the ``slovak'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \texttt{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\index{slovak.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~slovak~>> (slovaque) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*slovak>
+\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Slovak titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+%</slovak>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Slovene'' language: \texttt{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\index{slovene.mld}
+% The titles for the ``slovene'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \texttt{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\index{slovene.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~slovene~>> (slov�ne) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*slovene>
+\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Slovene titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\plftitle{Slike}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
+%</slovene>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish'' language: \texttt{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\index{spanish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``spanish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% Note that the ``spanish'' is in
+% fact ``castillan'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). Other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque''
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``catalan'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``galician''
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). ``Spanish2'' is a version of ``spanish'' with shorter titles (see
+% section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
+% ``Spanish3'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for the ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are
+% differents.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \texttt{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\index{spanish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~spanish~>> (espagnol) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}.
+% Notez que le <<~spanish~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~castillan~>> (voir section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}).
+% D'autres langues sont parl�es en Espagne: <<~basque~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~catalan~>>
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~galician~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). La langue <<~spanish2~>>
+% est une variante de <<~spanish~>> avec des titres plus courts (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
+% La langue <<~spanish3~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le
+% projet ANTOMEGA~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont diff�rents.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Spanish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice General}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de Tablas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice General}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de Tablas}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice General}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de Tablas}%
+%</spanish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \texttt{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\index{spanish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``spanish2'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel},
+% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \texttt{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\index{spanish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~spanish2~>> (espagnol deuxi�me variante) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel},
+% mais abr�g�s pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish2>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2005/03/31]
+%% Spanish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice General}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de Tablas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contenido}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tablas}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Contenido}%
+\def\slftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablas}%
+%</spanish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \texttt{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\index{spanish3.mld}
+% The titles for the ``spanish3'' language are taken from the \texttt{omega-spanish.ldf} file of the \texttt{ANTOMEGA}
+% project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \texttt{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\index{spanish3.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~spanish3~>> (espagnol troisi�me variante) sont tir�s du fichier
+% \texttt{omega-spanish.ldf} du projet \texttt{ANTOMEGA}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish3>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]
+%% Spanish titles for minitoc.sty
+%% from omega-spanish.ldf of the ANTOMEGA project.
+\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+%</spanish3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Swedish'' language: \texttt{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\index{swedish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``swedish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \texttt{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\index{swedish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~swedish~>> (su�dois) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swedish>
+\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Swedish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
+%</swedish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Thai'' language: \texttt{thai.mld} and \texttt{thai.mlo}}\label{s+mld+thai}%
+% \index{thai.mld}\index{thai.mlo}
+% The titles for the ``thai'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}, using fonts
+% of the CJK system~\cite{cjk2}.
+%
+% The titles for the ``thai'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \texttt{thai.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \texttt{thai.mld} et \texttt{thai.mlo}}\label{s+mld+thai}%
+% \index{thai.mld}\index{thai.mlo}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~thai~>> (tha�) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}, en utilisant des
+% fontes du syst�me CJK~\cite{cjk2}.
+%
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~thai~>> contiennent des caract�res qui ne peuvent pas �tre engendr�s facilement, donc
+% nous chargeons \texttt{thai.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*thai>
+\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]
+%% from thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system
+%% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%%
+\mtcloadmlo{thai}
+%</thai>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Turkish'' language: \texttt{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\index{turkish.mld}
+% The titles for the ``turkish'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \texttt{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\index{turkish.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~turkish~>> (turc) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*turkish>
+\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Turkish titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\plftitle{\c Sekiller Listesi}%
+\def\plttitle{Tablolar\in Listesi}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\mlftitle{\c Sekiller Listesi}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tablolar\in Listesi}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\slftitle{\c Sekiller Listesi}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablolar\in Listesi}%
+%</turkish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \texttt{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\index{UKenglish.mld}
+% The ``UKenglish'' language is just like ``english'', so we just load \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \texttt{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\index{UKenglish.mld}
+% La langue <<~UKenglish~>> est comme <<~english~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*UKenglish>
+\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]
+\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</UKenglish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \texttt{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\index{ukraineb.mld}
+% The titles for the ``ukraineb'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}.
+% Cyrillic fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \texttt{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\index{ukraineb.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~ukraineb~>> (ukrainien) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Des
+% fontes cyrilliques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ukraineb>
+\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[1999/12/06]
+%% Ukraine (B) titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+%</ukraineb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``USenglish'' language: \texttt{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\index{USenglish.mld}
+% The ``USenglish'' language is just like ``english''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the
+% languages themselves have some differences.}, so we just load \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \texttt{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\index{USenglish.mld}
+% La langue <<~USenglish~>> (am�ricain) est comme <<~english~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait �tre vrai pour les titres des
+% mini-tables; les langues elles-m�mes ont quelques diff�rences.}, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \texttt{english.mld}\index{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*USenglish>
+\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]
+\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</USenglish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \texttt{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\index{usorbian.mld}
+% The titles for the ``usorbian'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch, is a member of the west
+% slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german
+% \emph{l�nder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
+% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
+% the medieval period (VIth century).} are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \texttt{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\index{usorbian.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~usorbian~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende, est un membre
+% du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-europ�ennes parl� en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{l�nder}
+% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
+% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale �~l'ouest et l'Oder �~l'est pendant la p�riode m�di�vale (VI�me
+% si�cle).} sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*usorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% Upper sorbian titles for minitoc.sty
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}
+\def\plftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\plttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}
+\def\mlftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\mlttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Wobsah}
+\def\slftitle{Zapiswobrazow}
+\def\slttitle{Zapistabulkow}
+%</usorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \texttt{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\index{vietnam.mld}
+% The titles for the ``vietnam'' language are taken from the \index{vietnam.sty}\texttt{vietnam.sty} package.
+% Vietnamese fonts are required.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \texttt{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\index{vietnam.mld}
+% Les titres pout la langue <<~vietnam~>> (vietnamien) sont tir�s du paquetage \index{vietnam.sty}\texttt{vietnam.sty}.
+% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*vietnam>
+\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]
+%% vietnamese titles for minitoc.sty
+%%
+\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}
+\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}
+\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}
+\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}
+\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}
+%%
+\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}
+\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}
+\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}
+%</vietnam>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \texttt{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\index{vietnamese.mld}
+% The ``vietnamese'' language is just a synonym for the ``vietnam'' language.
+% So we just load \index{vietnam.mld}\texttt{vietnam.mld}.
+% Vietnamese fonts are required.  See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \texttt{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\index{vietnamese.mld}
+% La langue <<~vietnamese~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~vietnam~>> (vietnamien). Dons nous
+% chargeons simplement \index{vietnam.mld}\texttt{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*vietnamese>
+\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]
+\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}%
+%</vietnamese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Welsh'' language: \texttt{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\index{welsh.mld}
+% The titles for the ``welsh'' language are taken from the \texttt{babel} package~\cite{babel}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \texttt{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\index{welsh.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~welsh~>> (gallois) sont tir�s du paquetage \texttt{babel}~\cite{babel}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*welsh>
+\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]
+%% Welsh titles for minitoc.sty
+\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+%</welsh>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}
+% \let\NC\relax
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part*{Complements}
+% \mtcaddpart[Complements]
+% \or\relax
+% \part*{Compl�ments}
+% \mtcaddpart[Compl�ments]
+% \fi
+%
+% \nocite*
+% \def\noopsort#1{\relax}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \FTRfalse
+% \bibliographystyle{plain}
+% \bibliography{minitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \FTRtrue
+% \bibliographystyle{frplain1}
+% \bibliography{fminitoc}
+% \fi
+% \end{raggedright}
+% \adjustmtc
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \let\finalhyphendemerits\svfinalhyphendemerits
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \changes{00 1990/10/01}{1990/10/01}{Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.}
+% \changes{00 1991/11/01}{1991/11/01}{Revised to reuse \texttt{\bs chapter}, \texttt{\bs section},
+%             \texttt{\bs subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically,
+%             assorted other cleanup (\xname{Dan}{Jurafsky}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor,
+%             for each chapter (a deadly bug) (\xname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Added \texttt{\bs chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc.
+%             (\emph{If you forgot putting} \texttt{\bs chapterend} at the end
+%             of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter
+%             will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Replaced the \texttt{minipage} environment by a \texttt{verse}
+%             environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages.}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{All the layout of the minitoc is in the
+%             \texttt{\bs minitableofcontents} command, so if someboby wants
+%             to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter
+%             by preceding it with \texttt{\bs minitocno}. (\texttt{\bs minitocyes}
+%             is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after}
+%             the \texttt{\bs chapter*} pseudo-chapters).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Problems: you \emph{must} have \texttt{\bs chapterend} to terminate each
+%             chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint?}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with
+%             the counter \texttt{minitocdepth} (similar to \texttt{tocdepth} for the table of contents).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to
+%             get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the
+%             \texttt{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may
+%             contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them,
+%             the third should be ok).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Works with \texttt{\bs chapter[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies.\NC
+%             Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in
+%             one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Some mods added to work with \texttt{xr.sty} (external
+%             references). \texttt{xr.sty} version 5 is much more tolerant.}
+% \changes{02 1993/07/05}{1993/07/05}{Added compatibility with \texttt{hangcaption.sty} (the package
+%             \texttt{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \texttt{minitoc} package).
+%             \emph{Beware} to options modifying \texttt{\bs @caption}.}
+% \changes{03 1993/07/09}{1993/07/09}{Version 3 not released (buggy).}
+% \changes{04 1993/07/09}{1993/07/09}{Added \texttt{\bs if@realch} to avoid contentslines from
+%             pseudo-chapters to go into the toc.
+%             The package file \texttt{mtcoff.sty} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document
+%             with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the minitoc option by mtcoff.}
+% \changes{05 1993/07/13}{1993/07/13}{Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs.}
+% \changes{06 1993/07/15}{1993/07/15}{Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \texttt{\bs caption} stuff
+%             (filters are better) added compatibility with \texttt{toch.sty} (\texttt{toch.sty}
+%              makes a table of chapters; if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \texttt{minitoc.sty}).}
+% \changes{07 1993/07/22}{1993/07/22}{(\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \texttt{xr.sty}
+%             (the version~5, by \xname{David}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from
+%             the \texttt{.toc} file.  \texttt{\bs chapterend} and \texttt{\bs minitocno} are suppressed,
+%             \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs dominitoc} and \texttt{\bs faketableofcontents} added.}
+% \changes{08 1993/07/29}{1993/07/29}{Spacing adjustements.}
+% \changes{09 1993/08/04}{1993/08/04}{Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment;
+%             search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows only 3 characters for extensions in file names
+%             (what a pity!).}
+% \changes{10 1993/08/05}{1993/08/05}{Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \texttt{latex.tex}
+%             (\texttt{\bs @inputcheck} or \texttt{\bs reset@font} not defined).}
+% \changes{11 1993/08/18}{1993/08/18}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \texttt{\bs mtcSSfont}
+%             for subsection entries, \texttt{\bs mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \texttt{\bs mtcPfont}
+%             for paragraph entries, \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries.}
+% \changes{12 1993/12/16}{1993/12/16}{Use \texttt{\bs kern} in place of \texttt{\bs vspace*}, and added penalties
+%             (\texttt{\bs nopagebreak}) to avoid a page break just before last \texttt{\bs mtc@rule}.
+%             Also added a \texttt{samepage} environnement. Removed old commented out lines from previous versions.}
+% \changes{13 1993/12/17}{1993/12/17}{Added \texttt{minilof} and \texttt{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the
+%             definition of \texttt{\bs SHORTEXT}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \texttt{\bs raggedright}
+%             setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
+%             \texttt{\bs mtifont} is changed from \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} to \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks):
+%             \texttt{\bs @newread} becomes \texttt{\bs newread}, not outer version of \texttt{\bs newread};
+%             \texttt{\bs empty} replaced by \texttt{\bs relax} in the spare definition of \texttt{\bs reset@font}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Removed the setting of \texttt{\bs clubpenalty} and \texttt{\bs widowpenalty}
+%             to \texttt{10000} (done by \texttt{\bs samepage}), and \texttt{\bs noindent}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Simplified processing of optional argument in \texttt{\bs minitoc},
+%             \texttt{\bs minilof} and \texttt{\bs minilot}.}
+% \changes{15 1994/01/27}{1994/01/27}{Added \texttt{\bs parttoc}, \texttt{\bs partlof} and \texttt{\bs partlot} for books,
+%             \texttt{\bs secttoc}, \texttt{\bs sectlof} and \texttt{\bs sectlot} for articles,
+%             with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables.}
+% \changes{16 1994/02/02}{1994/0202}{Bug fixes (typos).}
+% \changes{17 1994/06/23}{1994/06/23}{`\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional
+%             argument of \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs dominitoc}, and siblings.}
+% \changes{17 1994/06/23}{1994/06/23}{Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis}{Roegel} (who found
+%             the problem) and \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve).}
+% \changes{18 1994/06/26}{1994/06/26}{Make \texttt{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe.}
+% \changes{18 1994/06/26}{1994/06/26}{Introduce the language files as options.
+%             Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens} (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of
+%             the \texttt{babel} package (by \xname{Johannes}{Braams}).}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1.
+%             \texttt{\bs firstchapteris} etc. commands added.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{\texttt{\bs mtcrule}, \texttt{\bs nomtcrule} etc. commands added.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Corrected a bug in \texttt{\bs c@mti}.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Corrected \texttt{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michel}{Rynning}.)}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Corrected appendix in articles.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Added the \texttt{\bs mtcpagenumbers} and \texttt{\bs nomtcpagenumbers} commands
+%             (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Corrected vertical spacing.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers.}
+% \changes{21 1994/09/07}{1994/09/07}{Corrected typos in \texttt{minitoc.sty} and \texttt{minitoc.tex}.}
+% \changes{22 1994/10/10}{1994/10/1o}{Corrected typos in \texttt{minitoc.sty}.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Added a missing line in \texttt{\bs sectlof}.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part
+%             (thanks to \xname{Denis}{Roegel}).}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Removed stuff for \texttt{\bs firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Removed appendix stuff.}
+% \changes{24 1994/12/21}{1994/12/21}{The \texttt{\bs protect} commands have been removed from
+%             the \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lot} and \texttt{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been
+%             corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to
+%             \xname{Denis}{Roegel} who did the work.}
+% \changes{25 1996/09/13}{1996/09/13}{Updated \texttt{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \texttt{mtcnynorsk.sty}
+%             on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.}
+% \changes{26 1996/11/14}{1996/11/14}{Language specific files are now named \meta{language}\texttt{.mld}
+%             (replacing \texttt{mtc}\meta{language}\texttt{.sty}) because they are not packages and
+%             it makes shorter names.}
+% \changes{26 1996/11/14}{1996/11/14}{Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish,
+%             lower and upper sorbian; renamed ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \texttt{babel} package.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Corrections for starred sectionning commands.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{\texttt{english.mld} loaded as default language.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Added \texttt{vietnam.mld} and \texttt{arab.mld}.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Renamed \texttt{minitocoff.sty} into \texttt{mtcoff.sty} to
+%             keep the name short.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Added autoconfiguration of extensions.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Added the \texttt{shortext} package option.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Added \emph{coffee} stuff.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Added \texttt{\bs addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff).}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Fixed bug in parttocs.}
+% \changes{28 1998/06/15}{1998/06/15}{A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             should probably be\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             (a backslash was missing after \texttt{\bs let}). Thanks to him.}
+% \changes{28 1998/06/15}{1998/06/15}{Added the bahasa language.}
+% \changes{28 1998/12/03}{1998/12/03}{Added the \texttt{tight} and \texttt{loose} package options.}
+% \changes{29 1999/03/16}{1999/03/16}{Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages.}
+% \changes{29 1999/06/28}{1999/06/28}{Added the armenian language (from Arm\TeX).}
+% \changes{29 1999/07/23}{1999/07/23}{Added the \texttt{dotted/undotted} package options (default: \texttt{dotted}).}
+% \changes{29 1999/07/29}{1999/07/29}{Added the lithuanian language.}
+% \changes{30 1999/12/06}{1999/12/06}{Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages.}
+% \changes{30 1999/12/06}{1999/12/06}{Corrected a bug in \texttt{\bs sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should
+%             be \texttt{slt}).}
+% \changes{31 2000/04/04}{2000/04/04}{Added compatibility with the \texttt{hyperref} package, thanks to
+%             \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, who has also simplified some code and
+%             fixed the infamous \texttt{\bs chapter*} bug.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features:
+%             \texttt{\bs beforeparttoc}, \texttt{\bs beforepartlof}, \texttt{\bs beforepartlot},
+%             \texttt{\bs afterparttoc}, \texttt{\bs afterpartlof}, \texttt{\bs afterpartlot},
+%             \texttt{\bs thispageparttocstyle}, \texttt{\bs thispagepartlofstyle}, and \texttt{\bs thispagepartlotstyle}.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{\texttt{\bs nomtcrule} corrected.}
+% \changes{33 2000/12/07}{2000/12/07}{Added new adjustment commands: \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter},
+%             \texttt{\bs mtcaddsection}, and \texttt{\bs mtcaddpart}.
+%             These commands add stuff in the \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} and \texttt{.lot} files for the
+%             \texttt{\bs chapter*} (\texttt{\bs section*} and \texttt{\bs part*}) problem. From a suggestion
+%             by \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.}
+% \changes{33 2000/12/08}{2000/12/08}{Corrected a feature in \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a
+%             blank optional argument.}
+% \changes{34 2000/12/13}{2000/12/13}{Added in the documentation a section for use with the \texttt{tocbibend}
+%             package.}
+% \changes{34 2000/12/13}{2000/12/13}{Added \texttt{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so,
+%             \texttt{american.mld} just loads \texttt{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (\emph{i.e.}~empty, blank or
+%             inexistent) or ``non empty'' (\emph{i.e.}~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.~von}{Bechtolsheim}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Added the \texttt{checkfiles/nocheckfiles} package options.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Replaced \texttt{\bs The@chapter} by \texttt{\bs The@mtc}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/02/26}{2001/02/26}{Added \texttt{bulgarian.mld}, \texttt{hebrew.mld}, \texttt{icelandic.mld},
+%             \texttt{latin.mld}, and \texttt{samin.mld}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/03/09}{2001/03/09}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/06/01}{2001/06/01}{Fixed the \texttt{estionian} package option (missing).}
+% \changes{35 2001/07/04}{2001/07/04}{Added the interlingua language.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/11}{2002/02/11}{Corrected an interaction with \texttt{\bs tableofcontents} which creates
+%             a \texttt{\bs chapter*} or a \texttt{\bs section*}, perturbing \texttt{mtc/stc} counters
+%             (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/18}{2002/02/18}{Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled
+%             by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/18}{2002/02/18}{Workaround for the \texttt{\bs parttoc}-\texttt{\bs chapter*} problem.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/19}{2002/02/19}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcskip} and \texttt{\bs mtcskipamount}.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/27}{2002/02/27}{Fixed test for empty files.}
+% \changes{36 2002/03/13}{2002/03/13}{Added the bangla language.}
+% \changes{36 2002/03/15}{2002/03/15}{Reduced depth of \texttt{\bs mtc@strutbox}.}
+% \changes{37 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Version~\#37 dropped.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{\texttt{pt} becomes \texttt{\bs @pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \texttt{\bs z@}.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{\texttt{\bs hrule} and \texttt{\bs vrule} replaced by \texttt{\bs rule} (\LaTeX).}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Added \texttt{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Added the frenchb language (synonym of french).}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/30}{2003/01/30}{Changed the test for empty titles.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/30}{2003/01/30}{Added the \texttt{flsection} and \texttt{flsectionb} package options.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/31}{2003/01/31}{The \texttt{tight} and \texttt{loose} package options are applied to
+%             \texttt{\bs parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/07}{2003/02/07}{Package options \texttt{flsection} and \texttt{flsectionb} removed and
+%             replaced by the \texttt{insection} package option (like \texttt{flsectionb}).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/11}{2003/02/11}{Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT.}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/20}{2003/02/20}{Added frenchle and frenchpro languages (synonyms of french).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/20}{2003/02/20}{Corrected secttocs, at least.}
+% \changes{38 2003/03/18}{2003/03/18}{Corrected some vertical spacings and struts
+%             (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.).
+%             A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now.}
+% \changes{39 2003/04/09}{2003/04/09}{Modern font commands for compatibility with the \texttt{memoir} class.}
+% \changes{39 2003/04/09}{2003/04/09}{\texttt{\bs nomtcpagenumbers} and \texttt{memoir} class.}
+% \changes{39 2003/06/08}{2003/06/08}{Added \texttt{\bs @fileswfalse} and \texttt{\bs mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+%             for the \texttt{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the
+%             \texttt{notoccite} package option (loads the \texttt{notoccite} package).}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Added language options and \texttt{.mld} files for dialects:
+%             canadian (english), acadian, acadien, canadien (french), naustrian, ngerman (ngermanb).}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Added comments in \texttt{.mld} files using special fonts.}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for
+%             appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC.}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/17}{2004/09/17}{Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Added the japanese and castillan languages.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Removed the test on the presence of the \texttt{multicol} package in
+%             \texttt{minitoc.tex}, because \texttt{multicol} is a required package.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Added a figure in \texttt{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Added some infos in \texttt{minitoc.bug}.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Added a paragraph about a problem with the \texttt{appendix} package.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/13}{2004/12/13}{Updated \texttt{fminitoc.bib} and \texttt{minitoc.bib}.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/14}{2004/12/14}{Added the \texttt{hints} package option. This option is still experimental;
+%             you advice is welcome.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/20}{2004/12/20}{Added \texttt{fminitoc.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format).}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Corrections in documentation.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Message added if some sectionning commands are not available.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Replaced \texttt{\bs typeout} commands in \texttt{minitoc.sty}
+%             by the \texttt{\bs PackageInfo} or \texttt{\bs PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful
+%             (\texttt{\bs @gobble} if no line number).  Hence, the package is less verbose
+%             (\texttt{\bs PackageInfo} writes only in the \texttt{.log} file, not on the terminal).}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/06}{2005/01/06}{Added the \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart})
+%             and \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont} commands, with a much simpler syntax.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/10}{2005/01/10}{Added bibliography.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/11}{2005/01/11}{\AmS\ classes: \texttt{amsart} and \texttt{amsproc} are incompatible with
+%             \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{amsbook} needs precautions.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/12}{2005/01/12}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/18}{2005/01/18}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/18}{2005/01/18}{Added a hint for recommending the \texttt{insection} package option.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Added a hint about the presence of \texttt{\bs dominitoc} and co.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Added a hint about coherence \texttt{\bs dominitoc/\bs minitoc} and co.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Improved documentation about hints.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/20}{2005/01/20}{Added a hint about using short extensions with more that
+%             99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/25}{2005/01/25}{\texttt{\bs ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes
+%             \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/26}{2005/01/26}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/28}{2005/01/28}{Added many new language files: \texttt{serbianc.mld}, \texttt{chinese1.mld},
+%             \texttt{chinese2.mld}, \texttt{hangul1.mld}, \texttt{hangul2.mld}, \texttt{hangul3.mld},
+%             \texttt{hangul4.mld}, \texttt{hanja1.mld}, \texttt{hanja2.mld}, \texttt{japanese2.mld},
+%             \texttt{japanese3.mld}, \texttt{japanese4.mld}, \texttt{japanese5.mld}, \texttt{thai.mld}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/02}{2005/02/02}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/03}{2005/02/03}{Added \texttt{\bs plfrule}, \texttt{\bs noplfrule}, \texttt{\bs mlfrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nomlfrule}, \texttt{\bs slfrule}, \texttt{\bs noslfrule}, \texttt{\bs pltrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nopltrule}, \texttt{\bs mltrule}, \texttt{\bs nomltrule}, \texttt{\bs sltrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nosltrule}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/04}{2005/02/04}{Added the \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/08}{2005/02/08}{Added \texttt{latvian.mld}, \texttt{letton.mld},
+%             \texttt{greek-mono.mld}, \texttt{greek-polydemo.mld}, \texttt{greek-polykatha.mld},
+%             \texttt{polish2.mld}, \texttt{russian2m.mld}, and \texttt{russian2o.mld} as new language files.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/09}{2005/02/09}{Added the \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} and \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} environments.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/10}{2005/02/10}{Added tests on the \texttt{mtchideinmain*} environments.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/14}{2005/02/14}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/14}{2005/02/14}{Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/15}{2005/02/15}{Fixed a minor typo.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/16}{2005/02/16}{Upgraded \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/21}{2005/02/21}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/21}{2005/02/21}{Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/24}{2005/02/24}{Fixed a big bug in \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/24}{2005/02/24}{Fixed a bug in \texttt{mtcoff.sty} about \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{Fixed the \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.}\ macros.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{Moved history to the end of package code.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{Added the \texttt{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/07}{2005/03/07}{Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/07}{2005/03/07}{Completed the hint about coherence \texttt{\bs dominitoc/\bs minitoc} and co.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/08}{2005/03/08}{Added a hint about coherence \texttt{\bs minitoc} and \texttt{\bs tableofcontents}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/09}{2005/03/09}{Added comments about fonts.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/10}{2005/03/10}{Corrections in documentation.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/11}{2005/03/11}{Added  \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/14}{2005/03/14}{Added \texttt{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/15}{2005/03/15}{Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule
+%              of each part level mini-table.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/16}{2005/03/16}{Corrections in the arguments of \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/18}{2005/03/18}{Removed \texttt{\bs markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/21}{2005/03/21}{Added \texttt{spanish2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/22}{2005/03/22}{Added a hint for the \texttt{abstract} package.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/06}{2005/04/06}{Corrected the \texttt{stc@verse} environment.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/06}{2005/04/06}{Added \texttt{finnish2.mld}, \texttt{latin2.mld}, and \texttt{magyar2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/08}{2005/04/08}{Renamed \texttt{portuges.mld} as \texttt{portugues.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/12}{2005/04/12}{Correction in \texttt{\bs mtcskip}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/12}{2005/04/12}{First version in \texttt{.dtx} format.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/14}{2005/04/14}{Removed \texttt{\bs ypart}, \texttt{\bs ychapter},
+%             \texttt{\bs ysection}, and stuff; unused.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Corrected a typo in \texttt{\bs @dosectlot}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Print the documentation with ``\texttt{oneside}'' to have all marginal notes
+%               on left. Added the (extended) code of \texttt{morefloats.sty} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars
+%               and floats.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Added \texttt{minitoc.ist} to format the index correctly.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/26}{2005/05/26}{Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/30}{2005/05/30}{Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/30}{2005/05/30}{Added a hint about the \texttt{sectsty} package (must be loaded \emph{before}
+%               \texttt{minitoc}).}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if
+%                                     \texttt{tocdepth}${}<1$.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{The \texttt{hints} option is the default and no more considered as
+%                                     experimental.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/03}{2005/06/03}{Added an error message in \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/06}{2005/06/06}{Added \texttt{portuges.mld}, which loads \texttt{portugues.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/07}{2005/06/07}{Added three variants for the malayalam language:
+%               \texttt{malayalam-keli.mld}, \texttt{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \texttt{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/14}{2005/06/07}{Added method for bilingual documentation}.
+% \changes{43 2005/06/15}{2005/05/15}{Added \texttt{fminitoc.ist} to format correctly the index in french.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/16}{2005/05/16}{Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \texttt{french.mld},
+%                                     and in the french documentation, to stick to the choices of the
+%                                     \texttt{babel} package.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/17}{2005/05/17}{The file \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} is now generated by \texttt{minitoc.ins}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/21}{2005/05/21}{Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as
+%                                     true/false keywords.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/21}{2005/05/21}{Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/22}{2005/05/22}{Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as
+%                                     true/false keywords.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/23}{2005/05/23}{Correctly set the \texttt{\bs ifFTR} flag to have the months in the right
+%                                     language in the bibliography.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/29}{2005/06/29}{Set the flag \texttt{\bs mtcoffwarn@true} in \texttt{mtcoff.sty} if a command
+%                                     \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} is found.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/01}{2005/07/01}{Added \texttt{castillian.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/01}{2005/07/08}{Renamed \texttt{portugues.mld} as \texttt{portuguese.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/11}{2005/07/11}{Added \texttt{brazilian.mld}, \texttt{british.mld}, \texttt{UKenglish.mld},
+%                                     and \texttt{USenglish.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/12}{2005/07/12}{Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/13}{2005/07/13}{Replaced some \texttt{\bs PackageWarning} commands by
+%                                     \texttt{\bs PackageInfo}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/18}{2005/07/18}{Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \texttt{.mld} file.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/20}{2005/07/20}{Improving the \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} and \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}
+%                                     environments.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/21}{2005/07/21}{Removing unused some flags \texttt{\bs if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and
+%                                     \texttt{\bs if@mtc@setrules@act@}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/21}{2005/07/21}{Added the \texttt{\bs decrementptc}, \texttt{\bs decrementmtc}, and \texttt{\bs
+%                                     decrementstc} commands.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Corrected a bug in \texttt{mtcoff.sty}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Improved some messages in \texttt{mtcoff.sty}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Added a test on the version of the \texttt{placeins} package.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/23}{2005/08/23}{Added a note about \texttt{\bs FloatBarrier}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs.
+%                                     Updated \texttt{minitoc.bug}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{Made two versions of the \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} and
+%                                     \texttt{mtchideinmainlot} environment, depending of the presence of
+%                                     the corresponding depth counter.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{The \texttt{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/25}{2005/08/25}{Added a comment about the position of the \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} preparation
+%                                     commands.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/25}{2005/08/25}{Corrections in the \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} and \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}
+%                                     environments.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/26}{2005/08/26}{Added \texttt{guarani.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/29}{2005/08/26}{Added \texttt{\bs incrementptc}, \texttt{\bs incrementmtc},
+%                                     and \texttt{\bs incrementstc}. Added an optional argument to \texttt{\bs adjustptc},
+%                                     \texttt{\bs adjustmtc}, and \texttt{\bs adjuststc}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/29}{2005/08/20}{Added the \texttt{k-tight} and \texttt{k-loose} package options.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/02}{2005/09/02}{Added a patch for the recent version of the \texttt{memoir} class.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/06}{2005/09/06}{Added \texttt{spanish3.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/08}{2005/09/08}{Use \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary''
+%                                     \texttt{.mld} files.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/09}{2005/09/09}{Added \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \texttt{.mld} files to
+%                                     load a \texttt{.mlo} file.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/12}{2005/09/12}{Added a test to forbid direct calls of \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo} by the user.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/13}{2005/09/13}{Added \texttt{farsi1.mld}, \texttt{farsi1.mlo}, \texttt{farsi2.mld}, and
+%                                     \texttt{farsi2.mlo}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/13}{2005/09/13}{Added a note about the \texttt{rubber} script.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/15}{2005/09/15}{Added \texttt{mtcglo.ist} to format the glossary.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/16}{2005/09/16}{Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the *mk scripts.}
+% \or\relax %^^A FRENCH
+% \changes{00 1990/10/01}{1990/10/01}{Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.}
+% \changes{00 1991/11/01}{1991/11/01}{R�vision pour r�utiliser de mani�re transparente les commandes
+%             \texttt{\bs chapter}, \texttt{\bs section}, \texttt{\bs subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement
+%             le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (\xname{Dan}{Jurafsky}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Nouvelle conception, pour �viter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de
+%             fichier, pour chaque chapitre (une faute mortelle) (\xname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs chapterend} pour terminer la port�e d'une minitoc.
+%             (\emph{Si vous oubliez de mettre} \texttt{\bs chapterend} �~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une
+%             entr�e pour le chapitre suivant appara�tra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci �~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Remplacement de l'environnement \texttt{minipage} par un environnement
+%             \texttt{verse}, pour qu'une minitoc puisse se r�partir sur plusieurs pages.}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un
+%             souhaite red�finir cette mise en page, il a juste �~la r��crire (et seulement elle).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant
+%             pr�c�der par \texttt{\bs minitocno}. (\texttt{\bs minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle
+%             est implicite \emph{apr�s} les pseudo-chapitres \texttt{\bs chapter*}).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Probl�mes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \texttt{\bs chapterend} pour terminer
+%             chaque chapitre ayant une minitoc. Comment �viter cette contrainte?}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur
+%             \texttt{minitocdepth} (similaire �~\texttt{tocdepth} pour la table des mati�res).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Au moins trois passes (3) de \LaTeX{} sont n�cessaires pour obtenir des
+%             minitocs correctes (la premi�re passe cr�e les fichiers \texttt{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxi�me les
+%             utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des num�ros de pages faux) et les recr�e, la troisi�me devrait
+%             �tre bonne).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Fonctionne avec \texttt{\bs chapter[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les �l�ments flottants.\NC
+%             Fonctionne avec deux colonnes (mais la minitoc est compos�e en une colonne; comment faire pout
+%             qu'elle s'�tende sur les deux colonnes?).}
+% \changes{01 1993/06/01}{1993/06/01}{Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \texttt{xr.sty} (r�f�rences
+%             externes). \texttt{xr.sty} version~5 est bien plus tol�rant.}
+% \changes{02 1993/07/05}{1993/07/05}{Ajout de la compatibilit� avec \texttt{hangcaption.sty} (le paquetage
+%             \texttt{hangcaption} (s'il est utilis�) doit �tre charg� \emph{avant} le paquetage \texttt{minitoc}).
+%             \emph{Attention} aux options qui modifient \texttt{\bs @caption}.}
+% \changes{03 1993/07/09}{1993/07/09}{Version~3 non distribu�e (erron�e).}
+% \changes{04 1993/07/09}{1993/07/09}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs if@realch} pour �viter que des lignes de contenu
+%             provenant de pseudo-chapitres aillent dans la table des mati�res.
+%             Le fichier paquetage \texttt{mtcoff.sty} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des
+%             commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer l'option minitoc par mtcoff.}
+% \changes{05 1993/07/13}{1993/07/13}{Ajout d'un m�canisme de s�lection pour ne pas �crire des choses superflues
+%             dans les minitocs.}
+% \changes{06 1993/07/15}{1993/07/15}{Correction de probl�mes sur les chapitres dans la table des mati�res,
+%             retrait de code obsol�te pour \texttt{\bs caption} (les filtres sont meilleurs), ajout de la
+%             compatibilit� avec \texttt{toch.sty} (\texttt{toch.sty} cr�e une table des chapitres; si utilis�,
+%             doit �tre charg� \emph{avant} \texttt{minitoc.sty}).}
+% \changes{07 1993/07/22}{1993/07/22}{(\emph{diff�rences majeures}) R��criture compl�te, en utilisant des astuces
+%             de \texttt{xr.sty} (la version~5, de \xname{David}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs
+%             sont directement pr�lev�es dans le fichier \texttt{.toc}. Suppression de \texttt{\bs chapterend} et
+%             \texttt{\bs minitocno}, ajout de \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs dominitoc} et
+%             \texttt{\bs faketableofcontents}.}
+% \changes{08 1993/07/29}{1993/07/29}{Ajustements d'espacement.}
+% \changes{09 1993/08/04}{1993/08/04}{Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et d�commenter;
+%             rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire). MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caract�res pour les suffixes dans
+%             les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots).}
+% \changes{10 1993/08/05}{1993/08/05}{Fonctionne avec les appendices. D�tecte maintenant les versions obsol�tes
+%             de \texttt{latex.tex}: (\texttt{\bs @inputcheck} ou \texttt{\bs reset@font} non d�finies).}
+% \changes{11 1993/08/18}{1993/08/18}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entr�es de section,
+%             \texttt{\bs mtcSSfont} pour les entr�es de sous-section, \texttt{\bs mtcSSSfont} pour les entr�es de
+%             sous-sous-section, \texttt{\bs mtcPfont} pour les entr�es de paragraphe, \texttt{\bs mtcSPfont} pour
+%             les entr�es de sous-paragraphe.}
+% \changes{12 1993/12/16}{1993/12/16}{Utilisation de \texttt{\bs kern} au lieu de \texttt{\bs vspace*} et ajout de
+%             p�nalit�s (\texttt{\bs nopagebreak}) pour �viter une coupure de page just avant la derni�re
+%             \texttt{\bs mtc@rule}. Ajout aussi d'un environnement \texttt{samepage}. Retrait de vieilles lignes
+%             mises en commentaire dans des versions pr�c�dentes.}
+% \changes{13 1993/12/17}{1993/12/17}{Ajout de code pour \texttt{minilof} et \texttt{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS,
+%             d�commenter la d�finition de \texttt{\bs SHORTEXT}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et
+%             ajout de \texttt{\bs raggedright} pour �viter des avertissements \og underfull \fg.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Correction de quelques probl�mes d'espacement (en �vitant
+%             des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
+%             \texttt{\bs mtifont} est chang�e de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Quelques modifications sugg�r�es par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci):
+%             \texttt{\bs @newread} devient \texttt{\bs newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \texttt{\bs newread};
+%             \texttt{\bs empty} remplac�e par \texttt{\bs relax} dans la d�finition par d�faut de
+%             \texttt{\bs reset@font}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Retrait du for�age de \texttt{\bs clubpenalty} et \texttt{\bs widowpenalty}
+%             �~\texttt{10000} (fait par \texttt{\bs samepage}) et \texttt{\bs noindent}.}
+% \changes{14 1994/01/03}{1994/01/03}{Traitement simplifi� de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \texttt{\bs minitoc},
+%             \texttt{\bs minilof} et \texttt{\bs minilot}.}
+% \changes{15 1994/01/27}{1994/01/27}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs parttoc}, \texttt{\bs partlof} et \texttt{\bs partlot}
+%             pour la classe \texttt{book}, de \texttt{\bs secttoc}, \texttt{\bs sectlof} et \texttt{\bs sectlot}
+%             pour les articles, avec des commandes et param�tres en parall�le avec ceux pour les mini-tables.}
+% \changes{16 1994/02/02}{1994/0202}{Corrections d'erreurs (typos).}
+% \changes{17 1994/06/23}{1994/06/23}{\og \texttt{n} \fg\ (nul) synonyme de \og \texttt{e} \fg\ (\emph{empty}, vide)
+%             dans l'argument optionnel de argument \texttt{\bs minitoc}, \texttt{\bs dominitoc}, et analogues.}
+% \changes{17 1994/06/23}{1994/06/23}{Compatibilit� avec \og \LaTeXe \fg. Merci �~\xname{Denis}{Roegel} (qui a
+%             trouv� le probl�me) et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donn� les indications pour le r�soudre).}
+% \changes{18 1994/06/26}{1994/06/26}{Rendu \texttt{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe.}
+% \changes{18 1994/06/26}{1994/06/26}{Introduction des fichiers de langage comme options. Grand merci
+%             �~\xname{Michel}{Goossens} (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a �t� inspir� par le code du
+%             paquetage \texttt{babel} (de \xname{Johannes}{Braams}).}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Ajout de code pour num�roter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans
+%             commencer �~1. Ajout des commandes \texttt{\bs firstchapteris}, etc.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Ajout des commandes \texttt{\bs mtcrule}, \texttt{\bs nomtcrule}, etc.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Correction d'une erreur dans \texttt{\bs c@mti}.}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Correction dans \texttt{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michel}{Rynning}.)}
+% \changes{19 1994/08/16}{1994/08/16}{Correction de l'appendice dans les articles.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Correction de l'espacement avant et apr�s les minitocs et analogues.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Ajout des commandes \texttt{\bs mtcpagenumbers} et \texttt{\bs nomtcpagenumbers}
+%             (et analogues) pour faire des minitocs avec ou sans num�ros de pages. D�faut: avec num�ros de pages.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Correction du probl�me (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Correction de l'espacement vertical.}
+% \changes{20 1994/08/25}{1994/08/25}{Correction d'un probl�me avec des chapitres num�rot�s avec des chiffres romains
+%             majuscules.}
+% \changes{21 1994/09/07}{1994/09/07}{Correction de typos dans \texttt{minitoc.sty} et \texttt{minitoc.tex}.}
+% \changes{22 1994/10/10}{1994/10/10}{Correction de typos dans \texttt{minitoc.sty}.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \texttt{\bs sectlof}.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Fonctionne avec les classes de document r�initialisant le num�ro de chapitre
+%             (ou de section) �~chaque partie (merci �~\xname{Denis}{Roegel}).}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Retrait du code pour \texttt{\bs firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes
+%             sont obsol�tes.}
+% \changes{23 1994/11/08}{1994/11/08}{Retrait du code pour l'appendice.}
+% \changes{24 1994/12/21}{1994/12/21}{Les commandes \texttt{\bs protect} ont �t� retir�es des fichiers \texttt{.toc},
+%             \texttt{.lot} et \texttt{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes ont �t� corrig�es pour �tre
+%             compatibles avec la version de \LaTeXe\ de d�cembre 1994. Merci �~\xname{Denis}{Roegel} qui a fait
+%             le travail.}
+% \changes{25 1996/09/13}{1996/09/13}{Mise �~jour de \texttt{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \texttt{mtcnynorsk.sty}
+%             sur une suggestion de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.}
+% \changes{26 1996/11/14}{1996/11/14}{Les fichiers sp�cifiques des langues sont maintenant nomm�s
+%             \meta{langue}\texttt{.mld} (remplace \texttt{mtc}\meta{langue}\texttt{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des
+%             paquetages et que cela fait des noms plus courts.}
+% \changes{26 1996/11/14}{1996/11/14}{Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish,
+%             lower- et upper-sorbian; renomm� \og esperanto \fg\ en \og esperant \fg\ comme dans le paquetage \texttt{babel}.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement �toil�es.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{\texttt{english.mld} charg� comme langue par d�faut.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Ajout de \texttt{vietnam.mld} et \texttt{arab.mld}.}
+% \changes{27 1996/12/20}{1996/12/20}{Renomm� \texttt{minitocoff.sty} en \texttt{mtcoff.sty} pour que le nom reste
+%             court.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n).}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Ajout de l'option de paquetage \texttt{shortext}.}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses caf�).}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Ajout du code de \texttt{\bs addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre
+%             �toil�).}
+% \changes{28 1997/10/29}{1997/10/29}{Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs.}
+% \changes{28 1998/06/15}{1998/06/15}{Un typo corrig� par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             devrait probablement �tre\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}\hfill\null\protect\linebreak[4]
+%             (une contre-oblique manquait apr�s \texttt{\bs let}). Merci �~lui.}
+% \changes{28 1998/06/15}{1998/06/15}{Ajout de la langue bahasa.}
+% \changes{28 1998/12/03}{1998/12/03}{Ajout des options de paquetage \texttt{tight} et \texttt{loose}.}
+% \changes{29 1999/03/16}{1999/03/16}{Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc.}
+% \changes{29 1999/06/28}{1999/06/28}{Ajout de la langue armenian (d'apr�s Arm\TeX).}
+% \changes{29 1999/07/23}{1999/07/23}{Ajout des options de paquetage \texttt{dotted/undotted} (d�faut: \texttt{dotted}).}
+% \changes{29 1999/07/29}{1999/07/29}{Ajout de la langue lithuanian.}
+% \changes{30 1999/12/06}{1999/12/06}{Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh.}
+% \changes{30 1999/12/06}{1999/12/06}{Correction d'une erreur dans la d�finition de \texttt{\bs sltname} (\texttt{mlt}
+%             devrait �tre \texttt{slt}).}
+% \changes{31 2000/04/04}{2000/04/04}{Ajout de la compatibilit� avec le paquetage \texttt{hyperref}, merci
+%             �~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a aussi simplifi� certains
+%             morceaux de code et corrig� l'inf�me erreur sur \texttt{\bs chapter*}.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{Ajout de tr�s (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs
+%             associ�s aux mini-tables: \texttt{\bs beforeparttoc}, \texttt{\bs beforepartlof}, \texttt{\bs beforepartlot},
+%             \texttt{\bs afterparttoc}, \texttt{\bs afterpartlof}, \texttt{\bs afterpartlot},
+%             \texttt{\bs thispageparttocstyle}, \texttt{\bs thispagepartlofstyle} et \texttt{\bs thispagepartlotstyle}.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{Documentation am�lior�e par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.}
+% \changes{32 2000/08/08}{2000/08/08}{Correction de \texttt{\bs nomtcrule}.}
+% \changes{33 2000/12/07}{2000/12/07}{Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter},
+%             \texttt{\bs mtcaddsection} et \texttt{\bs mtcaddpart}.
+%             Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \texttt{.toc}, \texttt{.lof} et \texttt{.lot}
+%             pour le probl�me de \texttt{\bs chapter*} (\texttt{\bs section*} et \texttt{\bs part*}). D'apr�s une
+%             suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.}
+% \changes{33 2000/12/08}{2000/12/08}{Correction d'un probl�me dans \texttt{\bs mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un
+%             argument optionnel blanc.}
+% \changes{34 2000/12/13}{2000/12/13}{Ajout dans la documentation d'un section sur l'utilisation avec le
+%             paquetage \texttt{tocbibend}.}
+% \changes{34 2000/12/13}{2000/12/13}{Ajout de fichiers \texttt{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi,
+%             \texttt{american.mld} ne fait que charger \texttt{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies d�finitions.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og vide\fg\ (c'est-�-dire vide,
+%             blanc ou inexistant) ou \og non vide \fg\ (c'est-�-dire utile). J'ai utilis� du code de
+%             \xname{Stephan~P.~von}{Bechtolsheim}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Ajout des options de paquetage \texttt{checkfiles/nocheckfiles}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/01/09}{2001/01/09}{Remplacement de \texttt{\bs The@chapter} par \texttt{\bs The@mtc}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/02/26}{2001/02/26}{Ajout de \texttt{bulgarian.mld}, \texttt{hebrew.mld}, \texttt{icelandic.mld},
+%             \texttt{latin.mld} et \texttt{samin.mld}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/03/09}{2001/03/09}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage}.}
+% \changes{35 2001/06/01}{2001/06/01}{Correction de l'option de paquetage \texttt{estionian} (manquante).}
+% \changes{35 2001/07/04}{2001/07/04}{Ajout de la langue interlingua.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/11}{2002/02/11}{Correction d'une interaction avec \texttt{\bs tableofcontents} qui cr�e un
+%             \texttt{\bs chapter*} ou une \texttt{\bs section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \texttt{mtc/stc}
+%             (probl�me signall� par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/18}{2002/02/18}{Correction d'un probl�me d'espacement avec des titres vides (probl�me signall�
+%             par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/18}{2002/02/18}{Contournement du probl�me \texttt{\bs parttoc}-\texttt{\bs chapter*}.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/19}{2002/02/19}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcskip} et \texttt{\bs mtcskipamount}.}
+% \changes{36 2002/02/27}{2002/02/27}{Correction du test sur les fichiers vides.}
+% \changes{36 2002/03/13}{2002/03/13}{Ajout de la langue bangla.}
+% \changes{36 2002/03/15}{2002/03/15}{R�duction de la profondeur de \texttt{\bs mtc@strutbox}.}
+% \changes{37 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Version~\#37 saut�e.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{\texttt{pt} devient \texttt{\bs @pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \texttt{\bs z@}.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{\texttt{\bs hrule} et \texttt{\bs vrule} remplac�es par \texttt{\bs rule} (\LaTeX).}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Ajout de \texttt{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/24}{2003/01/24}{Ajout de la langue frenchb  (synonyme de french).}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/30}{2003/01/30}{Changement du test pour les titres vides.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/30}{2003/01/30}{Ajout des options de paquetage \texttt{flsection} et \texttt{flsectionb}.}
+% \changes{38 2003/01/31}{2003/01/31}{Les options de paquetage \texttt{tight} et \texttt{loose} sont appliqu�es
+%             �~\texttt{\bs parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/07}{2003/02/07}{Options de paquetage \texttt{flsection} et \texttt{flsectionb} retir�es et
+%             remplac�es par l'option de paquetage \texttt{insection} (comme \texttt{flsectionb}).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/11}{2003/02/11}{Correction de la num�rotation des SLF, SLT.}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/20}{2003/02/20}{Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french).}
+% \changes{38 2003/02/20}{2003/02/20}{Correction des secttocs, enfin.}
+% \changes{38 2003/03/18}{2003/03/18}{Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'�tais
+%             (j'ai ajout� quelques modifications de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci �~lui.).
+%             Il reste pas mal de nettoyage �~faire, mais il semble n�cessaire de publier la distribution maintenant.}
+% \changes{39 2003/04/09}{2003/04/09}{Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilit� avec la classe \texttt{memoir}.}
+% \changes{39 2003/04/09}{2003/04/09}{\texttt{\bs nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \texttt{memoir}.}
+% \changes{39 2003/06/08}{2003/06/08}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs @fileswfalse} et \texttt{\bs mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+%             pour le paquetage \texttt{notoccite} (demand� par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de
+%             paquetage \texttt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \texttt{notoccite}).}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \texttt{.mld} pour les dialectes:
+%             canadian (english), acadian, acadien, canadien (french), naustrian, ngerman (ngermanb).}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \texttt{.mld} utilisant des fontes
+%             sp�ciales.}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/08}{2004/09/08}{Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire
+%             une table des mati�res pour les appendices, �ventuellement non list�e dans la table des mati�res
+%             principale.}
+% \changes{39 2004/09/17}{2004/09/17}{Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Ajout des langues japanese et castillan.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Retrait du test sur la pr�sence du paquetage \texttt{multicol} dans
+%             \texttt{minitoc.tex}, puisque \texttt{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}).}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Ajout d'une figure dans \texttt{minitoc.tex} sur la n�cessit� de trois compilations.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Ajout de quelques informations dans \texttt{minitoc.bug}.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/09}{2004/12/09}{Ajout d'un paragraphe sur un probl�me avec le paquetage \texttt{appendix}.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/13}{2004/12/13}{Mise �~jour de \texttt{fminitoc.bib} et \texttt{minitoc.bib}.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/14}{2004/12/14}{Ajout de l'option de paquetage \texttt{hints}. Cette option est encore
+%             exp�rimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu.}
+% \changes{40 2004/12/20}{2004/12/20}{Ajout de \texttt{fminitoc.pdf} (documentation en fran�ais en format PDF).}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Corrections dans la documentation.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Message ajout� si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas
+%             disponibles.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/05}{2005/01/05}{Remplacement des commandes \texttt{\bs typeout} dans \texttt{minitoc.sty}
+%             par les commandes \texttt{\bs PackageInfo} ou \texttt{\bs PackageWarning}; avec le num�ro de ligne
+%             lorsqu'il est utile (\texttt{\bs @gobble} si pas de num�ro de ligne). En cons�quence, le paquetage
+%             est moins bavard (\texttt{\bs PackageInfo} �crit seulement dans le fichier \texttt{.log}, pas sur le
+%             terminal).}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/06}{2005/01/06}{Ajout des commandes \texttt{\bs mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart})
+%             et \texttt{\bs mtcsettitlefont}, avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/10}{2005/01/10}{Ajout de la bibliographie.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/11}{2005/01/11}{Classes \AmS: \texttt{amsart} et \texttt{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec
+%             \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{amsbook} demande des pr�cautions.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/12}{2005/01/12}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/18}{2005/01/18}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/18}{2005/01/18}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \texttt{insection}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la pr�sence de \texttt{\bs dominitoc} et co.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la coh�rence \texttt{\bs dominitoc/\bs minitoc} et co.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/19}{2005/01/19}{Am�lioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/20}{2005/01/20}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de
+%             99~parties ou 99~chapitres ou 99~sections.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/25}{2005/01/25}{\texttt{\bs ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient
+%             \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/26}{2005/01/26}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsetpagenumbers}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/01/28}{2005/01/28}{Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \texttt{serbianc.mld}, \texttt{chinese1.mld},
+%             \texttt{chinese2.mld}, \texttt{hangul1.mld}, \texttt{hangul2.mld}, \texttt{hangul3.mld},
+%             \texttt{hangul4.mld}, \texttt{hanja1.mld}, \texttt{hanja2.mld}, \texttt{japanese2.mld},
+%             \texttt{japanese3.mld}, \texttt{japanese4.mld}, \texttt{japanese5.mld}, \texttt{thai.mld}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/02}{2005/02/02}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsetrules}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/03}{2005/02/03}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs plfrule}, \texttt{\bs noplfrule}, \texttt{\bs mlfrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nomlfrule}, \texttt{\bs slfrule}, \texttt{\bs noslfrule}, \texttt{\bs pltrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nopltrule}, \texttt{\bs mltrule}, \texttt{\bs nomltrule}, \texttt{\bs sltrule},
+%             \texttt{\bs nosltrule}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/04}{2005/02/04}{Ajout de l'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/08}{2005/02/08}{Ajout de nouvelles langues: \texttt{latvian.mld}, \texttt{letton.mld},
+%             \texttt{greek-mono.mld}, \texttt{greek-polydemo.mld}, \texttt{greek-polykatha.mld},
+%             \texttt{polish2.mld}, \texttt{russian2m.mld}, \texttt{russian2o.mld}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/09}{2005/02/09}{Ajout des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/10}{2005/02/10}{Ajout de tests sur les environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain*}.}
+% \changes{41 2005/02/14}{2005/02/14}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/14}{2005/02/14}{Remplacement de \og language \fg\ par \og langue \fg\ dans la documentation
+%             fran�aise.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/15}{2005/02/15}{Correction d'un typo mineur.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/16}{2005/02/16}{Am�lioration de \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{42 2005/02/21}{2005/02/21}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsettitle}, oubli�e dans v41.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/21}{2005/02/21}{Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/24}{2005/02/24}{Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \texttt{\bs mtcsetformat}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/02/24}{2005/02/24}{Correction d'une erreur dans \texttt{mtcoff.sty} �~propos de
+%             \texttt{\bs mtcfixindex}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{Correction des macros \texttt{\bs mtcset.{}.{}.}}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{D�placement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/02}{2005/03/02}{Ajout du fichier \texttt{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/07}{2005/03/07}{Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/07}{2005/03/07}{Compl�ter le \emph{hint} sur la coh�rence \texttt{\bs dominitoc/\bs minitoc} et co.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/08}{2005/03/08}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la coh�rence entre \texttt{\bs minitoc} et
+%             \texttt{\bs tableofcontents}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/09}{2005/03/09}{Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/10}{2005/03/10}{Corrections dans la documentation.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/11}{2005/03/11}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/14}{2005/03/14}{Ajout de \texttt{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/15}{2005/03/15}{Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} apr�s le \texttt{\bs\bs} apr�s le
+%             filet sup�rieur de chaque mini-table au niveau partie.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/16}{2005/03/16}{Corrections dans les arguments de \texttt{\bs mtcsetfeature}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/18}{2005/03/18}{Retrait de \texttt{\bs markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots).}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/21}{2005/03/21}{Ajout de \texttt{spanish2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/03/22}{2005/03/22}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \texttt{abstract}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/06}{2005/04/06}{Correction de l'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/06}{2005/04/06}{Ajout de \texttt{finnish2.mld}, \texttt{latin2.mld} et \texttt{magyar2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/08}{2005/04/08}{Renommage de \texttt{portuges.mld} en \texttt{portugues.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/12}{2005/04/12}{Correction dans \texttt{\bs mtcskip}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/12}{2005/04/12}{Premi�re version en format \texttt{.dtx}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/04/14}{2005/04/14}{Retrait de \texttt{\bs ypart}, \texttt{\bs ychapter},
+%             \texttt{\bs ysection}, etc., inutilis�es.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Correction d'un typo dans \texttt{\bs @dosectlot}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcfixglossary}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Impression de la documentation avec \og \texttt{oneside} \fg\ pour avoir
+%             toutes les notes marginales sur la gauche. Ajout du code (�tendu) de \texttt{morefloats.sty}
+%             (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre davantage de notes marginales et d'�l�ments flottants.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/11}{2005/05/11}{Ajout de \texttt{minitoc.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/26}{2005/05/26}{Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/30}{2005/05/30}{Correction des entr�es de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les
+%             num�ros de pages doivent �tre omis.}
+% \changes{43 2005/05/30}{2005/05/30}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \texttt{sectsty} (il doit �tre
+%             charg� \emph{avant} \texttt{minitoc}).}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsol�tes.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/01}{2005/06/01}{Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas �tre imprim�es
+%             vides m�me si \texttt{tocdepth}${}<1$.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/02}{2005/06/02}{L'option \texttt{hints} est le choix par d�faut et n'est plus consid�r�e
+%             comme exp�rimentale.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/03}{2005/06/03}{Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \texttt{\bs mtcsetdepth} si le compteur
+%             n'est pas disponible.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/06}{2005/06/06}{Ajout de \texttt{portuges.mld}, qui charge \texttt{portugues.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/07}{2005/06/07}{Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam:
+%               \texttt{malayalam-keli.mld}, \texttt{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \texttt{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/14}{2005/06/07}{Ajout d'une m�thode pour documentation bilingue.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/15}{2005/05/15}{Ajout de \texttt{fminitoc.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en
+%             fran�ais.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/16}{2005/05/16}{Changement de \og Liste des Tables \fg\ en \og Liste des Tableaux \fg\ dans
+%             \texttt{french.mld} et dans la documentation fran�aise, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \texttt{babel}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/17}{2005/05/17}{Le fichier \texttt{fminitoc.dtx} est maintenant engendr� par \texttt{minitoc.ins}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/21}{2005/05/21}{Ajout des mots-cl�s \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non},
+%             \texttt{O} et \texttt{o} pour vrai/faux.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/21}{2005/05/21}{Condensation du code de d�tection des suffixes courts ou longs.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/22}{2005/05/22}{Ajout des mots-cl�s \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux},
+%             \texttt{V} et \texttt{v} pour vrai/faux.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/23}{2005/05/23}{�tablir correctement l'indicateur \texttt{\bs ifFTR} pour avoir les mois
+%             dans la langue correcte dans la bibliographie.}
+% \changes{43 2005/06/29}{2005/06/29}{�tablir l'indicateur \texttt{\bs mtcoffwarn@true} par \texttt{mtcoff.sty} si
+%             une commande \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouv�e.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/01}{2005/07/01}{Ajout de \texttt{castillian.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/01}{2005/07/08}{Renommage de \texttt{portugues.mld} en \texttt{portuguese.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/11}{2005/07/11}{Ajout de \texttt{brazilian.mld}, \texttt{british.mld}, \texttt{UKenglish.mld}
+%             et \texttt{USenglish.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/12}{2005/07/12}{Suppression de \og G�n�ral: \fg\ dans l'historique des modifications.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/13}{2005/07/13}{Remplacement de quelques commandes \texttt{\bs PackageWarning} par
+%             \texttt{\bs PackageInfo}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/18}{2005/07/18}{Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un
+%             fichier \texttt{.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/20}{2005/07/20}{Am�lioration des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et
+%             \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/21}{2005/07/21}{Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \texttt{\bs if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et
+%             \texttt{\bs if@mtc@setrules@act@}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/21}{2005/07/21}{Ajout des commandes \texttt{\bs decrementptc}, \texttt{\bs decrementmtc} et
+%             \texttt{\bs decrementstc}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Correction d'une bourde dans \texttt{mtcoff.sty}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Am�lioration de quelques messages dans \texttt{mtcoff.sty}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/07/22}{2005/07/22}{Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \texttt{placeins}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/23}{2005/08/23}{Ajout d'une note sur \texttt{\bs FloatBarrier}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{Ajout d'une note sur un probl�me d'alignement dans les minitocs.
+%             Mise �~jour de \texttt{minitoc.bug}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{Fait deux versions des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et
+%             \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}, selon la pr�sence du compteur de profondeur correspondant.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/24}{2005/08/24}{La classe \texttt{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop r�cente.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/25}{2005/08/25}{Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.}de
+%             pr�paration.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/25}{2005/08/25}{Corrections dans les environnements \texttt{mtchideinmainlof} et
+%             \texttt{mtchideinmainlot}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/26}{2005/08/26}{Ajout de \texttt{guarani.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/29}{2005/08/26}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs incrementptc}, \texttt{\bs incrementmtc} et
+%             \texttt{\bs incrementstc}. Ajout d'un argument optionnel � \texttt{\bs adjustptc}, \texttt{\bs adjustmtc} et
+%             \texttt{\bs adjuststc}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/08/29}{2005/08/20}{Ajout des options \texttt{k-tight} et \texttt{k-loose}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/02}{2005/09/02}{Ajout d'un patch pour la version r�cente de la classe \texttt{memoir}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/06}{2005/09/06}{Ajout de \texttt{spanish3.mld}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/08}{2005/09/08}{Utiliser \texttt{\bs mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans
+%             les fichiers \texttt{.mld} \og secondaires\fg.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/09}{2005/09/09}{Ajout de \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo} �~utiliser dans certains fichiers \texttt{.mld}
+%             pour charger un fichier \texttt{.mlo}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/12}{2005/09/12}{Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \texttt{\bs mtcloadmlo}
+%             par l'utilisateur.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/13}{2005/09/13}{Ajout de \texttt{farsi1.mld}, \texttt{farsi1.mlo}, \texttt{farsi2.mld} et
+%             \texttt{farsi2.ml0}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/13}{2005/09/13}{Ajout d'une note sur le script \texttt{rubber}.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/15}{2005/09/15}{Ajout de \texttt{mtcglo.ist} pour formatter le glossaire.}
+% \changes{43 2005/09/16}{2005/09/16}{Retrait des num�ros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts *mk.}
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \Finale
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9ef83156c34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/minitoc/minitoc.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,1251 @@
+\bgroup
+\catcode`\^^?=11
+\begin{filecontents}{./chinese1.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file file Bg5.cap of the CJK package
+%   for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+%   created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Chinese captions
+%
+% character set: Big 5
+% encoding: Big 5
+%
+\def\ptctitle{��~~��}%
+\def\plftitle{��~��~��}%
+\def\plttitle{��~��~��}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{��~~��}%
+\def\mlftitle{��~��~��}%
+\def\mlttitle{��~��~��}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{��~~��}%
+\def\slftitle{��~��~��}%
+\def\slttitle{��~��~��}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./chinese2.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Chinese captions
+%
+% character set: Big 5
+% encoding: Big 5
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�216~~�253}
+\def\plftitle{�207~�216~�253}
+\def\plttitle{�237~�216~�253}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�216~~�253}
+\def\mlftitle{�207~�216~�253}
+\def\mlttitle{�237~�216~�253}
+%
+\def\stctitle{�216~~�253}
+\def\slftitle{�207~�216~�253}
+\def\slttitle{�237~�216~�253}
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./farsi1.mlo}
+\ProvidesFiles{farsi1.mlo}[2005/09/13]
+% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
+% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
+% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
+% http://www.farsitex.org
+\def\ptctitle{��¨� �������}
+\def\plftitle{�ƴ ��ؑ�}
+\def\plttitle{�ƴ �����}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{��¨� �������}
+\def\mlftitle{�ƴ ��ؑ�}
+\def\mlttitle{�ƴ �����}
+%
+\def\stctitle{��¨� �������}
+\def\slftitle{�ƴ ��ؑ�}
+\def\slttitle{�ƴ �����}
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./farsi2.mlo}
+\ProvidesFiles{farsi2.mlo}[2005/09/13]
+% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project
+% by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu),
+% Hassan Abolhassani, and others.
+% http://www.farsitex.org
+\def\ptctitle{������� �����}
+\def\plftitle{� ����}
+\def\plttitle{����� ����}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{������� �����}
+\def\mlftitle{� ����}
+\def\mlttitle{����� ����}
+%
+\def\stctitle{������� �����}
+\def\slftitle{� ����}
+\def\slttitle{����� ����}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hangul1.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Hangul captions
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+\def\ptctitle{����}%
+\def\plftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\plttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{����}%
+\def\mlftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\mlttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{����}%
+\def\slftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\slttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hangul2.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Hangul captions
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�241�247}%
+\def\plftitle{�215�178~�241�247}%
+\def\plttitle{�165~�241�247}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�241�247}%
+\def\mlftitle{�215�178~�241�247}%
+\def\mlttitle{�165~�241�247}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{�241�247}%
+\def\slftitle{�215�178~�241�247}%
+\def\slttitle{�165~�241�247}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hangul3.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Hangul captions set 2
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+\def\ptctitle{����}%
+\def\plftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\plttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{����}%
+\def\mlftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\mlttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{����}%
+\def\slftitle{�׸�~����}%
+\def\slttitle{ǥ~����}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hangul4.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Hangul captions set 2
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�247�202}%
+\def\plftitle{�215�178~�247�202}%
+\def\plttitle{�165~�247�202}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�247�202}%
+\def\mlftitle{�215�178~�247�202}%
+\def\mlttitle{�165~�247�202}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{�247�202}%
+\def\slftitle{�215�178~�247�202}%
+\def\slttitle{�165~�247�202}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hanja1.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Hanja captions
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�205�173}%
+\def\plftitle{�215�178~�205�173}%
+\def\plttitle{�250~�205�173}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�205�173}%
+\def\mlftitle{�215�178~�205�173}%
+\def\mlttitle{�250~�205�173}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{�205�173}%
+\def\slftitle{�215�178~�205�173}%
+\def\slttitle{�250~�205�173}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./hanja2.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>
+%
+% Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997)
+%
+% Hanja captions
+%
+% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992)
+% encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%
+\def\ptctitle{���}$
+\def\plftitle{�׸�~���}$
+\def\plttitle{��~���}$
+%
+\def\mtctitle{���}$
+\def\mlftitle{�׸�~���}$
+\def\mlttitle{��~���}$
+%
+\def\stctitle{���}$
+\def\slftitle{�׸�~���}$
+\def\slttitle{��~���}$
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./japanese.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{japanese.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: SJIS
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\def\stctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./japanese2.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: EUC
+%
+\def\plttitle{�ܼ�}%
+\def\plftitle{���ܼ�}%
+\def\plttitle{ɽ�ܼ�}%
+%
+\def\mlttitle{�ܼ�}%
+\def\mlftitle{���ܼ�}%
+\def\mlttitle{ɽ�ܼ�}%
+%
+\def\slttitle{�ܼ�}%
+\def\slftitle{���ܼ�}%
+\def\slttitle{ɽ�ܼ�}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./japanese3.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: EUC
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�220�161}%
+\def\plftitle{�222�220�161}%
+\def\plttitle{�189�220�161}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�220�161}%
+\def\mlftitle{�222�220�161}%
+\def\mlttitle{�189�220�161}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{�220�161}%
+\def\slftitle{�222�220�161}%
+\def\slttitle{�189�220�161}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./japanese4.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% From the file SJIS.cap of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: SJIS
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\plftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\plttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\mlftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\mlttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\def\stctitle{�ڎ�}
+\def\slftitle{\CJKchar{"090}{"07D}�ڎ�}
+\def\slttitle{\CJKchar{"095}{"05C}�ڎ�}
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./japanese5.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mlo}[[2005/01/28]
+% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package
+% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e
+% created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%
+% Japanese captions
+%
+% character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990)
+% encoding: SJIS
+%
+% preprocessed
+%
+\def\ptctitle{�218�159}
+\def\plftitle{�125�218�159}
+\def\plttitle{�92�218�159}
+%
+\def\mtctitle{�218�159}
+\def\mlftitle{�125�218�159}
+\def\mlttitle{�92�218�159}
+%
+\def\stctitle{�218�159}
+\def\slftitle{�125�218�159}
+\def\slttitle{�92�218�159}
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./thai.mlo}
+\ProvidesFile{thai.mlo}[2005/01/28]
+% from thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system
+% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%
+\def\ptctitle{��úѭ}%
+\def\plftitle{��úѭ�ٻ}%
+\def\plttitle{��úѭ���ҧ}%
+%
+\def\mtctitle{��úѭ}%
+\def\mlftitle{��úѭ�ٻ}%
+\def\mlttitle{��úѭ���ҧ}%
+%
+\def\stctitle{��úѭ}%
+\def\slftitle{��úѭ�ٻ}%
+\def\slttitle{��úѭ���ҧ}%
+%
+\end{filecontents}
+\egroup
+\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.ist}
+%%
+%% This is file `minitoc.ist',
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright (C) 2005 by:
+%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
+%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
+%% 
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+%% 
+%% This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
+%% 
+%% This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
+%% distributed with it.
+%% 
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+
+actual '='
+quote '!'
+level '>'
+encap '|'
+preamble
+"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+postamble
+"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n"
+item_x1   "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+item_x2   "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
+delim_0   " \\dotfill \ "
+delim_1   " \\dotfill \ "
+delim_2   " \\dotfill \ "
+% The next lines will produce some warnings when
+% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
+% versions of the program:
+lethead_prefix   "{\\normalsize \\bfseries\\hfil "
+lethead_suffix   "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+lethead_flag       1
+heading_prefix   "{\\normalsize \\bfseries\\hfil\\ "
+heading_suffix   " \\ \\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+headings_flag       1
+%% 
+%%
+%% End of file `minitoc.ist'.
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./fminitoc.ist}
+%%
+%% This is file `fminitoc.ist',
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package is
+%% given in the file `minitoc.l'.
+%% 
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+actual '='
+quote '!'
+level '>'
+encap '|'
+preamble
+"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+postamble
+"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n"
+item_x1   "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+item_x2   "\\efill \n \\subsubitem "
+delim_0   " \\dotfill \ "
+delim_1   " \\dotfill \ "
+delim_2   " \\dotfill \ "
+% The next lines will produce some warnings when
+% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different
+% versions of the program:
+lethead_prefix   "{\\normalsize \\bfseries\\hfil "
+lethead_suffix   "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+lethead_flag       1
+heading_prefix   "{\\normalsize \\bfseries\\hfil "
+heading_suffix   " \\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+headings_flag       1
+%% 
+% Added for french.
+symhead_positive   "Symboles"
+symhead_negative   "symboles"
+numhead_positive   "Nombres"
+numhead_negative   "nombres"
+%%
+%% End of file `fminitoc.ist'.
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./mtcglo.ist}
+%%
+%% This is file `mtcglo.ist',
+%% This is a generated file.
+%% 
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
+%% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+%% in this file.
+%% 
+%% This file was generated from file(s) of the LaTeX base system.
+%% --------------------------------------------------------------
+%% 
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% 
+%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package is
+%% given in the file `minitoc.l'.
+%% 
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+actual '='
+quote '!'
+level '>'
+item_x1   "\\efill \n \\subitem "
+item_x2   "\\ "
+delim_0   "\\hfill "
+delim_1   "\\hfill "
+delim_2   "\\hfill "
+heading_prefix   "{\\bfseries\\hfil "
+heading_suffix   "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n"
+headings_flag       0
+preamble
+"\n \\begin{theglossary} \n
+    \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n"
+postamble
+"\n\n \\end{theglossary}\n"
+keyword "\\glossaryentry"
+
+%% End of file `mtcglo.ist'.
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.lan}
+\def\LANG{0}
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./fminitoc.lan}
+\def\LANG{1}
+\endinput
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./minitoc.pre}
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage{comment}
+\usepackage{enumerate}
+%<ADDITIONS
+\usepackage{ragged2e}
+\usepackage{array}
+% colonne de type `p', mais raggedright...
+\newcolumntype{R}[1]{>{\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
+\newcolumntype{L}[1]{>{\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
+\newcolumntype{C}[1]{>{\Centering\arraybackslash}p{#1}}
+%La somme des coeffs doit �tre �gale au nombre de colonnes Z, P et X.
+\newcolumntype{Z}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}X}
+\newcolumntype{Y}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}X}
+\newcolumntype{O}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\Centering\arraybackslash}X}
+%La somme des coeffs doit �tre �gale au nombre de colonnes Z, O, P et X.
+\newcolumntype{P}[1]{>{\hsize=#1\hsize\relax\leavevmode\arraybackslash}X}
+%ADDITIONS>
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\textbackslash}{TS1}{92}
+\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\textbackslash}{TS1}
+\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{\usepackage{txfonts}}{\relax}
+\newif\ifDP\DPfalse
+\IfFileExists{dpfloat.sty}{\usepackage{dpfloat}\DPtrue}{\DPfalse}
+\usepackage{tocbibind}
+\usepackage{nameref}
+\input{\jobname.lan}
+\newif\ifFTR
+\makeatletter                  % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue  % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\makeatother                   % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\FTRfalse
+\usepackage[english]{varioref}
+\or\relax
+\FTRtrue
+\usepackage{frbib}
+\usepackage[french]{varioref}
+\fi
+\makeatletter                  % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse% ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\makeatother                   % ESSAI pour tromper varioref
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\def\gpdftitle{The minitoc package}
+\or\relax
+\def\gpdftitle{Le paquetage minitoc}
+\fi
+\ifpdf
+  \usepackage[pdftex]{color}
+  \usepackage[pdftex,pstarrows]{pict2e}
+  \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
+  \usepackage[pdftex, colorlinks,%
+   pdfpagelayout=SinglePage,%
+%   pdfpagetransition=Dissolve,% slow
+%   pdfpagetransition={Split /H /O},%
+   pdftitle={\gpdftitle},%
+   pdfsubject={minitoc},%
+   pdfauthor={Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert},%
+   pdfcreator={pdflatex},%
+   pagebackref=true,%
+   pdfnewwindow=true,%
+   bookmarksnumbered=true,%
+%   plainpages=false,%
+   bookmarksopen]%
+            {hyperref}
+\else
+  \usepackage[dvips]{color}
+  \usepackage[dvips,pstarrows]{pict2e}
+  \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
+  \usepackage{hyperref}
+\fi
+\makeatletter % to include some useful commands
+%avoid warnings
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@xpart}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@xchapter}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@xsection}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@starpart}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@starchapter}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@starsection}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@ppart}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@pchapter}{0}
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@psection}{0}
+\makeatother
+\usepackage{tabularx}
+\usepackage{multicol}% v40
+\usepackage{fixfoot}
+% Check if booktabs package is available
+\newif\ifBT \BTfalse
+\IfFileExists{booktabs.sty}{\BTtrue\usepackage{booktabs}}{\BTfalse}
+% Check if url package is available
+\IfFileExists{url.sty}{\usepackage{url}}{\let\url\texttt}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\usepackage[french,english]{babel}
+\or\relax
+\usepackage[french,english]{babel}
+\usepackage{franc,frnew}
+\fi
+\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc}
+%\def\ij{i\kern-.1ex j}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\ij}{T1}{188}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\IJ}{T1}{156}
+\usepackage[isolatin]{inputenc}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\or\relax
+\IfFileExists{mypatches.sty}{\usepackage{mypatches}}{\relax}
+\fi
+%\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% gray rules for tables/figures
+\definecolor{figrulecolor}{gray}{.82}
+%\definecolor{figrulecolor}{cmyk}{.7,.1,.1,.1} % ESSAIS
+\providecommand{\topfigrule}{\relax}
+\providecommand{\botfigrule}{\relax}
+\providecommand{\medfigrule}{\relax}
+\iffalse % NO figrules... sight
+\renewcommand{\topfigrule}{%
+  \vspace*{3pt}%
+  \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
+  \vspace*{-5pt}}
+\renewcommand{\botfigrule}{%
+  \vspace*{-3pt}%
+  \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
+  \vspace*{1pt}}
+\renewcommand{\medfigrule}{%
+  \vspace*{-3pt}%
+  \noindent\textcolor{figrulecolor}{\rule[0pt]{\textwidth}{2pt}}%
+  \vspace*{-2pt}}
+\fi % NO figrules... sight
+%
+%
+\makeatletter % to include some useful commands
+\providecommand{\BibTeX}{{\rm B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
+    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
+\renewcommand{\BibTeX}{{\rm B\kern-.05em\textsc{i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em
+    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
+\let\BiBTeX\BibTeX
+% IF YOU NOT HAVE THE manfnt FONT, the dangerous bends will not be printed...
+\IfFileExists{manfnt.sty}{% does not work with .tfm
+\typeout{manfnt.tfm FOUND}
+\newfont{\manfnt}{manfnt}
+\newcommand\virage{\marginpar[\raggedleft
+ {{\manfnt\symbol{'177}}~~}]{\raggedright {~~\manfnt\symbol{'177}}}}
+\def\@Vir{\hbox to12mm{\hbox{}\leaders%
+ \hbox{{\manfnt\char127}\kern2pt}\hfil\hbox{}}}
+\newcommand\Virage{\marginpar[\hfill{\@Vir~~}]{{~~\@Vir}\hfill}}%
+}%ELSE
+{\let\Virage\relax \let\virage\relax}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% END OF REPLACE
+\def\smooth{\spaceskip=0.3em  plus .8em minus .1em
+\xspaceskip=0.6em plus 1em minus .2em
+\pretolerance=10 \tolerance=10000 \looseness=-10000
+\parfillskip=0pt plus10fill\relax}%
+\newenvironment{SMOOTH}{\bgroup\smooth}{\par\egroup}
+%
+\def\Cat#1{\hbox{$\langle$\emph{#1}$\rangle$}}
+\def\<#1>{\Cat{#1}}
+%%%
+%%%% Some useful commands from Stefan Ulrich
+\newcommand\changeskips{%
+  \@tempdima\abovecaptionskip
+  \abovecaptionskip\belowcaptionskip
+  \belowcaptionskip\@tempdima
+}
+\newcommand\thickline{%
+  \noalign{\hrule\@height1pt\vskip.8ex\relax}%
+}
+\newcommand\V[1]{\texttt{\string#1}}
+\newcommand\Chap{$^*$}
+\newcommand\Sec{$^{**}$}
+\newcommand\Lang{$^\dag$}
+\newcommand\Strut{\rule[2.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}}
+\newcommand\Strutt{\rule[3.5ex]{0pt}{0pt}}
+\newcommand\FontDefault[2]{%
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+      #1\\
+      \hspace*{2em}#2
+  \end{tabular}%
+}
+\newcommand\FontChapSec[3]{%
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+      #1\\
+      \hspace*{2em}#2\Chap\\
+      \hspace*{2em}#3\Sec
+  \end{tabular}%
+}
+%\makeatother
+%\makeatletter
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
+\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage
+ \if@twoside
+  \ifodd\c@page\else
+   \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage
+   \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi
+   \fi
+  \fi
+ }%
+\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\makeatother
+\def\name#1#2{\penalty-1\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}}
+\def\xname#1#2{\mbox{\textrm{#1}~\textsc{#2}}}
+\parskip=12pt
+%\def\bs{{\ttfamily\char'134}}
+\def\bs{\textbackslash} %ESSAI
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+\setcounter{parttocdepth}{0} % only chapters
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{6}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.0}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.9999}
+\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.9999}
+\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9999}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{10}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{10}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{10}
+\makeatletter
+\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}% to push floats to top on float pages
+\makeatother
+\clubpenalty=10000
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\let\mysize\small
+\author{\name{Jean-Pierre F.}{Drucbert}\\%
+ONERA~/~Centre de Toulouse~/~SRI\\%
+\url{mailto:jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr}}
+\date{\today}
+\title{The \texttt{minitoc} package\\(version~\#43)}
+\parindent=0pt
+\hyphenation{biblio-gra-phy}
+\hyphenation{Biblio-gra-phy}
+\makeatletter
+\let\o@tocrmarg\@tocrmarg
+\def\@tocrmarg{\o@tocrmarg plus 1fil}
+% macros for needed vertical space
+\def\need#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i
+   \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi
+   \kern-\dimen@i
+   \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left
+   \ifdim #1>\dimen@
+        \vfill\eject\PackageInfo{'need' macro}{WARNING- EJECT BY NEED}
+   \fi
+   \kern\dimen@i
+   \endgroup}
+\def\lneed#1{\need{#1\baselineskip}}
+\def\sneed#1{\ifhmode\unskip\par\fi \penalty-100 \begingroup % preserve \dimen@, \dimen@i
+   \ifdim\prevdepth>\maxdepth \dimen@i\maxdepth \else \dimen@i\prevdepth\fi
+   \kern-\dimen@i
+   \dimen@\pagegoal \advance\dimen@-\pagetotal % space left
+   \ifdim #1>\dimen@
+        \vfill\null\newpage\PackageInfo{'sneed' macro}{WARNING- SOFT EJECT BY NEED}
+   \fi
+   \kern\dimen@i
+   \endgroup}
+\def\lsneed#1{\sneed{#1\baselineskip}}
+% to avoid a page break just after
+% a part/chapter/section title in a table of contents.
+\let\old@l@part\l@part
+\def\l@part{\lneed{6}\old@l@part}
+\let\old@l@chapter\l@chapter
+\def\l@chapter{\lneed{2.5}\old@l@chapter}
+\let\old@l@section\l@section
+\def\l@section{\lneed{1.5}\old@l@section}
+%
+%Donald Arseneau                         asnd@reg.triumf.ca
+% bottomfnote.sty
+\let\bf@makecolold=\@makecol
+\def\@makecol{\advance\skip\footins\fill \bf@makecolold}
+% end of bottomfnote.sty
+% enlarge section mumbers (numwidth) in tocs.
+\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.8em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{4.3em}{3.7em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.6em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5.5em}}
+\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6.5em}}
+%
+\renewcommand*\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+\makeatother
+\providecommand{\AmS}{$\mathcal{A}$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\mathcal{M}$}%
+            \kern-.125em$\mathcal{S}$}%
+%%%
+\providecommand{\BAR}{\texttt{\textbar}}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./mypatches.sty}
+% LOCAL PATCH
+% encoding T1 for \" (francais)
+\def\fileversion{v01}
+\def\filedate{2003/11/21}
+\ProvidesPackage{mypatches}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space
+                          Package mypatches]
+%\def\french@dieresis#1{{\accent"04 \if#1i\i\else#1\fi}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{T1}[1]{{\accent"4\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\french@dieresis}{OT1}[1]{{\accent"7F\if#1i\i\else#1\fi}}
+% encoding T1 for \w (czech)
+\gdef\czech@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1)
+\gdef\croatian@w#1{\accent'06 #1}% 06 for T1, was 23 (OT1)
+\global\let\w\czech@w
+% \q for czech
+\gdef\czech@q#1{#1\kern-2pt\char'47}%
+\global\let\q\czech@q
+\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{T1}{{\tt\char '20}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\boi}{OT1}{{\tt\char '134}}
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{T1}{{\char '6}}
+%\DeclareTextCommand{\degre}{OT1}{{\char '27}}
+\let\degre\undefined
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{'6}
+\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{'27}
+%
+\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\czech@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}}
+\global\let\w\czech@w
+%
+\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{T1}[1]{{\accent'06 #1}}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\croatian@w}{OT1}[1]{{\accent'23 #1}}
+\global\let\q\czech@q
+% Pb with \No (Nobelium) in chemsym.sty
+\let\Noo\No
+\let\No\undefined
+% \textcent, \textcurrentcy, \textyen, \textbrokenbar
+\ProvideTextCommand{\textcent}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char162}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\textcurrency}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char164}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\textyen}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char165}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\textbrokenbar}{T1}{{\fontencoding{TS1}\selectfont\char166}}
+\RequirePackage{boldsc}
+\RequirePackage{cmsd}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./boldsc.sty}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{boldsc}[1996/11/12]
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bx}{sc}{%
+  <5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12>%
+  <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>genb*ecxc%
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{b}{sc}{<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./franc.sty}
+\ProvidesPackage{franc}[1994/12/16]
+\def\figurename{Figure}
+\def\tablename{Table}
+\def\contentsname{Table des Mati\`eres}
+\def\listfigurename{Liste des Figures}
+\def\listtablename{Liste des Tableaux}
+\def\bibname{Bibliographie}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+\def\chaptername{Chapitre}
+\def\appendixname{Appendice}
+\def\partname{Partie}
+\def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e}
+\def\seename{voir}
+\def\alsoseename{voir aussi}
+\def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm er}$\else\number\day\fi \space\ifcase\month\or
+janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or juin\or
+juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or d\'ecembre\fi
+\space\number\year}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./frbib.sty}
+%
+%   Pour la bibliographie:
+%
+% En fonction du style french, par de'faut en anglais :
+% Si on ne fait pas de traduction de mots en franc,ais ou que cette notion
+%       n'existe pas, on fait tout en anglais :
+
+%%% Correction --bg 2001/08/03
+%%%\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\let\ifFTR\iffalse\fi
+\def\@tempa{\let\ifFTR\iffalse}
+\ifx\ifFTR\iftrue\else\expandafter\@tempa\fi
+
+\newcommand{\andname}{\ifFTR et\else and\fi}
+\newcommand{\editorname}{\ifFTR \'editeur\else editor\fi}
+\newcommand{\editornames}{\ifFTR \'editeurs\else editors\fi}
+\newcommand{\volumename}{\ifFTR volume\else volume\fi}
+\newcommand{\Volumename}{\ifFTR Volume\else volumes\fi}
+\newcommand{\ofname}{\ifFTR de\else of\fi}
+\newcommand{\numbername}{\ifFTR num\'ero\else number\fi}
+\newcommand{\Numbername}{\ifFTR Num\'ero\else Number\fi}
+\newcommand{\inname}{\ifFTR dans\else in\fi}
+\newcommand{\Inname}{\ifFTR Dans\else In\fi}
+\newcommand{\editionname}{\ifFTR \'edition\else edition\fi}
+%\def\pagename{\ifFTR page\else page \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty.
+\newcommand{\pagesname}{\ifFTR pages\else pages\fi}
+%\newcommand{\chaptername}{\ifFTR chapitre\else  \fi} de'ja` dans french.sty.
+\newcommand{\technicalreportname}{\ifFTR Rapport Technique\else Technical
+        Report\fi}
+\newcommand{\revisionname}{\ifFTR R\'evision\else Revision\fi}
+\newcommand{\janname}{\ifFTR janvier\else January\fi}
+\newcommand{\febname}{\ifFTR f\'evrier\else February\fi}
+\newcommand{\marname}{\ifFTR mars\else March \fi}
+\newcommand{\aprname}{\ifFTR avril\else April\fi}
+\newcommand{\mayname}{\ifFTR mai\else May\fi}
+\newcommand{\junname}{\ifFTR juin\else June\fi}
+\newcommand{\julname}{\ifFTR juillet\else July\fi}
+\newcommand{\augname}{\ifFTR ao\^ut\else August\fi}
+\newcommand{\sepname}{\ifFTR septembre\else September\fi}
+\newcommand{\octname}{\ifFTR octobre\else October\fi}
+\newcommand{\novname}{\ifFTR novembre\else November\fi}
+\newcommand{\decname}{\ifFTR d\'ecembre\else December\fi}
+\end{filecontents}
+\begin{filecontents}{./frnew.sty}
+%permet dans la frappe de retrouver les habitudes de
+%la dactylographie francaise qui conseille de mettre
+%un espace avant les signes de ponctuation ; : ! ?
+%et d'empecher pourtant une coupure de ligne a cet
+%endroit dans le traitement
+\def\dospecials{\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~\do\!\do\?\do\:\do\;}
+\catcode`\@=11
+\catcode`\;=\active
+\catcode`\:=\active
+\catcode`\!=\active
+\catcode`\?=\active
+\def;{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
+  \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string;}
+\def:{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
+  \unskip\fi\penalty\@M\ \fi\string:}
+\def!{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
+  \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string!}
+\def?{\relax\ifhmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@
+  \unskip\fi\kern.25em\fi\string?}
+\let\old@C\^
+\let\old@T\"
+%\uccode"10=`I
+%\uccode"11=`J
+\uccode`\i=`I
+\uccode`\j=`J
+\def\^#1{\ifx#1i{\old@C\i}\else{\old@C #1}\fi}
+\def\"#1{\ifx#1i{\old@T\i}\else{\old@T #1}\fi}
+\def\og{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}}
+\def\fg{\leavevmode\raise.3ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\,\rangle\!\rangle$}}
+\def\guill#1{\og\relax #1\relax\fg}
+\frenchspacing
+\def\fron{\catcode`\;=\active
+\catcode`\:=\active
+\catcode`\!=\active
+\catcode`\?=\active
+\frenchspacing}
+\def\froff{\catcode`\;=12
+\catcode`\:=12
+\catcode`\!=12
+\catcode`\?=12
+\nonfrenchspacing}
+\def\@tochtitle{Table des Chapitres}
+\def\@utochtitle{TABLE DES CHAPITRES}
+\def\@Hint{Indications}
+%%%  Espace apres le :
+\fron
+\end{filecontents}
+%%
+%% Copyright (C) 2005 by:
+%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
+%% <jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
+%%
+%% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+%% the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
+%% or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+%% license is in:
+%% 
+%%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% 
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the minitoc package
+%% given in the file `minitoc.l'.
+%%
+
+\input docstrip.tex
+\keepsilent
+
+%\usedir{tex/latex/minitoc}
+\usedir{.}
+
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright (C) 2005 by:
+Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
+<jean-pierre.drucbert@onera.fr>
+
+This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of
+the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 of this license
+or (at your option) any later version.  The latest version of this
+license is in:
+
+   http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version
+2003/12/01 or later.
+
+This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained".
+
+This Current Maintainer of this work is Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert.
+
+This work consists of all the files listed in the file `minitoc.l'
+distributed with it.
+
+\endpreamble
+
+\generate{\file{minitoc.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{minitoc}}}
+\generate{\file{fminitoc.dtx}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{fminitoc}}}
+\generate{\file{mtcoff.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcoff}}}
+\generate{\file{mtcpatchmem.sty}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mtcpatchmem}}}
+\generate{\file{acadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadian}}}
+\generate{\file{acadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{acadien}}}
+\generate{\file{afrikaan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaan}}}
+\generate{\file{afrikaans.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{afrikaans}}}
+\generate{\file{american.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{american}}}
+\generate{\file{arab.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arab}}}
+\generate{\file{arabic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{arabic}}}
+\generate{\file{armenian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{armenian}}}
+\generate{\file{austrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{austrian}}}
+\generate{\file{bahasa.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bahasa}}}
+\generate{\file{bangla.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bangla}}}
+\generate{\file{basque.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{basque}}}
+\generate{\file{bicig.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bicig}}}
+\generate{\file{brazil.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazil}}}
+\generate{\file{brazilian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{brazilian}}}
+\generate{\file{breton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{breton}}}
+\generate{\file{british.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{british}}}
+\generate{\file{bulgarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarian}}}
+\generate{\file{bulgarianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{bulgarianb}}}
+\generate{\file{buryat.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{buryat}}}
+\generate{\file{canadian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadian}}}
+\generate{\file{canadien.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{canadien}}}
+\generate{\file{castillan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillan}}}
+\generate{\file{castillian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{castillian}}}
+\generate{\file{catalan.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{catalan}}}
+\generate{\file{chinese1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese1}}}
+\generate{\file{chinese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{chinese2}}}
+\generate{\file{croatian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{croatian}}}
+\generate{\file{czech.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{czech}}}
+\generate{\file{danish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{danish}}}
+\generate{\file{dutch.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{dutch}}}
+\generate{\file{english.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{english}}}
+\generate{\file{esperant.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperant}}}
+\generate{\file{esperanto.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{esperanto}}}
+\generate{\file{estonian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{estonian}}}
+\generate{\file{ethiopia.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopia}}}
+\generate{\file{ethiopian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ethiopian}}}
+\generate{\file{farsi1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi1}}}
+\generate{\file{farsi2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{farsi2}}}
+\generate{\file{finnish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish}}}
+\generate{\file{finnish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{finnish2}}}
+\generate{\file{francais.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{francais}}}
+\generate{\file{french.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{french}}}
+\generate{\file{frenchb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchb}}}
+\generate{\file{frenchle.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchle}}}
+\generate{\file{frenchpro.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{frenchpro}}}
+\generate{\file{galician.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{galician}}}
+\generate{\file{german.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{german}}}
+\generate{\file{germanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{germanb}}}
+\generate{\file{greek.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek}}}
+\generate{\file{greek-mono.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-mono}}}
+\generate{\file{greek-polydemo.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polydemo}}}
+\generate{\file{greek-polykatha.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{greek-polykatha}}}
+\generate{\file{guarani.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{guarani}}}
+\generate{\file{hangul1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul1}}}
+\generate{\file{hangul2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul2}}}
+\generate{\file{hangul3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul3}}}
+\generate{\file{hangul4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hangul4}}}
+\generate{\file{hanja1.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja1}}}
+\generate{\file{hanja2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hanja2}}}
+\generate{\file{hebrew.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hebrew}}}
+\generate{\file{hungarian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{hungarian}}}
+\generate{\file{icelandic.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{icelandic}}}
+\generate{\file{interlingua.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{interlingua}}}
+\generate{\file{irish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{irish}}}
+\generate{\file{italian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{italian}}}
+\generate{\file{japanese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese}}}
+\generate{\file{japanese2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese2}}}
+\generate{\file{japanese3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese3}}}
+\generate{\file{japanese4.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese4}}}
+\generate{\file{japanese5.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{japanese5}}}
+\generate{\file{latin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin}}}
+\generate{\file{latin2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latin2}}}
+\generate{\file{latvian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{latvian}}}
+\generate{\file{letton.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{letton}}}
+\generate{\file{lithuanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lithuanian}}}
+\generate{\file{lsorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{lsorbian}}}
+\generate{\file{magyar.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar}}}
+\generate{\file{magyar2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{magyar2}}}
+\generate{\file{malayalam-keli.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-keli}}}
+\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana}}}
+\generate{\file{malayalam-rachana2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{malayalam-rachana2}}}
+\generate{\file{mongol.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{mongol}}}
+\generate{\file{naustrian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{naustrian}}}
+\generate{\file{ngerman.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngerman}}}
+\generate{\file{ngermanb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ngermanb}}}
+\generate{\file{norsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{norsk}}}
+\generate{\file{nynorsk.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{nynorsk}}}
+\generate{\file{polish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish}}}
+\generate{\file{polish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{polish2}}}
+\generate{\file{portuges.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuges}}}
+\generate{\file{portuguese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{portuguese}}}
+\generate{\file{romanian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{romanian}}}
+\generate{\file{russian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian}}}
+\generate{\file{russian2m.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2m}}}
+\generate{\file{russian2o.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russian2o}}}
+\generate{\file{russianb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianb}}}
+\generate{\file{russianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{russianc}}}
+\generate{\file{samin.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{samin}}}
+\generate{\file{scottish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{scottish}}}
+\generate{\file{serbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbian}}}
+\generate{\file{serbianc.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{serbianc}}}
+\generate{\file{slovak.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovak}}}
+\generate{\file{slovene.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{slovene}}}
+\generate{\file{spanish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish}}}
+\generate{\file{spanish2.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish2}}}
+\generate{\file{spanish3.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{spanish3}}}
+\generate{\file{swedish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{swedish}}}
+\generate{\file{thai.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{thai}}}
+\generate{\file{turkish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{turkish}}}
+\generate{\file{UKenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{UKenglish}}}
+\generate{\file{ukraineb.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{ukraineb}}}
+\generate{\file{USenglish.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{USenglish}}}
+\generate{\file{usorbian.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{usorbian}}}
+\generate{\file{vietnam.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnam}}}
+\generate{\file{vietnamese.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{vietnamese}}}
+\generate{\file{welsh.mld}{\from{minitoc.dtx}{welsh}}}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{*************************************************************}
+\Msg{*                                                           *}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following *}
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:                    *}
+\Msg{*                                                           *}
+\Msg{*     minitoc.sty mtcoff.sty mtcpatchmem.sty *.mld *.mlo    *}
+\Msg{*                                                           *}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file minitoc.dtx     *}
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.                                            *}
+\Msg{*                                                           *}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!                                             *}
+\Msg{*                                                           *}
+\Msg{*************************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile